repair hvac eod office building 90621 - Green

repair hvac eod office building 90621 - Green
PROJECT # FTEV 12-1101
DATE: 17 FEBRUARY 2015
DEPARTMENT OF THE AIR FORCE
SPECIAL OPERATIONS COMMAND
1 SPECIAL OPERATIONS WING
REPAIR HVAC EOD OFFICE BUILDING 90621
HURLBURT FIELD, FLORIDA
MS0612
INDEX
DIVISION 01
01 00 00
01 09 00
01 10 00
01 33 00
01 41 00
01 56 00
01 58 00
01 60 00
01 65 00
01 70 00
01 81 13
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Requirements
Reference Standards
Summary of Work
Submittals
Testing Laboratory Services
Environmental Protection
Project Identification Sign
Material and Equipment
Starting of Systems
Contract Closeout
Green Procurement
DIVISION 03
03 10 00
03 20 00
03 30 00
03 35 00
03 39 00
CONCRETE
Concrete Forming and Accessories
Concrete Reinforcement
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Concrete Finishing
Concrete Curing
DIVISION 04 MASONRY
04 05 03
Masonry Mortaring and Grouting
04 20 00
Unit Masonry
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 20
Sprayed Polyurethane Foam (SPF) Insulation
DIVISION 08 OPENINGS
08 33 23
Overhead Coiling Doors
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
09 21 16
Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 51 13
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09 90 00
Painting and Coating
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10 44 00
Fire Protection Specialties
DIVISION 23
23 05 00
23 05 01
23 05 19
23 05 29
23 05 53
23 05 93
23 07 00
23 08 00
23 09 23
23 21 13
23 21 16
23 21 23
23 25 00
23 31 00
23 33 00
23 36 00
23 37 00
HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Common Work Results for HVAC
Mechanical Demolition
Gages
Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
HVAC Insulation
Commissioning of HVAC
Direct Digital Control System for HVAC
Hydronic Piping
Hydronic Piping Specialties
Backflow Prevention Device Inspection and Maintenance Form
Hydronic Pumps
HVAC Water Treatment
HVAC Ducts and Casings
Air Duct Accessories
Air Terminal Units
Air Outlets and Inlets
I-1
MS0612
23 51 00
23 52 34
23 64 10
23 73 00
Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks
Finned Water-Tube Boilers
Package Air-Cooled Water Chillers
Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units
DIVISION 26
26 05 00
26 05 19
26 05 26
26 05 27
26 05 29
26 05 33
26 05 34
26 05 53
26 24 16
26 28 19
26 35 33
ELECTRICAL
Basic Electrical Requirements
Building Wire and Cable
Grounding and Bonding
Secondary Grounding
Supporting Devices
Conduit
Boxes
Electrical Identification
Panelboards
Disconnect Switches
Surge Suppressors
DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00
Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 12 16
Asphaltic Concrete Paving for Roads and Parking Lots
32 92 23
Sodding
END OF INDEX
I-2
MS0114
SECTION 01 00 00:
PART 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
1.01
INTENT:
A. The intent of this project is to provide the Government with a fully complete and useable building meeting
all the requirements for its intended use, constructed to high standards and the requirements of the
Contract Documents. A fully complete and useable building is defined as one that is constructed to meet
the aesthetic, functional and structural properties required by the drawings, specifications, amendments
issued prior to receipt of bids/proposals, and modifications issued after award of the contract. All work
shall be constructed to meet or exceed industry or government standards, whichever is more stringent.
All construction shall be executed in a professional manner resulting in a finished product of highest
quality. All materials, equipment, and other products used in the construction shall be new or approved
recyclable materials from an approved source. All new work shall be maintained in a clean condition, and
shall be installed plumb, square, true to line and grade, and shall conform to the stated dimensions,
notes, schedules, etc. The work shall be properly secured, consistent in quality, fit and finish, and
installation, etc.
1.02
APPLICABILITY:
A. This section of the specification is applicable to all sections that follow.
1.03
INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
A. Prospective bidders desiring further information, interpretation or clarification of the contract documents
shall forward a written request to the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer is the sole authority
for interpretation of intent of work and for approval of quality of materials and workmanship.
Failure to request the above shall not be the basis for a change order. DO NOT ASSUME THAT
YOUR INTERPRETATION IS CORRECT.
1.04
CONFLICTS, DISCREPANCIES OR AMBIGUITIES:
A. Prior to submittal of a bid or proposal by the prime/general contractor, it is expected that each
subcontractor, equipment and/or material supplier, and others associated with the project, shall have
carefully examined as necessary, the drawings, specifications, and all addenda issued prior to the date of
submission of the bid or proposal. Any and all conflicts, discrepancies or ambiguous language reasonably
ascertainable from an inspection of the above and the project site that will affect the cost, quality, fit,
finish, labor specified or required, equipment and/or materials specified or required, etc., necessary to
fully complete the project and make it operational for it’s intended use, must immediately be
brought to the attention of the prime/general contractor. The prime/general contractor must
immediately notify the Contracting Officer in writing prior to submitting a bid or proposal and
request written clarification of the conflict and/or discrepancy.
B. Conflicts, discrepancies and ambiguous language that are inconsistent with the intent as stated above
include but are not limited to:
1. Ambiguous notes or statements or drawings or details.
2. Conflicting information on the drawings and/or in the specifications.
3. Errors or inconsistencies in schedules.
4. Dimensional errors.
5. Incomplete notes or dimensions or schedules.
6. Extraneous notes, dimensions or schedules that conflict with the drawings or specifications.
C. Conflicts, discrepancies or ambiguities brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer AFTER
award of contract WILL NOT be considered as a basis for a change in the work.
D. The intent of the above paragraphs is to increase the involvement of all persons associated with the project,
particularly during the bid or proposal phase. Increased involvement during this phase will enhance the
accuracy of the bid or proposal and reduce the potential for issuance of change orders during the construction
phase.
1.05
DEFINITIONS:
01 00 00 - 1
MS0114
A. “Contract Documents": Contract Documents consist of the Contract, drawings and specifications, all
addenda issued prior to submission of the bid/proposal and all modifications and/or other directives issued
after the award/execution of the contract. The intent of the Contract Documents is to provide the Contractor
with all items of work necessary for the proper execution and completion of the project. The items listed are
complementary, what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. In the event of a conflict
between the drawings and the specifications, the specifications shall take precedence over the drawings,
unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The Contractor shall perform all work consistent with and
reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents as necessary to produce the intended results.
B. “Government”: The government is the United States of America. The government is the owner of the
project.
C. “Prime Contractor”: The Prime/General Contractor is the person or entity who is qualified, bonded and
insured, and who is responsible for preparing the bid/proposal and submitting it to the government. If the
bid/proposal is accepted, the prime contractor will enter into a contract with the government to construct the
work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The term “contractor” is used throughout the contract
documents, and is synonymous with Prime/General Contractor, and means the contractor or the contractor’s
authorized representative.
D.
“Subcontractor”: A Subcontractor is a person or entity who prepares and submits a bid/proposal for a
portion of the work to the contractor for his use in preparing his bid/proposal. During the construction phase,
the subcontractor has a direct contract with the contractor to perform a portion of the work.
E. “Material/Equipment Suppliers”: Material/equipment suppliers are person(s) or entities who prepare and
submit a bid/proposal to the contractor for his use in preparing his bid/proposal. During the construction
phase, the material equipment supplier has a direct contract with the contractor to provide certain materials or
equipment to be incorporated into the work.
F. “Project”: The project is the total construction of the work to be performed under the contract documents and
may be the whole or part and which may include construction by the government.
G. “Work”: The term work means the providing of construction services required by the contract documents,
and includes all labor, materials, equipment and other incidentals necessary to fulfill the contractor’s
obligations. The work constitutes the whole project.
H. “Changes in the Work”: Changes in the work may be accomplished after award of contract without
invalidating the contract. Changes in the work shall be based upon a mutual agreement between the
contractor and the government. Changes in the work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the
contract documents unless otherwise provided for in the change. The time to complete the additional work
shall also be a part of the agreement.
1.06
COORDINATION:
A. The prime contractor is responsible for the overall coordination of the project during the bid and or
the proposal phase and the construction phase.
1. Coordinate bid and or the proposal phase to assure that all materials, labor, equipment, etc., to be used
in the construction of the project and necessary for the completion of the prime contractor’s bid/proposal,
as defined in 1.01 above, are included in the bids of the respective suppliers and/or subcontractors work,
i.e., civil, architectural, plumbing, HVAC, or electrical.
2. Coordinate construction phase to assure efficient and orderly progression of the work. Coordination
shall include, but is not limited to, periodic meetings between the contractor and subcontractors to
coordinate the work of each trade one with the other, installation of one part of the work that is dependent
on the installation of other components either before or after it's own installation, the materials and
equipment needed to properly complete the work and ordering of those materials and equipment,
preparation of schedules, layouts and phasing of the work as required to meet the government's stated
needs, installation of and removal of temporary facilities, preparation and delivery of submittals including
shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data, etc., scheduling of construction activities in the sequence
required to obtain the best results, installation of different components within the allotted space to assure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance or repair, periodic inspections of the work to assure
compliance with the Contract Documents, visual inspections of the work to assure compliance with
aesthetic requirements, maintenance and completion of all contract closeout documents including the
01 00 00 - 2
MS0114
coordination of supporting closeout documents by all subcontractors, maintenance and completion of
Construction Data Worksheet, verification of new utility connections to each item of existing and new
equipment, verify measurements of existing and new work prior to installation of various components,
proper storage of materials at the site particularly items requiring specific environmental conditions,
protection of completed new work to minimize damage by other trades, cleaning, correction of punch list
items of work after the final inspection, correction of warranty items during the warranty period, etc.
3. The prime contractor, each subcontractor, each equipment or material supplier and others who may be
affiliated with the project are individually responsible for field verification of existing and new conditions
that will affect their work, including the work of associated trades. Do not order, fabricate or install new
items without field verification. Any discrepancy between the actual field dimension(s) and the size shown
on the drawings, specifications, shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data, etc. must immediately be
brought to the attention of the prime contractor, project inspector and Contracting Officer. The prime
contractor shall request written direction from the Contracting Officer.
4. Prior to performing any Site work or work below grade, the Contractor must obtain a completed and
signed copy of AF FORM 103, Base Civil Engineering Work Clearance Request.
5. Prior to bringing any lasers on Hurlburt Field, the contractor shall notify the Bio Environmental office 8811822 and the Safety Office 884-2610.
B. Individual sections of this specification are taken from the Base Master Specification. Therefore, not all
products (materials, equipment, etc.) specified may be required to complete the construction of this project.
In accordance with 1.05 above, the contractor, each subcontractor, equipment and/or material supplier, and
others associated with the project, must carefully examine the drawings to determine which products are
required to fully complete the work. See paragraph 1.04 Discrepancies.
1.07
CONSTRUCTION DATA WORKSHEET
A. The contractor must complete the checklist attached at the end of this section.
1. Section 1.a. General Data Required: The government will complete Category Code and Facility number.
2. Section 1.b. Systems in Building: All.
1.08
METHODS:
A. The site shall be prepared, maintained, and operated by the contractor throughout the Work.
Such preparation, maintenance, and operation include but are not limited to:
1. Preparation: Prevent damage to all existing construction, existing equipment and furnishings, existing
utilities and paved areas, and new items such as recently installed materials and equipment, new stored
materials, trees/shrubs/landscape features identified to remain at the site, and privately owned vehicles in
and around the work site. The contractor responsible for the damage will be held liable for the repair or
replacement of the damaged item as directed by the Contracting Officer.
2. Safety and Security: Occupied and unoccupied facilities must be maintained in a safe manner to prevent
the possibility of injury to the occupants and workmen. Upon completion of the days work, the contractor
is responsible for securing the facility to prevent unlawful entry to the facility. If the interior of the facility or
any equipment or furnishings are damaged due to the contractor's failure to properly secure the facility,
the prime contractor and/or the subcontractor responsible for securing the facility will be held liable for the
repair of the facility and replacement of the damaged equipment or furnishings as directed by the
Contracting Officer.
3. Maintenance: Maintain the site in a neat and orderly manner to include daily trash/debris removal,
stacking of material, control of surface drainage, mowing, and road sweeping.
4. Operation: Follow Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements, US Army Corps of
Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual EM 385-1-1, base law enforcement and base fire
marshal requirements.
5. Trailers used for storage and/or temporary field offices shall be clean and well maintained and display
only the name of the contractor or subcontractor.
1.09
CONSTRUCTION:
A. All work will be of professional quality. Intent of construction includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Utility connections shall be clean and complete. Contractor must request a utility outage from the
Contracting Officer no less than 3 working days prior to a scheduled outage for a single facility, and 14
days for outages affecting multiple facilities.
2. Backfilling and compaction will be performed so settling shall not occur.
01 00 00 - 3
MS0114
3. All disturbed areas and all new graded areas shall be graded smooth and sodded. Seeding will be
permitted only if indicated on the drawings and/or approved by the Contracting Officer. Also, see other
applicable sections(s) of the specification.
4. Construction shall be built to minimum industry tolerances unless otherwise noted and shall be square,
true to line and grade, plumb and straight. Construct to the dimensions and elevations given on the
drawings.
5. Finishes shall be consistent in color and texture, and shall cover all exposed surfaces, including obscure
surfaces.
6. All work shall be constructed and/or installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written
instructions, copies of which must be included with submittal documents.
7. Road/pavement cuts are not permitted unless approved by the Contracting Officer. If approved,
road/pavement cuts must be submitted to the 1Special Operations Civil Engineering Squadron, Programs
Flight (1 SOCES/CEP) in writing, two weeks prior to the scheduled road/pavement cut.
8. Under no circumstances will a utility outage or road cut be permitted without the required notification
unless the Base Civil Engineer deems it an emergency.
9. Any contractor that connects to a Hurlburt Field fire hydrant for water usage must use an approved
backflow preventer and provide proof to the 1 SOCES/CEAN (ASSETT Management Flight) through the
Contracting Officer that they are using a certified backflow prevention device. The certificate must be
current to within 12 months of the date of connection and through the duration of water usage.
Certification must be by a Certified Backflow Tester certified by the State.
10. Temporary electric power, natural gas and water used by the contractor during construction shall be
provided by the government at no cost to the contractor. The contractor shall provide temporary meters
for each utility. Each temporary meter shall be read by the contractor monthly on the last
working day of the month and submitted to the Hurlburt Field Energy Manager on that same day. At the
completion of the project and acceptance by the government, the contractor shall remove the temporary
meters and make the final connections to the utility.
1.10
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS:
A. This project shall be constructed to conform to the latest edition of the following standards.
1. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
2. ACI: American Concrete Institute
3. International Code Council
a. International Building Code
b. International Fuel Gas Code
c. International Mechanical Code
d. International Plumbing Code
e. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
f. NEC: National Electric Code
g. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings.
h. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) UFC 3-600-01, Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities.
i. Americans with Disabilities Act
j. ASCE 7-98
k. 1 Special Operations Civil Engineer Squadron Design & Construction Standards. (Copy in 1 SOCES
Engineering Flight office)
l. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) UFC 3-210-10, Low Impact Development.
B. The contractor is required to comply with all aspects of the Federal Aviation Regulation (FAR), Part 77,
Objects Affecting Navigable Airspace, for all work associated with this contract. This includes, but is not
limited to, the use of any and all equipment used to construct the facility and the facility itself. The contractor
is required to obtain all necessary permits including FAA form 7460-1 (latest edition) and provide all
necessary notices associated with this requirement. All work within the following areas must be coordinated
in writing with the Contracting Officer 21 days in advance of commencement of the work:
1. LATERAL CLEARANCE AREA: A line 1000 feet from and parallel to the centerline of the runway.
2. TAXIWAY SETBACK: A line 200 feet from and parallel to the centerline of any taxiway.
3. APRON SETBACK: A line 125 feet from and parallel to the edge of the aircraft-parking apron.
4. CLEAR ZONE: A line 1500 feet from and parallel to the centerline of the runway beginning at the runway
threshold and continuing for a distance of 3000 feet north and south of the ends of the runway.
C. A copy of FAR Part 77, and permit applications may be obtained from:
ARP Division ASO-600
01 00 00 - 4
MS0114
Federal Aviation Administration
P. O. Box 20636
Atlanta, Georgia 30320
Phone 404-3056700
1.11
SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Throughout these specifications and/or on the drawings one or more "Trade Names" for a product may be
listed. When this occurs, all parties agree that the phrases: "or equal," "or approved equal," and "or equal
as approved," follow each "Trade Name" listed. The contractor may submit substitute products, meeting
the identified salient characteristics (physical and functional), to the Contracting Officer for review and
approval. The term “Trade Names” includes Acceptable Manufacturers listed under PART 2 PRODUCTS of
the specifications.
B. Approval Required:
1. The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents.
2. All products proposed for use, including those specified by required attributes and performance shall
require approval by the Contracting Officer before being incorporated into the work.
3. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless such substitution has been
specifically reviewed and approved for this Contract by the Contracting Officer.
4. Refer to section 01 60 00 for substitution submittal requirements.
C. Do not assume that materials, equipment or methods submitted, as a substitution, will be approved
as equal. The Contracting Officer is the sole interpreter of the Contract Documents.
1.12
ASBESTOS:
A. See section 01 56 00, Environmental Protection
1.13
LEAD BASED PAINT
A. See section 01 56 00, Environmental Protection
1.14
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. See section 01 56 00, Environmental Protection
1.15
CONTRACT PROGRESS REPORT
A. Contractor progress reports shall be made in a timely manner and in accordance with the contract
documents.
B. Contractor shall use the Contract Progress Report form at the end of this section. As indicated on the form, all
listed items of work may not be applicable to this project. Contractor shall submit completed form to include
only those items of work applicable to this project.
C. Item 73, “Close-Out Documents” has been assigned a value of 3%:
1. This amount will be withheld from final payment until such time as all project record documents; "As-Built"
drawings, operation & maintenance manuals & data, spare parts & maintenance products, warranties,
maintenance service, etc., have been turned over to the government. The withholding of payment is not a
penalty but is being done to assure compliance with specification Section 01 70 00 CONTRACT
CLOSEOUT.
2. The government will not provide a final inspection or accept Beneficial Occupancy of the building
until all the above documents have been turned over to the government. The contractor and
subcontractors are advised to prepare these documents as the work progresses and not wait until the end
of the project.
1.16
CONTRACT PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. The contractor must provide a copy of the Contract Progress Schedule for review by the Contracting Officer
and the Construction Manager no later than 5 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. If
disapproved, the contractor shall resubmit the revised Contract Progress Schedule within 2 days of the date
of the disapproval. The Contract Progress Schedule must be approved within 10 days of the date of the
disapproval. No construction work shall start without an approved Contract Progress Schedule.
B. The Contract Progress Schedule must be based on the data in the Contract Progress Report attached to the
01 00 00 - 5
MS0114
end of the section.
C. In order to satisfy the contract requirements that work commence within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, the
contractor may commence the submittal process in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 00 00 - 6
MS0114
CONSTRUCTION DATA WORKSHEET
1. GENERAL DATA REQUIRED:
A. PROJECT INFORMATION:
Project No.: Contract No.:
,
Completion Date:
_____
Category Code: ___________, Facility No.: ____________,
Total Cost: ___________________
Liquidated Damages______________________________.
Number of Floors: ______________
General Description: ___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
B. SYSTEMS IN BUILDING:
Category
Code
Unit of
Nomenclature
Measure
880-211
Closed Head Auto Sprinkler
HD/SF
880-217
880-221
880-232
872-841
811-147
821-115
821-116
890-125
890-121
826-122
826-123
890-126
824-464
844-368
852-261
852-262
132-133
132-134
890-272
812-223
812-224
812-225
812-226
812-926
812-928
831-157
831-169
832-266
832-267
842-245
843-314
843-315
851-143
AFFF PA Sprink Sys
HD/SF
Auto Fire Detection System
SF/EA
(Include Pull Stations)
Foam Fire System
EA
Security Alarm System
EA
Electric Emergency Power
Generator
KW
Storage Tank for Heating
GA
Or Generator Fuel (Type Fuel)
Storage Tank for Heating
GA
Heating Plt 750/3500 MB
MB
Heating Plt over 3500 MB
MB
Storage Tank for Heating
GA
A/C Plt less 5 TN
TN
A/C Plt 5 to 25 TN
TN
A/C Plt 25 to 100 TN
TN
A/C Plt Over 100 TN
TN
A/C Window Units
SF/TN
Gas Mains
LF
Water Supply, Non-Potable
KG
Veh. Parking (Ops)
SY
Veh. Parking (Non-Org)
SY
Pad, Equip
SY
Ant. Spt Stru
EA
EMCS Field Equip
EA
Prim Dist Line OH
LF
Transformers
KV
Sec Dist Line OH
LF
Prim Dist Line UG
LF
Sec Dist Line UG
LF
Exterior Lighting
EA
(Street or Parking area Lights)
Traffic Lights
EA
Industrial Waste Fuel
Spill Collection (Oil/Fuel)
KG
Sewage Septic Tank
KG
(Facility # it supports)
Sanitary Sewer Main
LF
Sanitary Sewage Pump Station
SF
Water Dist Mains
LF
Fire Protection Water Main
LF
Fire Hydrants
EA
Curbs & Gutters
SY
(Transition between Road & Parking lot)
Amount
Cost
Description (If Required)
____/___
_______
______________________
____/ ___
____/ ___
_______
_______
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
_______
________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
____/ ___
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
________
________
01 00 00 - 7
________
________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
MS0114
C. RELATED FACILITIES:
Category
Code
Nomenclature
851-145
Driveway
147
Road
871-183
Storm Drain Disposal
872-245
Fence, Boundary
872-247
Fence, Security
872-248
Fence, Interior
852-289
Sidewalk
890-269
Cathodic Protection Sys
890-181
Utility Line Duct-Elec
890-181
Utility Line Duct-Comm
890-158
Load and Unload Platform
832-255
Industrial Waste Main
UM
SY
SY
LF
LF
LF
LF
SY
EA
LF
LF
EA
LF
Amount
Cost
_
________ ________
________
________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
Description (If Reqd.)
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
_________________
__________________
This checklist includes only the basic general construction category codes. More detailed category code listing information is
available through the Real Property office, 884-6167.
01 00 00 - 8
851-
MS0114
CONTRACT PROGRESS REPORT
CONTRACTOR
ADDRESS
REPORT PERIOD COVERED
NO.
FROM
PROJECT NO. / TITLE
TO
CONTRACT AMOUNT
CONTRACT NO.
COMPLETION DATE
$
NOTE:
ALL ITEMS LISTED MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETED FORM TO
INCLUDE ONLY THOSE ITEMS THAT ARE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT.
LINE
NO.
% OF TOTAL
JOB
WORK ELEMENTS
1
MOBILIZATION
2
DEMOLITION - ARCHITECTURAL
3
ASBESTOS / LEAD ABATEMENT
4
SITE PREPARATION
5
SITE UTILITIES
6
SITE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
7
SITE FINISH GRADING
8
SITE LANDSCAPING
9
ASPHALT PAVING / BASE
10
CONCRETE CURB / GUTTER
11
CONCRETE BUILDING SLAB / VAPOR BARRIER
12
CONCRETE WALKS / LANDINGS
13
CONCRETE FOOTINGS
14
CONCRETE BEAMS / COLUMNS
15
MASONRY FOUNDATIONS
16
MASONRY SCREENWALLS
17
MASONRY VENEER
18
STRUCTURAL STEEL
19
MISCELLANEOUS METALS / HANDRAILS / GRATES
20
WOOD AND PLASTICS
21
WALL INSULATION
22
ROOF INSULATION
23
EIFS
24
WINDOWS
25
EXTERIOR DOORS
26
STOREFRONT
27
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
28
INTERIOR DOORS
29
HARDWARE
30
EXTERIOR METAL STUDWALLS / SHEATHING
31
INTERIOR METAL STUDWALLS / SHEATHING
32
PAINTING
33
WALL COVERING
34
TOILET ACCESSORIES
35
TOILET PARTITIONS / URINAL SCREEN
36
SIGNAGE
37
RAISED ACCESS FLOOR
01 00 00 - 9
% COMPLETED
THIS PERIOD
% COMPLETE
CUMULATIVE
MS0114
LINE
NO.
38
WORK ELEMENTS
% OF TOTAL
39
PEMB ROOF / FASCIA
41
ELEVATORS / CONVEYING SYSTEMS
42
DEMOLITION - MECHANICAL / PLUMBING
43
NEW WATER / SEWER / NATURAL GAS SERVICE
44
PLUMBING ROUGH-IN UNDER SLAB
45
HVAC ROUGH-IN UNDER SLAB
46
PLUMBING ROUGH-IN ABOVE SLAB
47
PLUMBING FIXTURE / TRIM-OUT
48
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
49
PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION
50
DUCTWORK
51
HYDRONIC PIPING
52
FIRE SUPPRESSION
53
HVAC EQUIPMENT
54
GRILLES / DIFFUSERS/ TRIM-OUT
55
CONTROLS
56
TEST AND BALANCE
57
DEMOLITION - ELECTRICAL
58
ELECTRIC SERVICE TEMPORARY
59
TRANSFORMER
60
PRIMARY OVERHEAD ELECTRIC SERVICE
61
PRIMARY UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE
62
SECONDARY OH ELECTRIC SERVICE
63
SECONDARY UG ELECTRIC SERVICE
64
ELECTRIC ROUGH-IN
65
COMM / LAN ROUGH-IN
66
FIRE DETECTION ROUGH-IN
67
FIRE DETECTION EQUIPMENT / TRIM-OUT
68
COMM / LAN TRIM-OUT
69
ELECTRIC FIXTURES / TRIM-OUT
70
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
71
BONDING
72
DEMOBILIZATION
73
CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS
% THIS PERIOD
% CUMULATIVE
PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING (PEMB)
3%
TOTAL
SCHEDULED AMOUNT THIS BILLING
TOTAL BID AMOUNT:
SCHEDULED:
INSPECTOR SIGNATURE:
ACTUAL:
CONCUR
NOT CONCUR
(CIRCLE)
PROGRESS OR COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE CONTRACTOR HAS SATISFACTORILY COMPLETED THE INDICATED PERCENTAGE OF THE CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
SUBMITTED BY OR FOR
CONTRACTOR:
BASE CIVIL ENGINEER:
TYPE OR PRINT NAME AND TITLE
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVIEWED BY OR FOR CONTRACTING OFFICER
TYPE OR PRINT NAME AND TITLE
SIGNATURE
01 00 00 - 10
DATE
MS0114
01 00 00 - 11
MS0612
SECTION 01 09 00
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Applicability of Reference Standards.
B. Provision of Reference Standards at site.
C. Source and acronyms used for Reference Standards in Contract Documents.
1.02
APPLICABILITY OF REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements
of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. The publications listed in the various specification sections form a part of the specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
C. Use the latest standard, except when a specific date is specified.
D. Disregard payment provisions contained in any portion of the referenced specifications and standards.
E. If the specified reference standard(s) conflicts with the Contract Documents, request clarification from the
Contracting Officer before proceeding.
1.03
PROVISION OF REFERENCE STANDARDS AT SITE
A. When required by individual specifications sections, obtain a copy of the standard. Maintain a copy at the
jobsite during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work until completion.
1.04
ABBREVIATIONS & NAMES
A. Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the
recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, and authority having jurisdiction
or other entity applicable. Refer to “Encyclopedia of Associations” published by Gale Research Co., available
in most libraries.
1.05
SOURCE FOR REFERENCE STANDARDS
AAMA
American Architectural Manufactures Association
1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
444 N. Capital St., NW, Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001
ACI
American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 19150
Detroit, MI 48219
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
8300 Boone Blvd., #400
Vienna, VA 22182
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
AF&PA
American Forest and Paper Association
01 09 00 - 1
MS0612
111 Nineteenth Street, NW, Suite 800
Washington, DC 20036
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
25 Massachusetts Avenue, NW Suite 800
Washington, DC 20001
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700
Chicago, IL 60601-1802
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
7012 S. Revere Parkway Suite 140
Centennial, CO 80112
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20875-0210
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
11 West 42nd St.
New York, NY 10036
APA/EWA
APA – The Engineered Wood Association
Order From:
http://www.apawood.org
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA 20191-4400
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, N. E
Atlanta, GA 30329
ASNT
American Society for Non-destructive Testing
4153 Arlingate Plaza
Columbus, OH 43228-0518
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Race Street
Philadelphia, PA 19103
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120
Potomac Falls, VA 20165-5874
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
AWS
American Welding Society
P.O. Box 351040
Miami, FL 33135
AWWA
American Water Works Association
6666 West Quincy
Denver, CO 80235
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
01 09 00 - 2
MS0612
355 Lexington Avenue, 15th Floor
New York, NY 10017
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
Order from:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402-9371
CISCA
Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association
405 Illinois Avenue, 2B
St. Charles, IL 60174
CRI
The Carpet and Rug Institute
P.O. Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722-2048
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 No. Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
CS
United States Department of Commerce Standard
Order from:
National Technical Information Service
5285 Port Royal Rd.
Springfield, VA 22161
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
14150 Newbrook Dr.
Chantilly, VA 20151
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
2600 N.W. Lake Rd.
Camas, WA 98607-8542
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
Department of Transportation
Order from:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402-9371
For documents offered at no cost, order from:
Dept. of Transportation
ATTN: M443.2
400 Seventh St., SW
Washington, DC 20590
FDOT
Florida Department of Transportation
Order from:
http://www.dot.state.fl.us/mapsandpublications/
FM
FM Global
270 Central Avenue
P.O. Box 7500
Johnston, RI 02919-4923
FS
Federal Specifications
Order from:
Standardization Documents Order Desk
01 09 00 - 3
MS0612
Bldg 4, Section D
700 Robbins Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council
212 Third Avenue North, Suite 504
Minneapolis, MN 55401
FTM-STD
Federal Test Method Standards
Order from:
Standardization Documents Order Desk
Bldg 4, Section D
700 Robbins Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
GA
Gypsum Association
6525 Belcrest Road, Suite 480
Hyattsville, MD 20782
GC
Green Seal
1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Suite 827
Washington, DC 20036-5525
MS
Military Specifications (MILSPEC)
Standardization Documents Order Desk
Bldg 4, Section D
700 Robbins Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
MSS
Manufacturers’ Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
127 Park St., NE
Vienna, VA 22180
NAAMM
NBS
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
800 Roosevelt Rd, Bldg. C, Suite 312
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137
National Bureau of Standards
(U. S. Department of Commerce)
Gaithersburg, MD 20234
NEMA
National Fire Protection Association
1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy , MA 02169-7471
NFPA
American Wood Protection Association
P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
NIOSH
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
(Centers for Disease Control and Prevention)
Order From:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/203-154/method-cas1.html
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(U.S. Department of Labor)
Order from:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
01 09 00 - 4
MS0612
Washington, DC 20402-9371
SCAQMD
South Coast Air Quality Management District
21865 Copley Drive
Diamond Bar, CA 91765
SCS
Scientific Certification Systems
2000 Powell Street, Suite 600
Emeryville, CA 94608
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
P.O. Box 25
Fox River Grove, IL 60021
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
234 W. Cheves Street
Florence, SC 29501
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151-1219
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
P.O. Box 10915
Pensacola, FL 32524-0915
SSMA
The Steel Stud Manufacturers Association
35 East Wacker Drive, Suite 850
Chicago, IL 60601-2106
SSPC
The Society for Protective Coatings
40 24th Street
6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222
TCNA
Tile Council of North America
100 Clemson Research Blvd.
Anderson, SC 29625
UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
2600 N.W. Lake Rd.
Camas, WA 98607-8542
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION: NOT USED.
END OF SECTION
01 09 00 - 5
MS0612
SECTION 01 10 00: SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED:
A. The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, supervision and equipment and perform all
operations necessary to accomplish all work complete in place, as shown on the drawings, specified
herein, or as needed to construct replacement of HVAC in building 90621. The work includes removal of
old system and installing new HVAC system.
1.02
JOB DESCRIPTION:
A. The work to be performed includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following principal features:
1. Removal of DX HVAC system.
2. Removal of boiler and piping.
3. Installation of VAV air handler.
4. Installation of chiller and boiler.
5. Installation of new controls.
6. The replacement of roll up doors.
7. Spray foam insulate perimeter of building.
8. The associated electrical and architectural work.
1.03
CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Limit use of site to allow Owner visitation and inspection.
B. The contractor and subcontractors are permitted to use existing utilities available at the site. Use is subject to
approval by the Contracting Officer. The 1 Special Operations Civil Engineering Squadron must approve all
connections. Connection to existing water mains must utilize a backflow preventer, certified within the 12
months prior to use on base.
1.04
DISPOSAL
A. All scrap materials and debris shall be disposed of in an on- site dumpster. When full, it shall be emptied
at a legally approved dumpsite off- base. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide the
dumpster and for the selection of the dumpsite. Provide Contracting Officer with name(s) of waste
disposal company and approved dumpsite.
1.05
STORAGE AREA
A. Contractor lay-down/materials storage site shall be as shown on the drawings or as approved by the
Contracting Officer.
B. A minimum of a 6 foot high temporary visual barrier shall surround the area.
C. The area must be maintained in a reasonably clean manner. All empty boxes, paper and trash must be
deposited in the on-site construction dumpster.
1.06
SAFETY
A. The pertinent sections of the following publications are applicable to all work on this project.
1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: EM 385-1-1, Safety and Health Requirements Manual.
2. Air Force Instruction (AFI) 91-202.
3. AFOSH Standard 48.139. See Specification Section 01 00 00 General Requirements paragraph 1.06.A.5.
1.07
HAUL ROUTE AND LITTER
A. The Contractor shall utilize only the designated haul route for the project for access to and from the site
as shown on the Drawings.
1.08
USE OF BARGE AREA
A. Use of the barge off loading area is not allowed except as approved, in writing, by the Contracting Officer.
Contractor must request usage of the barge site, in writing, to the Contracting Officer a minimum of 30
01 10 00 - 1
MS0612
days prior to expected deliveries. Contractor must also submit a schedule of all deliveries. Under no
circumstances should the contractor assume such requests will be approved. Contractor should plan to
have materials delivered by other means.
B. If usage of the barge site is approved, the contractor must meet the following requirements:
1. Crane boom height cannot exceed eighty (80) feet from mean water elevation.
2. Crane boom must have a red flag and an operational blinking obstruction light.
3. Contractor will be responsible for surrounding water quality per the State of Florida Regulations.
Prior to delivery of any barge/crane or tug, contractor must install full-depth turbidity barriers both east
and west of the site to extend beyond limits of off loading operations.
4. Off loading operations will be during daylight hours only. Operations will not start before 0700 (7:00
AM) and boom must be lowered to deck height by 1700 hours (5:00 PM) each day.
5. Contractor is required to provide the name and number of a responsible party, and contact
information of the tug/crane operator at site to both of the following:
a. The Contracting Officer.
b. Hurlburt Tower: Hurlburt Tower – 884-4795. (If tower cannot be contacted notify the Airfield
Manager – 884-4491.
6. Upon notification of inclement weather, off loading operations must cease and the boom lowered to
deck height. Do not raise boom until cleared by the Hurlburt Tower. All barges and equipment must
be secured. Upon notification of Hurcon conditions, the contractor must remove all barges, cranes,
tugs, and associated equipment from the site. The government will not be responsible for any delays
or costs associated to weather.
7. If notified to do so by the Contracting Officer or Hurlburt Tower, operations must cease and the boom
lowered to deck height. Under no circumstances should the boom be raised until cleared by the
notifying authority. The government will not be responsible for any associated delays or costs.
C. If these requirements cannot be met, the contractor is prohibited from using the barge site. Failure to
adhere to these requirements during operations will result in immediate revocation of site use at no
expense to the government. Site must be maintained per specifications and contractor will be
responsible for any and all clean-up after operations.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. The contractor shall accomplish work in an orderly progression of steps to satisfy the performance
requirements of this specification.
3.02
HOURS OF WORK
A. The normal hours of a workday shall be between 7:00 A.M. and 4:00 P.M., Monday through Friday, except
holidays and observed holidays. The contractor may elect, at his option, to work hours other than normal duty
hours if approved by the Contracting Officer. All work time, other than normal working days, shall be
requested in writing, 3 days in advance.
3.03
PHOTOGRAPHS
A. The contractor will take before and after photographs of the work. "Before" photos will be submitted before the
start of work. "After" photos will be submitted before the acceptance of the work. A minimum of 24 photos of
each will be required. Photos must show exterior and interior areas of the building that are to receive the new
work. The intent is to show the amount of change. Photos may be submitted by the Air Force for design and
construction awards. All photos taken shall be in digital format and submitted on CD. Submit one copy of
before and after photos.
3.04
QUALITY CONTROL
A. The contractor shall establish and maintain quality control to assure compliance with Contract Documents,
and maintain records of his quality control for materials, equipment and construction operations.
3.05
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT & VERIFICATION:
A. The contractor shall employ a Florida Registered Land Surveyor to layout the building and other site features
in accordance with the drawings. Potential problems that will affect the site geometry shall immediately be
brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer.
01 10 00 - 2
MS0612
B. Horizontal and Vertical Control shall conform to Hurlburt Field Datum: Horizontal NAD-83; Vertical NAVD-88.
C. Upon completion of the project and prior to the submission of the "As-Built" drawings (See Section 01 70 00
Contract Closeout), the contractor shall employ a Florida Registered Land Surveyor to perform the following
Horizontal Control by use of Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) to sub-meter accuracy, and Vertical Control
using the above datum.:
1. Location of building corners.
2. Buried water mains, sanitary and/or storm water sewers including all valves, cleanouts, horizontal turns,
etc.
3. Elevations at top of manhole(s), lift stations, storm water structures or similar above ground structures.
4. Invert elevations of all manholes and stub-outs intended for future connections to the system.
3.06
WARRANTY INSPECTION
A. A warranty inspection will be held thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of the contractor’s one-year warranty.
The inspection will be held at the project site. Those in attendance shall include the contractor, the
Contracting Officer, the project inspector, and the occupant. The purpose of this inspection will be to identify
current or re-occurring problems associated with the project and past warranty calls and corrective action
taken to remedy them. The contractor shall contact the Contracting Officer to determine the date of the
inspection. The Contracting Officer shall contact the appropriate government agencies and confirm the date
the inspection is to take place.
B. A list of problems identified at the inspection will be provided to all those in attendance. All problems must be
corrected to the satisfaction of the government prior to the expiration of the warranty
END OF SECTION
01 10 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 01 33 00:
PART l
SUBMITTALS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED:
A. Throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials has
been defined by manufacturer's name and catalog number, reference to recognized industry and
Government standards, or description of required attributes and performance.
B. Make all submittals required by the Contract Documents in a timely manner to allow construction of the
building within the allotted performance time.
1. Long lead items such as pre-engineered metal building systems, electrical and mechanical systems,
special equipment, etc. must be submitted within 15 days of Notice to Proceed.
2. All submittals must be made within 45 days of Notice to Proceed.
3. Late submittals that result in delayed delivery of materials and equipment, which will affect the
completion and acceptance of the building by the government, will not be a justification for a
time extension.
4. Revise, submit and/or resubmit (submittals) as necessary to establish compliance with the specified
requirements.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Coordination of Submittals: Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item
being submitted and verify that each item and the submittal for it conforms in all respects with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. By affixing his signature to each submittal, the contractor
certifies that this coordination and verification has been performed.
B. Certificates of Compliance:
1. Certify that all materials used in the work comply with all specified provisions thereof. Certification shall
not be construed as relieving the contractor from furnishing satisfactory materials if, after tests are
performed on selected samples' the material is found to not meet specific requirements.
2. Show on each certification the name and location of the work, name and address of contractor, quantity
and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificate applies, and name of the manufacturing
or fabricating company. An officer of the manufacturing or fabrication company shall sign certificates.
3. In addition to the above information, all laboratory test reports submitted with Certificates of Compliance
shall show the date or dates of testing, the specified requirements for which testing was performed, and
results of the test or tests.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SHOP DRAWINGS AND COORDINATION DRAWINGS:
A. Shop Drawings: Make all shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects
of the item and its method of connection to the work.
2.02
MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE:
A. Where contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to the submittal, clearly
indicate which portion of the contents is being submitted for review.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Consecutively number all submittals.
B. Internal Identifications: On at least the first page of each copy of each submittal and elsewhere as required for
positive identification, clearly indicate the submittal number in which the item was included.
C. Indicate FTEV Number, Project Title and Contract Number
01 33 00 - 1
MS0114
3.02
COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Prior to submittal for approval, use all means necessary to fully coordinate all material including,
but not necessarily limited to:
1. Determine and verify all interface conditions, catalog numbers and similar data.
2. Coordinate with other trades as required.
3. Clearly indicate all deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Grouping of submittals: Unless otherwise specified, make all submittals in groups containing all associated
items to ensure that information is available for checking each item when it is received. Partial submittals will
be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract Documents and the contractor shall be strictly
liable for all delays so occasioned.
C. Interior Finish Materials/Colors/Samples: All interior finish materials/colors/samples, includIng but not
limited to, flooring, base, paint/stain, wall coverings, acoustic ceiling/suspension system, acoustical treatment,
window treatment, laminated plastic for base/wall cabinets/countertops, interior signage, etc., shall be
submitted as a group (one submittal) to allow the government to review/approve/disapprove and
select/coordinate the interior finish materials/colors prior to being incorporated into the work. Upon receipt of
the government's approved selections, the contractor shall provide the government with actual samples of
each item for the record, minimum size 4"x4", except laminate plastic chips shall be manufacturer's standard
size.
D. Exterior Finish Materials/Colors/Samples: All exterior finish materials/colors/samples, including but not
limited to, brick, concrete masonry, exterior insulation finish system, stucco, paint/stain, roofing/flashing,
exterior signage, pavers, windows, doors, etc., shall be submitted as a group (one submittal) to allow the
government to review/approve/disapprove and /select/coordinate the exterior finish materials/colors prior to
being incorporated into the work. Upon receipt of the government's approved selections, the contractor shall
provide the government with actual samples of each item for the record, minimum size 4"x4".
3.03
SUBMITTAL APPROVAL:
A. General: Approval by the Contracting Officer shall not be construed as a complete check, but only that the
general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review and approval by government shall
not relieve the contractor from responsibility for errors that may exist, or from liability for failure to
comply with the intent of the Contract Documents.
B. Revisions After Approval: When a submittal has been approved, a re-submittal by the contractor for the
purpose of substitution of materials or equipment, will not be considered unless accompanied by an
acceptable explanation as to why the substitution is necessary.
C. Unnecessary Submissions: When the contractor elects to provide the materials, equipment, etc., that was
used as the basis for the design and is the exact: Manufacture's name, catalog number, size, and finish as
shown in the drawings or specified herein, no submittal is required. The contractor however shall submit a
letter to the Contracting Officer stating that he will use the specified product. All field-testing associated with
the material or equipment, etc. must be performed and submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval.
3.04
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS.
A. Assign numbers to these items to be submitted, beginning with the number 1 and continuing through the last
submittal. Items that are disapproved and require resubmittal shall be numbered with the original submittal
number followed by R1 if the first resubmittal of the item, R2 if the second resubmittal, and so on, until final
approval is given.
END OF SECTION
01 33 00 - 2
SOLICITATION/CONTRACT #
FINAL APPROVAL
CONTRACTOR RESUBMITTAL
DISAPPROVED
APPROVED
SUBMITTAL NUMBER
DATE TO CIVIL ENGINEERING
DATE RECEIVED
MANF. / INSTALLER QUAL.
TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR
SCHEDULES & PLANS
O & M MANUAL & LEGAL REQ'S
EXTRA STOCK
REPAIR HVAC EOD OFFICE BLDG 90621
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FTEV 12-1101
MIX DESIGN
PROJECT TITLE
WARRANTY FORM/FORMS
DELIVERY TICKETS
SAMPLE FOR TESTING
4
PERF. TEST REPORTS
4
PRODUCT COST DATA
4
SUSTAINABLE CERTIFICATES
SAMPLES
CERTIFICATE/CERTIFICATION
01 10 00 DD Form 1354
01 10 00 Photos
01 81 13 Green Procurement
03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessor
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 35 00 Concrete Finishing
03 39 00 Concrete Curing
04 05 03 Masonry Mortaring & Grouting
04 20 00 Unit Masonry
07 21 20 SPF Insulation
08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors
09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceiling
09 90 00 Painting and Coating
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialities
23 05 01 Mech Demo (work plan)
23 05 19 Gages
23 05 93 Test Adjusting & Balancing
23 07 13 Ductwork Insulation
23 07 16 Equipment Insulation
23 07 19 Piping Insulation
23 09 23 Direct Digital Systems for HVAC
23 21 13 Hydronic Piping
23 21 16 Hydronic Piping Specialties
23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps
23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment
23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 36 00 Air Terminal Units
23 37 00 Air Outlets & Inlets
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
ITEM OR DESCRIPTION OF ITEM, CONTRACT
REFERENCE, TYPE OF SUBMITTAL
SHOP DRAWINGS
LINE NUMBER
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
TO BE COMPLETED BY PROJECT ENGINEER
PROJECT NO.
REMARKS
1 digital copy on CD
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
01 33 00 - 3
4
23 52 34 Water Tube Boilers
23 64 11 Pkg Air-Cooled Water Chillers
23 73 00 Air Handling Units
26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements
26 05 19 Building Wire and Cable
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
26 05 27 Secondary Grounding For Electr
26 05 34 Boxes
26 24 16 Panel Boards
26 28 19 Disconnect Switches
28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm
32 12 16 Asphaltic Concrete Paving
32 92 23 Sodding
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
01 33 00 - 4
FINAL APPROVAL
CONTRACTOR RESUBMITTAL
DISAPPROVED
APPROVED
SUBMITTAL NUMBER
DATE TO CIVIL ENGINEERING
DATE RECEIVED
MANF. / INSTALLER QUAL.
4
4
4
4
SOLICITATION/CONTRACT #
TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR
SCHEDULES & PLANS
O & M MANUAL & LEGAL REQ'S
EXTRA STOCK
REPAIR HVAC EOD OFFICE BLDG 90621
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FTEV 12-1101
MIX DESIGN
PROJECT TITLE
WARRANTY FORM/FORMS
DELIVERY TICKETS
SAMPLE FOR TESTING
PERF. TEST REPORTS
PRODUCT COST DATA
SUSTAINABLE CERTIFICATES
SAMPLES
4
4
4
4
4
4
CERTIFICATE/CERTIFICATION
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
ITEM OR DESCRIPTION OF ITEM, CONTRACT
REFERENCE, TYPE OF SUBMITTAL
SHOP DRAWINGS
LINE NUMBER
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
TO BE COMPLETED BY PROJECT ENGINEER
PROJECT NO.
REMARKS
MS0612
SECTION 01 41 00:
PART 1
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES:
A. ASTM D3740 – Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or
Inspection of Soil and Rock as used in Engineering Design and Construction.
B. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Special Inspection, or
Testing Materials Used in Construction.
1.02
SELECTION AND PAYMENT:
A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified
inspection and testing. One laboratory shall perform all tests for project.
B. The Government will employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
inspection and testing deemed to be in the best interest of the Government. The contractor will be
responsible for the cost of all inspections, testing and replacement of Work not meeting the Contract
Documents.
C. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve contractor of obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740.
B. Laboratory: Licensed and authorized to operate in State of Florida.
C. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either
National Bureau of Standards (NBS) or accepted values of natural physical constants.
D. Certification: Current Certification by Construction Materials Council, Inc.
1.04
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS:
A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address and telephone number, and the name or
names of the Professional Engineer(s), currently registered in the state of Florida, who will be certifying
the reports or tests and a responsible officer of the company
B. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of
National Bureau of Standards (NBS) during most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of
remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
1.05
LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. Provide qualified personnel at site.
B. Perform specified inspection, sampling, making cylinders, etc., and testing of all products in accordance with
Contract Documents.
C. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Provide certified copies of the reports or tests as per 1.06 below. The Professional Engineer shall affix his
name and date to all reports or tests before affixing his impression seal over both.
1.06
LABORATORY REPORTS:
A. After each inspection and test and prior to providing copies to the contractor, the Testing Laboratory
shall promptly forward one (1) copy of each laboratory report directly to the Contracting Officer for
record purposes. Mail to Contracting Officer, 1 SOCONS, 350 Tully St., Hurlburt Field, FL 32544.
01 41 00 - 1
MS0612
B. Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of each laboratory report as per Section 01 33 00 to the Contracting
Officer for review and approval.
C. Include:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name of inspector.
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
5. Identification of product and specifications section.
6. Location in the project.
7. Type of inspection or test.
8. Date of test.
9. Results of test.
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
D. When requested by Contracting Officer, provide interpretation of test results.
1.07
LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY:
A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of the contractor.
D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.08
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. Notify laboratory of the location of the construction site and samples of materials proposed to be used,
which require testing.
B. Provide laboratory all proposed mix designs.
C. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to the Work, to manufacturer's literature and
other pertinent data.
D. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle
samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and
curing of test samples.
E. Notify laboratory a minimum of 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection, sampling,
and testing services.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 41 00 - 2
MS0713
SECTION 01 56 00
PART 1
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. The environmental protection required for this contract.
1.02. REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication Standard
40 CFR 110, Discharge of Oil
40 CFR 112, Oil Pollution Prevention
40 CFR 122, EPA administered permit programs
40 CFR 125, National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)
40 CFR 260-271, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
40 CFR 260-279, Hazardous Waste and Used Oil Management
40 CFR 300, National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan
40 CFR 355, Emergency Planning and Notification
40 CFR 403, General Pretreatment Regulations for Existing and New Sources of Pollution
49 CFR 171-172, General Information, Regulations and Definitions, and Hazardous Waste
2. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA PL 96-510, Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation & Liability Act
3. FLORIDA ADMINISTRATION CODE (FAC)
FAC 62-25, Regulation of Stormwater Discharge
FAC 62-150, Hazardous Substance Release Notification
FAC 62-210, Stationary Sources – General Requirements
FAC 62-212, Stationary Sources – Preconstruction Review
FAC 62-346, Environmental Resource Permitting in Northwest Florida
FAC 62-555, Permitting, Construction, Operation, and Maintenance of Public Water Systems
FAC 62-604, Collection Systems and Transmission Facilities
FAC 62-730, Hazardous Waste
FAC 62-762, Aboveground Storage Tank Systems
FAC 62-770, Petroleum Contamination Site Cleanup Criteria
4. HURLBURT FIELD INSTRUCTIONS AND DIRECTIVES
Hurlburt Field Directive for Mercury and Fluorescent Lamps
Hurlburt Field Ozone Depleting Management Plan
Hurlburt Field Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) Plan
Hurlburt Field Installation Restoration Program (IRP) Management Action Plan
Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Management Plan
Hurlburt Field Asbestos Management and Operations Plan
Hurlburt Field Lead Based Paint and Lead Hazard Plan
Hurlburt Field Landscape Development Plan
Hurlburt Field Environmental Policy
5. AIR FORCE INSTRUCTIONS AND DIRECTIVES
AFI 23-204 Organizational Fuel Tanks
AFI 32-7001 Environmental Management
AFI 32-7042 Waste Management
AFI 32-7044 Storage Tank Compliance
AFI 32-7064 Natural Resources
AFI 32-7086 Hazardous Materials Management
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for environmental protection of all items set
forth herein. The Contractor shall record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws,
regulations, permit requirements, ordinances, and corrective action taken. The Contractor shall
immediately inform the Contracting Officer of any environmental problem.
1.04
CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE
01 56 00 - 1
MS0713
A. Permits: The contractor shall ensure that all required environmental permits are in their
possession prior to start of construction and/or installing or operating any new or modified
equipment or processes or disturbing or clearing any land area.
B. The contractor shall be responsible for operating within permit limits and abiding by all permit
conditions. 1 SOCES/CEAN shall be notified immediately of any exceedances of permit limits or
violation of permit conditions. The contractor shall immediately notify 1 SOCES/CEAN of any
unforeseen environmental conditions, which may conflict with approved permits. Any
certifications required by permits shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Copies of all
permits and certifications shall be submitted to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN in
electronic format (.dwg, pdf, or .doc).
C. All certifications, notices and documentation required by environmental permits shall be the
responsibility of the contractor, but must be coordinated through the contracting office and 1
SOCES/CEAN prior to submittal to regulatory agencies.
1. Sanitary Sewer Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit to the contractor
prior to start of construction. After construction, the line will not be put into use until the permit
clearance has been applied for and obtained. All necessary paperwork (Certification of
Completion Form, as-builts, etc.) will be submitted to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review. Work is not considered
complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and obtained.
2. Potable Water Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit to the contractor
prior to start of construction. After construction, the line will not be put into use until the permit
clearance has been applied for and obtained. For phased projects a permit clearance can be
obtained for each phase by submitting a certification of completion package for each phase
as a partial completion on the entire permitted project. All necessary paperwork (Certification
of Completion Form, as-builts, bacteriologicals, pressure test results, etc) will be submitted to
the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review.
Work is not considered complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and
obtained.
3. Irrigation Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit to the contractor prior to
start of construction. After construction, the system will not be put into use until the permit
clearance has been applied for and obtained. All necessary paperwork (Certification of
Completion Form, as-builts, etc) will be submitted to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review. Work is not considered
complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and obtained.
4. Wetland Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit application to the
contractor prior to start of construction. Prior to start of any construction in a wetland, a Joint
Application for Environmental Resource Permit must be completed by the contractor.
Completion of the application package to include site plan, and signed/sealed drawings must
be submitted to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN. The application must note all best
management practices (BMP's) such as silt screens and must show locations.. The
regulatory agency has 30 days to request additional information. All necessary paperwork
(Certification of Completion Form, as-builts, etc) will be submitted to the contracting office for
1 SOCES/CEAN. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review. Work is not considered
complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and obtained.
5. Generic Stormwater Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large and Small Construction
Activities, F.A.C. 62-621; and Environmental Resource Permit F.A.C. 62-346 if applicable :
a. Prior to start of Construction:
1. Prior to start of any site work the contractor shall submit to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN in electronic format; 1 copy of the Notice of Intent (NOI) Form 62621.300(4)(b); proof of fee payment; 1 copy of the signed Stormwater Pollution
Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and map; 1 copy of the letter from the regulatory agency
issuing the permit for the project;
2. If F.A.C. 62-346 is applicable, in electronic format: 1 copy of application package
signed and sealed with Form 62-346.900(1) or 10-2 General Permit certification
record; ; 1 copy of the drainage delineation, 1 copy of the supporting engineering
calculations, 1 copy of the geotechnical report (where applicable), 1 copy of the
survey (where applicable), 1 copy regulatory agency letter issuing permit number; 1
copy of the proof of submittal to regulatory agency Form 62-346.900(3) of the
Construction Commencement Notice at least 48 hours prior to start of construction.
01 56 00 - 2
MS0713
b. During Construction::
1. The contractor shall provide to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN at the end
of each month, in electronic format, signed weekly and storm event inspection
reports; and the Notice of Termination (NOT) Form 62-621.300(6) within 14 days of
final stabilization of the site. Copies of the reports must also be kept on-site.
2. If F.A.C. 62-346 is applicable: 1 copy of Form 62-346.900(4) As-Built Certification by
the Engineer of record within 30 days after completion of construction; 1 copy Form
62-346.900(6) request for conversion of Stormwater Management Permit
Construction Phase to Operation and maintenance Phase within 30 days after
completion of construction.
6. Copies of all required forms and guidance can be found at http://www.dep.state.fl.us/ .
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit an Environmental Protection Plan within 15 days after receipt of the
notice to proceed. Approval of the Contractor's plan will not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for adequate and continuing control of pollutants and other environmental protection
measures. The contractor shall obtain approval by the Contracting Officer prior to the start of
construction, modification, or demolition for all project facilities and/or equipment. The plan shall
include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Legal Requirements: A list of Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, and permits
concerning environmental protection, pollution control and abatement that are applicable to
the Contractor's proposed operations and the requirements imposed by those laws,
regulations, and permits. Whenever there is a conflict between Federal, State, or local laws,
regulations, and permit requirements, the more restrictive provisions shall apply.
2. Environmental Protection Procedures: Procedures to be implemented to provide the required
environmental protection, to comply with the applicable laws and regulations, and to correct
pollution due to accident, natural causes, or failure to follow the procedures of the
environmental protection plan.
3. Drawings: Drawings showing locations of any proposed temporary excavations or
embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary
facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials shall be included.
4. Solid Waste Management Plan: See paragraph titled Solid Waste.
5. Emergency Response and Spill Prevention Plan: See paragraph titled Emergency Response
and Spill Prevention.
6. Hazard Material List: See paragraph titled Hazardous Materials.
7. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan: See paragraph titled Water Resources.
8. Hazard Waste Management and Disposal Plan: See paragraph titled Hazardous Waste.
9. Summary of Solid Waste Generated: See paragraph titled Solid Waste Implementation.
3.02
NATURAL RESOURCES
A. ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES: The environmental resources within the project boundaries
and those affected outside the limits of permanent work under this contract shall be protected
during the entire period of this contract. The Contractor shall confine activities to areas defined
by the drawings and specifications except where tree replacement is required. Environmental
protections shall be as stated in the following subparagraphs:
1. The contractor shall confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and specifications.
In areas indicated on the drawing or specified to be cleared, the Contractor shall not remove,
cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil,
and land forms without permission. Trees, shrubs and other vegetation not identified for
removal shall be protected against removal, injury, defacing and scarring-no ropes, cables, or
guys shall be fastened to or attached to any trees for anchorage unless specifically
authorized. Where such emergency use is permitted, the Contractor shall provide effective
protection for land and vegetation resources at all times.
2. The Contractor shall not park vehicles or equipment within the drip line of trees. Prior to
trimming or removal of trees, contractor shall coordinate with 1 SOCES/CEAN. All verified
01 56 00 - 3
MS0713
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
merchantable timber that is removed shall be limbed and stacked butt to butt in an out of the
way location. Trees that are damaged or removed shall be replaced according to guidance
found in the Hurlburt Field 2009 Landscape Development Plan
Prior to any construction, the Contractor shall mark the areas not to be disturbed under this
contract. Isolated areas within the general work area, which are to be saved and protected,
shall also be marked or fenced. The Contractor's personnel shall be knowledgeable of the
purpose for marking and/or protecting particular objects.
All earthwork shall be planned and conducted to minimize the duration of exposure of
unprotected soils. Side and back slopes shall be protected as soon as practicable upon
completion of rough grading. Earthwork brought to final grade shall be finished as indicated.
The Contractor shall construct or install temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation
control features as indicated on the drawings. Erosion control measures on drawings shall be
augmented if necessary to ensure effectiveness. Berms, dikes, drains, sedimentation basins,
grassing, and mulching shall be maintained until permanent drainage and erosion control
facilities are completed and operative.
The Contractor's field offices, staging areas, stockpile storage, and temporary buildings shall
be placed in areas designated on the drawings or as directed by the Contracting Officer.
Temporary movement or relocation of Contractor facilities shall be made only when
approved. Borrow areas shall be managed to minimize erosion and to prevent sediment from
entering nearby waters. Spoil areas shall be managed and controlled to limit spoil intrusion
into areas designated on the drawings and to prevent erosion of soil or sediment from
entering nearby waters. Spoil areas shall be developed in accordance with the grading plan
indicated on the drawings. Temporary excavation and embankments for plant and/or work
areas shall be controlled to protect adjacent areas from despoilment.
The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all construction equipment previously used at other
sites before it is brought into the work areas, ensuring that soil residuals are removed and
that egg deposits from plant pests are not present; the Contractor shall consult with the
USDA jurisdictional office for additional cleaning requirements.
B. Protection of Fish and Wildlife Resources: All species of wildlife are protected on Hurlburt Field,
Florida. Feeding, possessing, capturing, and attempting to capture, kill or otherwise harass
wildlife is prohibited.
C. Black Bear and American Alligator: Black bear and American alligator sightings are common on
Hurlburt Field. It is against the law to feed, possess, capture or attempt to capture, kill or
otherwise harass these species. Feeding, possession, or harassment of an alligator is a seconddegree misdemeanor. If a bear is sighted or if an alligator is found to be in an enclosed area,
posing immediate threat or is affecting traffic, contact the 1 SOCES/CEAN (884-4651) as soon as
possible. Construction sites must be cleared of any food or drink items at the end of each
workday. Any items that could attract wildlife must be carried off the base or placed in a
dumpster. Ensure all dumpster doors and lids are securely closed at the end of the day to deter
bears or other wildlife from entering and feeding.
3.03
CULTURAL RESOURCES
A. Historical, Archaeological, and Cultural Resources: Existing historical, archaeological, and
cultural resources within the Contractor's work area will be so designated by the Contracting
Officer if any has been identified. The Contractor shall take precautions to preserve all such
resources as they existed at the time they were first pointed out. The Contractor shall provide
and install protection measures for these resources and be responsible for their preservation
during the life of the contract. Protection measures will be provided by 1 SOCES/CEAN after
consultation with the State Historic Preservation Officer on a case-by-case basis.
B. Artifacts Discovered During Construction: If during excavation or other construction activities any
previously unidentified or unanticipated resources are discovered or found, all activities that may
damage or alter such resources shall be temporarily suspended. Resources covered by this
paragraph include but are not limited to: any human skeletal remains or burials; artifacts; shell,
bone, charcoal, or other deposits; rocks or coral alignments, pavings, wall, or other constructed
features; and any indication of agricultural or other human activities. Upon such discovery or find,
the Contractor shall immediately stop work and notify the Contracting Officer and
1 SOCES/CEAN.
01 56 00 - 4
MS0713
3.04
WATER RESOURCES
A. The Contractor shall keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control
implementing “good house-keeping” practices to avoid pollution of surface and ground waters.
The contractor shall ensure that all employees and subcontractors are aware that dumping of any
substance to ground, storm systems,wetlands or water bodies is prohibited, unless express
written approval is provided from the contracting office and 1 SOCES/CEAN. All spills of
hazardous materials, hazardous waste, petroleum, toxic substances, wastewaters, or materials
that generate an oxygen demand in water bodies must be properly cleaned up immediately. Toxic
or hazardous chemicals shall not be applied to soil or vegetation when such application may
cause contamination. Monitoring of water areas affected by construction shall be the Contractor's
responsibility.
B. Wetlands: Monitoring of wetland and water resources affected by construction activities shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor and performed in accordance with the Clean Water Act and all
Federal and State rules, laws, and standards. During construction, best management practices
(BMP’s) will be required to maintain soil erosion measures and a minimum distance of 15 feet
and average of 25 feet from jurisdictional wetlands and water areas that could be adversely
affected by construction activities. Contractor should plan for all events which will cause extreme
conditions that may result in failure of BMP’s. All fines and penalties assessed for wetlands
violations affected by construction activities shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
C. Stormwater: The contractor shall use proper control and management techniques to ensure
stormwater criteria are met in accordance with Federal, State, and local stormwater regulations.
The contractor must comply with the Hurlburt Field Stormwater Management Plan.
D. Where erodible soils or other erodible materials are present, no matter the total size of the
affected area, erosion control measures must be installed/implemented prior to start of
construction and in accordance with the Floirda Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control
Inspector’s Manual available at www.dep.state.fl.us/. This applies to construction areas, storage
areas, and laydown areas. Erosion control measures must remain in place and be properly
maintained until the site is properly stabilized. .
E. In some cases where severe erosion results in waters becoming turbid despite control measures,
regular turbidity monitoring and documentation shall be necessary. Any such documentation
shall be forwarded to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN review..
F. Stream Crossings shall allow movement of materials or equipment without violating water
pollution control standards of the Federal, State or local government.
G. Landscaping: All new landscaping will be watered in accordance with the current stage of the
Hurlburt Field Water Conservation Policy. All irrigation work will need to be coordinated with 1
SOCES/CEAN & 1SOCES/CEC. The use of potable water for irrigation systems is prohibited.
H. Contractor is not authorized sewage holding tanks on base and must procure a portable toilet
service contract. The contract must include the correct removal of sewage and maintenance of
the portable toilet.
I.
Projects that construct facilities with a footprint greater than 5,000 gross square feet, or expand
the footprint of existing facilities by more than 5,000 gross square feet must maintain or restore to
the maximum extent technically feasible the project predevelopment hydrology per section 438 of
the Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA).
J.
Dewatering: The requirements stated in Ch. 62-621.300(2), F.A.C. must be met before the
commencement of any discharge of produced groundwater from a non-contaminated site activity
to surface waters of the state (e.g. wetlands, stormwater systems). Any reportable documents
associated with the compliance of this regulation shall be sent to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN review prior to the submittal to the Florida Department of Environmental
Protection (FDEP). For dewatering operations that discharge to groundwaters of the state, a sitespecific exemption letter must be obtained from the FDEP. In order for the contractor to obtain
this exemption letter, a letter must be submitted stating the scope of the operation, estimated
amount of water to be discharged during the operation, as well as best management practices
that will be used during the dewatering operation to ensure no produced groundwater will be
01 56 00 - 5
MS0713
discharged to surface waters of the state. This letter shall be sent to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN review prior to the submittal to the FDEP.
3.05
AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT
A. Per Executive Order 13101, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requires that all
government purchases of designated items shall contain at least the minimal amount of postconsumer and/or total recovered materials. EPA-designated items fall into the following
categories:
• Bio-based Products
• Miscellaneous Products
• Park and Recreation
Products
• Construction Products
• Non-Paper Office Products
• Transportation Products
• Landscape Products
• Paper and Paper Products
• Vehicular Products
Specific requirements can be found at the EPA’s website: http://www.epa.gov/cpg/products.htm.
Also, see section 01 54 00: Green Procurement.
3.06
AIR RESOURCES
A. Equipment operation and activities or processes performed by the Contractor in accomplishing
the specified construction shall be in accordance with the State rules and all Federal emission
and performance laws and standards. Ambient Air Quality Standards set by the Environmental
Protection Agency shall be maintained. The Contractor shall monitor all air areas affected by the
construction activities. Monitoring results will be periodically reviewed by 1 SOCES/CEAN to
ensure compliance.
B. Ozone Depleting Substances: The contractor shall adhere to Air Force and HFLD policies
regarding halons and chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs). The contractor shall not introduce any Class I
Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) to Hurlburt Field during the course of this contract. The
contractor shall be responsible for the recovery and recycling of all Class II ODS, including any
necessary sampling marking, labeling, and disposal. The contractor may access the Hurlburt
Field ODS Management Plan for guidance. However, the contractor shall remain ultimately
responsible for any ODS work related to these tasks. Any work performed on equipment
containing ODS used as refrigerants shall only be done by EPA certified technicians. Certification
cards shall be on their person at all times. Intentional venting of ODS is strictly prohibited. Any
work performed on equipment containing ODS used as refrigerants should only be done by EPAcertified technicians. Certification cards should be on their person at all times.
C. Particulates: Dust particles; aerosols and gaseous by-products from construction activities; and
processing and preparation of materials, shall be controlled at all times, including weekends,
holidays and hours when work is not in progress. The Contractor shall maintain excavations,
stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow
areas, and other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which
would cause the air pollution standards to be exceeded or which would cause a hazard or a
nuisance. All reasonable precautions shall be taken during earthmoving and grading activitiesto
control small particulate matter from becoming airborne. Water or other dust suppressants shall
be used as necessary on unpaved surfaces, open stockpiles and conveyor systems to reduce
emissions of dust. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent the deposition of “dragout” dirt on paved surfaces, and all drag dirt shall be removed from paved roadways at the end of
each shift. The Contractor must have sufficient, competent equipment available to accomplish
these tasks. Particulate control shall be performed as the work proceeds and whenever a
particulate nuisance or hazard occurs by employing BMP’s.
D. Employ the following BMP’s to minimize air pollutants:
1. Limit the entry/exit of vehicles to the site to minimize track-in and track-out of aggregate and
construction materials.
2. Apply water or other dust suppressants to unpaved roads..
3. Keep stock piles and open containers covered when not in use.
4. Landscape or vegetate as soon as practical.
5. Use water-based paints and low VOC surface coatings as per section 09 90 00.
3.07
SOLID WASTE
A. The contractor shall make every attempt to reduce the generation of solid and hazardous waste
to the maximum extent possible. The contractor shall utilize the Base Recycling Center (88401 56 00 - 6
MS0713
7577) for any office paper, cardboard, plastic, or metal wastes related to a project whenever
possible. All wastes, whether recycled or landfilled, shall be weighed prior to disposal. Detailed
disposition, to include; manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices , information shall be
reported by the fifth day of each quarter to 1 SOCES/CEAN. Solid wastes (excluding clearing
debris) shall be placed in containers and emptied, recycled or land-filled, on a regular schedule.
Containers used for solid waste shall be kept covered and closed at all times and shall be leakproof. Solid waste, including refuse and construction and demolition debris, shall not be stored
within 200 feet of jurisdictional wetlands or water bodies in accordance with FDEP regulation 62701.300. Design for pads that will house solid waste dumpsters must reflect the 200 feet set-back
from jurisdictional wetlands, water bodies and any stormwater conveyance structure. Segregation
measures shall be employed so that no hazardous or toxic waste is co-mingled with solid waste.
The Contractor shall transport solid waste (items not utilized by Base Recycling Center) off
Government property and dispose of it in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements
for solid waste disposal. Vehicles used in transporting refuse shall be covered and enclosed to
prevent spillage. Expense and cleanup of any spills on or off base are always the responsibility
of the contractor.
B. Solid Waste Management Plan: The Solid Waste Management Plan, refer to paragraph titled
Submittals, shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Description and estimated quantities of the proposed job-site waste to be generated.
2. Landfill Options: The name of the landfill(s) where trash will be disposed of, applicable landfill
tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project waste in the landfill(s).
3. Waste Diversion: A list of the waste materials from the project that will be separated for
reuse, salvage, or recycling, associated weights and estimated cost savings shall be reported
to 1 SOCES/CEAN by the 5th day of each quarter.
4. Handling Procedures: A description of the means by which any waste materials identified in
item 3 above will be stored and a description of the means to be employed in recycling the
above materials consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities.
5. Transportation: A description of the means of transportation of the waste and recycled
materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated center, or
whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site).
Request manufacturers to use the minimum packaging required for protection and
identification of project products, and to use packaging materials with recycled content where
economically feasible in accordance with FAR, Executive Order 13101, and the Hurlburt Field
Affirmative Procurement Plan.
6. Submit cost information on the Solid Waste Management Plan for Solid Waste Disposal,
Recycling, Cost savings for wastes diverted from the landfill to the Contracting Officer
by 5th day of each quarter.
C. Solid Waste Management Plan Implementation
1. The Contractor shall designate an on-site party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers
and overseeing and documenting results of the Solid Management Plan for the project.
2. The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Solid Management Plan to key personnel and
submit the plan to the Contracting Officer as part of the Environmental Protection Plan (see
Submittals section).
3. The Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and
recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties.
4. The Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for
potential recycling, salvage, reuse, and return. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept
neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials.
5. The Contractor shall submit with each Application for Progress Payment, a Summary of
Solid Waste Generated by the project to 1 SOCES/CEAN. Failure to submit this information
shall render the Application for Payment incomplete and shall delay Progress Payment. The
Summary shall be submitted on a form acceptable to the Owner and shall contain the
following information:
a. The amount (in tons) of material land-filled from the project, the identity of the landfill, the
total amount of tipping fees paid at the landfill, and the total disposal cost. Include
manifests, weight tickets, receipt, and invoices.
b. For each material recycled, reused or salvaged from the project, the amount (in tons),
the date removed from the job-site, the receiving party, the transportation cost, the
amount of any money paid or received for the recycled or salvaged material, and the net
01 56 00 - 7
MS0713
c.
3.08
total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. Attach manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
Any serviceable or salvageable items not accepted by DRMO or Base Supply will
become the property of the Contractor and will be properly handled, transported, and
disposed of off-base by the Contractor in conformance with the Solid Management Plan
and with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations.
HAZARDOUS WASTE (Includes Special and Universal Waste)
A. The contractor shall be considered the primary co-generator for all hazardous wastes generated
throughout the duration of the contract. All hazardous waste management activities shall be
coordinated and approved by 1 SOCES/CEAN.
B. The contractor’s key personnel must attend the Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Awareness
briefing prior to starting work on base. For reservations, contact Randy Trent at (850) 884-7923
or email [email protected]
C. The contractor is responsible for the management and disposal of all hazardous wastes he/she
generates on base. All cost for labor, equipment, materials, transportation, and other services
required to comply with federal, state and local laws governing hazardous/special waste
management and disposal are the responsibility of the contractor.
D. The contractor shall characterize their waste streams using specific and technical knowledge,
MSDS,s and/or sampling and analysis. This responsibility also includes preparation of waste
profile sheets, manifests (regulated and non regulated) packaging, marking and labeling of
wastes containers.
E. The contractor shall manage all hazardous waste, special waste, and universal waste IAW the
HFLD Hazardous Waste Management Plan. The contractor shall ensure that all employees,
including their subs, comply with the rules and procedures outlined in the Hurlburt Field
Hazardous Waste Management Plan.
F. The contractor shall be familiar with and have immediate access to the following publications and
regulations:
1. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 260279
2. Department of Transportation (DOT): Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 171-177
3. Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Management Plan
G. If transportation of Hazardous Wastes is required, the contractor shall possess or ensure the
transportation company used for transportation of hazardous waste has a valid state and federal
EPA identification number and all DOT requirements are met.
H. The contractor shall prepare profiles and manifests for all waste transported off base for disposal.
A designated representative from 1 SOCES/CEAN, Environmental Element, must approve and
sign the hazardous waste/non-hazardous waste manifest. Contractor shall ensure the signed
manifest is returned to 1 SOCES/CEAN within 45 days from the time it’s received at the disposal
facility.
I.
The Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Storage Facility may accept contractor’s hazardous, special
and universal waste (that was generated on base) depending on type of waste, quantities
generated and provisions of the contract. 1 SOCES/CEAN must approve acceptance of the
waste before it’s generated.
3.09
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. For the purposes of the document, Hazardous Materials (HM) are defined as any product
material, chemical or substance listed in 49 CFR 172.101 (revised) and 40 CFR 302-304
(revised). Specifically, a HM is any substance or material, in any quantity or form that has the
potential to harm human health or the environment or displays specific characteristics (reactive,
corrosive, ignitable, and toxic).
01 56 00 - 8
MS0713
B. Absolutely no HM shall be brought onto Hurlburt Field until that material is coordinated with Base
Hazardous Material Program Manager per AFI 32-7086, Hazardous Materials Management . This
requirement shall apply for all HM that the contractor intends to bring onto government property
for any/all processes or applications. The contractor shall submit a complete hazardous material
inventory list including Material Safety Data Sheets and any other supporting documentation for
each HM used prior to contract start or introduction of that material to Hurlburt Field. The HM
inventory shall include the contract number, performance period, and a contractor point of
contactfor HM matters. All excess material and empty containers are the responsibility of the
contractor and shall be removed accordingly at the end of the contract. Should contractor HM
requirements change during the performance period, the Contractor shall immediately notify the
HAZMART and Base HM Program Manager of such changes in writing.
C. Storage of Hazardous Materials: All HM shall be stored at Hurlburt Field with approval and
coordination from 1 SOCES/CEAN, the base Fire Department (1 SOCES/CEF), and Wing Safety.
The contractor shall observe HM storage practices in accordance with regulations, policies, plans
and procedures employed by the base. HM storage shall be in a manner that limits exposure to
rainfall and prevents releases to the environment.
D. All contractor personnel shall immediately report to the Contracting Officer and 1 SOCES/CEAN
any hazardous materials, substances (including suspect asbestos containing materials),
chemicals, or contaminated areas encountered. Further, the contractor personnel shall
immediately cease work in the area unless the work is of an emergency nature and the risk of
exposure can be mitigated by the use of personal protective equipment (PPE) or clothing. The
government will determine the best means of sampling and corrective action and will notify the
contractor accordingly.
E. The contractor shall not use, store, or handle any Class I ODS during the course of this contract.
F. All hazardous materials and waste resulting from construction projects (including
renovation/repair and demolition) shall be managed in accordance with local, state, federal and
Hurlburt Field rules and regulations.
3.10
TOXIC WASTE
A. Asbestos: All asbestos work must be accomplished in accordance with federal, state, and local
laws and the Hurlburt Field Asbestos Management Plan. See Section 02 82 16.00 20.
1. Notice of Asbestos Renovation or Demolition, DEP Form 62-257.900(1) must be submitted to
Florida Department of Environmental Protection at least 10 working days prior to any
demolition and/or renovation regardless of whether asbestos is present or not. A copy of this
notification and all asbestos surveys conducted must be provided to 1 SOCES/CEAN prior to
performing any work. Upon completion of any asbestos abatement, the contractor will provide
copies of all disposal waste manifests to 1 SOCES/CEAN, Toxic Substance Program
Manager.
2. A copy of all submittals must be provided to 1 SOCES/CEAN with adequate time built in for
review.
3. The use of materials, products or equipment containing asbestos will not be allowed in the
construction of this project. See sample list below.
4. Prior to the commencement of construction, the prime contractor, each subcontractor and
material/equipment supplier shall provide the Contracting Officer and 1 SOCES/CEAN with a
Notarized statement that to the best of their knowledge, no asbestos will be used in the
construction of this project. Additionally, the contractor must have available the most current
Material Data Safety Sheet proving the materials contain no asbestos.
5. Sample list of Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM):
Note: The following list does not include every product/material that may contain asbestos. It
is intended as a general guide to show which types of material may contain asbestos.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cement pipes
Asphalt floor tile
Flooring backing
Decorative plaster
Spray-applied
insulation
Taping compounds
•
•
•
•
•
Cement wallboard
Vinyl floor tile
Construction mastics
Textured paints/coatings
Blown-in insulation
•
•
•
•
•
Cement siding
Vinyl sheet flooring
Acoustical plaster
Ceiling tiles & lay-in-panels
Fireproofing materials
•
Packing materials (for
•
High temperature gaskets
01 56 00 - 9
MS0713
•
•
(thermal)
Laboratory hoods
Fire curtains
•
•
•
•
HVAC duct insulation
Ductwork flexible fabric
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Heating and electrical
•
Spackling compounds
•
Roofing felt
•
Fire doors
•
Wallboard
•
Electrical wiring insulation
wall/floor penetrations)
Laboratory gloves
Elevator equipment
panels
Boiler insulation
Cooling towers
Electrical panel partitions
Chalkboards
Base flashing
Caulking/putties
Joint compounds
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fire blankets & table tops
Elevator brake shoes
Breeching insulation
Pipe insulation (corrugated
connections air cell, block, etc.)
Electrical cloth ducts
Roofing shingles
Thermal paper products
Adhesives
Vinyl wall coverings
Caution needs to be taken to ensure materials purchased do not contain one or more % asbestos
by volume.
B. Lighting Ballast: When fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures are removed, the ballast must be
examined for PCB labeling. Ballast is presumed to contain PCBs unless they are clearly labeled “NO
PCBs”. Suspected ballast must be removed and disposed IAW Hurlburt Field directives.
C. Lead Based Paint: No paint containing lead shall be used during the course of this contract. The
Occupational Health and Safety Act (OSHA) Lead Construction Standard, 29 CFR 1926.62 is in effect
whenever materials are disturbed that contain any amount of lead. This will require contractors
disturbing lead-based paint to institute medical surveillance, training, engineering controls, worker
protection measures and employee monitoring until monitoring results per the lead paint standard
demonstrate that employee exposure is below the action level and permissible exposure limit. The
contractor on site must maintain all documentation regarding lead exposure by either historical data
or project data. This data shall also be made available to 1 SOCES/CEAN upon completion of
the project.
1. Prior to the commencement of construction, the prime contractor, each subcontractor and
material/equipment supplier shall provide to the Contracting Officer and 1 SOCES/CEAN with
a Notarized statement that to the best of their knowledge, no lead based paint will be used in
the construction of this project. Additionally, the contractor must have available the most
current Material Data Safety Sheet proving that the paint does not have any lead content. If
lead based paint has been identified, copies of surveys must be forwarded to 1
SOCES/CEAN, Toxic Substance Program Manager.
2. The contractor shall be responsible for collection and disposal of all lead paint chips and lead
paint-contaminated materials, and for accumulation of these chips/materials on site. The
contractor shall test the paint materials, provide containers for proper disposal, and transport
any resulting hazardous waste to an appropriate hazardous waste accumulation area should
it test positive as hazardous waste. All necessary accumulation, disposal activities and
documentation shall be coordinated with the 1 SOCES/CEAN flight.
3. A copy of contractor’s exposure assessment data shall be provided to 1 SOCES/CEAN.
4. Copies of all lead paint-related documentation generated from this project, including lead
testing, air monitoring and hazardous waste manifests, shall be provided by the Contractor to
the Contracting Officer. A copy shall be forwarded to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN within 10 working days of task completion.
5. On Military Family Housing Projects, there shall be in-depth coordination with the
1SOCES/CEAN flight to allow for resident notification and necessary arrangements. The
contractor is strongly encouraged to coordinate closely with 1SOCES/CEAN for any
required guidance on this critical issue.
6. Contractors performing renovation, repair and painting projects that disturb lead-based paint
in homes, child care facilities, and schools built before 1978, must be certified and must
follow specific work practices to prevent lead contamination (40 CFR Part 745). Upon
completion of any lead base paint abatement, the contractor will provide copies of all disposal
waste manifests to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN, Toxic Substance Program
Manager.
01 56 00 - 10
MS0713
3.11
SPILL PREVENTION:
A. The contractor is required to familiarize their employees with spill procedures, fire suppression
systems and Material Safety Data Sheets for all materials used and/or stored at the project site.
In the event of an oil, fuel or chemical spill, the contractor shall immediately notify the Hurlburt
Field Fire Department by calling 911. The contractor shall also notify the Contracting Officer (CO)
and provide a detailed, written spill report to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN within 24
hours describing the events of the release. Costs incurred from contractor related spills are the
responsibility of the contractor. The contractor shall reimburse any government cost associated
with spill response and clean-up.
B. The contractor shall provide and maintain spill containment equipment, sufficient in both type and
quantity, at all sites involving the storage, use or handling of hazardous waste and hazardous
materials. The type of spill equipment and quantity required will be identified in the contractor’s
site specific contingency plan. Equipment and materials must be adequate to contain any release
and secondary containment must be in use as required.
C. If the contractor is required to stockpile contaminated soil for testing prior to disposal, the CO will
inform the contractor of the stockpile location after consultation with 1 SOCES/CEAN.
D. Contractor vehicle and heavy equipment maintenance (including oil changing, lubrication, and
vehicle washing) is not authorized on base.
E. All fuel, oil, and chemical spills that occur on Hurlburt Field (regardless of amount) must
be immediately reported to the base Fire Department by calling 911.
3.12
LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The contractor shall as required use a laboratory capable of performing all analysis required to
determine Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) characteristics such as, but not
limited to, Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) metals, TCLP volatile and semivolatile organic, flashpoint, reactivity, and pH. The laboratory shall also be capable of performing
any analysis required to determine the applicability of the used oil criteria detailed in 40 CFR, Part
279. The contractor shall ensure that all analytical work is performed IAW the methods and
procedures, including QA/QC requirements, detailed in EPA SW-8467. The analytical laboratory
shall be capable of providing accurate, complete data within eight (8) working days. Field
analysis and portable instrumentation shall not be used to fulfill laboratory requirements.
Thecontractor shall retain all data on file for a minimum of three years and keep it readily
available for inspection by any authorized agency, including 1 SOCES/CEAN Asset Management
Flight. Chain-of-custody documents shall be included with these records. At the end of the
contract, all of these data files may be transferred to 1 SOCES/CEAN.
3.13
POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
A. The Contractor shall clean up all areas affected by construction and restore them back to their
original condition to include landscaping, planting of trees, grass, and shrubs damaged by
construction; and raking and disposal of debris such as roof shingles, paper, nails, glass, sheet
metal, bricks, and waste concrete. Backfilled areas shall be compacted properly and replanted
with grass.
3.14
INSTALLATION RESTORATION PROGRAM (IRP)
A. Contractors and Project Managers (PM) planning projects on Hurlburt Field should be aware of
the potential to encounter soil/groundwater contamination throughout many areas of the base.
The following guidance has been developed to assist in the planning, designing and construction
of projects in possibly contaminated areas (IRP sites). The first set of guidance is the most
stringent and involves projects planned in an area that has known contamination and regulatory
Land Use Controls. The second set of guidance applies to projects planned near a known IRP
site with suspected contamination. The last set of guidance is general and applies to any areas
of the base where contamination has not been confirmed. It is imperative that planners,
designers and contractors involve 1 SOCES/CEAN early and often in the planning, designing,
and construction process to minimize the impact that contaminated soils/groundwater may have
on their project.
01 56 00 - 11
MS0713
B. Projects located on a site with known soil and/or groundwater contamination with land use
controls:
1. There are land use controls on this area imposed by an environmental regulatory agency
designed to protect public health.
2. Project Manager should investigate and plan to ensure all monitor wells/cleanup systems are
avoided.
3. Project Manager should submit detailed work plans to 1 SOCES/CEAN early in planning
stages so 1 SOCES/CEAN can obtain concurrence from the regulatory agencies on project
details.
4. Project Manager should educate workers on potential to encounter contamination and also
should ensure workers are adequately protected with personal protective equipment.
5. If unusual soil or groundwater color/odor is encountered during subsurface work, contact
1 SOCES/CEAN.
C. Projects located near a site with known or suspected soil and/or groundwater contamination
without land use controls:
1. If unusual soil or groundwater color/odor is encountered during subsurface work, contact
1 SOCES/CEAN.
2. Project Manager should investigate and plan to ensure all monitor wells/cleanup systems are
avoided.
3. Project Manager should educate workers on potential to encounter contamination and also
should ensure workers are adequately protected with personal protective equipment.
D. Sites without land use controls and not in close proximity to known contamination or IRP site:
1. If unusual soil or groundwater color/odor is encountered during subsurface work, contact
1 SOCES/CEAN.
2. Project Manager should educate workers on potential to encounter contamination and also
should ensure workers are adequately protected with personal protective equipment.
E. Be aware that the regulatory agency can halt the project for long periods of time due to the
discovery of contamination. 1 SOCES/CEAN is committed to expediting projects with IRP
compliance related issues.
3.15
STORAGE TANKS
A. 1 SOCES/CEAN must approve the use of fuel storage tanks on base, and the contractor
must ensure adequate spill containment (spill kits) for any tanks approved for use on
Hurlburt Field. The contractor must have written spill procedures for tanks and heavy
equipment that they use on base. Temporary gasoline storage is NOT permitted on base.
B. POL/Storage Tanks: Storage tanks and POL can be a source of contamination if not managed
appropriately. Contractor personnel obtaining fuels from Storage Tanks agree to follow all 62-762
FAC and the following list of Air Force Technical Order’s to ensure compliance: 37-1-1, 37A-1101, 42B-1-1, 42B-1-1S-2, 42B-1-16, 42B-1-22, 42B-1-23, and 42C-1-12.
C. Contractor must contact 1SOCES/CEAN for a copy of Hurlburt Field’s Integrated Contingency
Plan (ICP), if storage tank use is approved. A number of Federal and State agencies have
regulations pertaining to pollution prevention and emergency response requirements of oil and
hazardous storage and transfer facilities. The Hurlburt Field ICP has been developed to address
the issues of spill prevention, discharge containment / cleanup, and emergency response actions.
END OF SECTION
01 56 00 - 12
MS0612
SECTION 01 58 00
PART 1
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Project Identification Sign.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Design sign and structure in accordance with drawing shown on page 2 of this specification.
B. Use experienced professional sign painter.
C. Finishes shall be adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping, for duration of construction.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SIGN MATERIALS:
A. Structure and Framing: New, pressure-treated 4 x 4 x 12' support posts.
B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood, A-C, 1/2" thick, 4'-0" x 8'-0".
C. Paint and Primers: Exterior professional quality, high-gloss alkyd enamel.
D. Lettering: Exterior quality paint as per above, or pre-cut vinyl self-adhesive products, in accordance with
attached drawing.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. Install project identification sign within 15 days after Notice to Proceed.
1. Install at a location of high public visibility adjacent to main entrance to site.
2. Erect sign surface plumb and level. Anchor securely.
3. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.
3.02
MAINTENANCE:
A. Maintain sign and supports clean.
B. Repair deterioration and damage.
3.03
REMOVAL:
A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of project and restore the area.
01 58 00 - 1
F
G
H
E
D
END OF SECTION
01 58 00 - 2
HEIGHT
5"
1"
1"
6"
3"
6"
1"
5"
LINE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LETTER
HEIGHT STROKE
2"
3/16"
2"
3/16"
2"
3/16"
5"
1/2"
5"
1/2"
2"
3/16"
2"
3/16"
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
NAME OF CONTRACTOR
7
5
4
6
1
2
3
1. USE 1/2" GRADE A-C EXTERIOR PLYWOOD
2. PAINT WITH EXTERIOR GLOSS ENAMEL:
a. 1 COAT PRIMER
b. 2 COATS COLOR #20122, FED. STANDARD 595B
c. WHITE LETTERS
3. MOUNT SECURELY ON PRESSURE TREATED 4x4s,
WITH BOTTOM 4' FROM GRADE
4. REMOVE SIGN AFTER COMPLETION OF
CONSTRUCTION
ARCHITECT-ENGINEER
1 SOCES/CEPM
PROJECT TITLE
PROJECT TITLE
U.S. AIR FORCE PROJECT
1 SPECIAL OPERATIONS CIVIL ENGINEER SQUADRON IN
PARTNERSHIP WITH 1 SPECIAL OPS CONTRACTING SQUADRON
4'-0"
SPACE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
C
A
B
8'-0"
MS0612
MS0612
SECTION 01 60 00
PART 1
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
GENERAL
1.01
PRODUCTS
A. Products means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures and systems forming the
Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and
erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.
B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises except as specifically permitted by
the Contract Documents and approved by the Contracting Officer.
C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer for similar components.
1.02
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING:
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and
products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or
damage.
1.03
STORAGE AND PROTECTION:
A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact
and legible. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate controlled enclosures.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
C. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid
condensation.
D. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign
matter.
E. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or
damage.
F. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are
undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
1.04
PRODUCT OPTIONS:
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those
standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for substitutions: Submit a
request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
1.05
SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Substitutions will be considered under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents.
C. A request constitutes a representation that the contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the
specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
01 60 00 - 1
MS0612
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for the work to be
complete with no additional cost to the Government.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent.
5. Will reimburse Government for redesign services associated with the request.
D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision
to the Contract Documents.
E. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit four (4) copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one
proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop Drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product
equivalence.
3. Submit one (1) copy of the material specification, product data, and a physical sample of each finish
material (carpet, rubber/vinyl base, wall covering, vinyl composition tile, ceramic tile, acoustical
ceiling, etc.) of the specified material for which a substitution is proposed. This information will be
used to compare the proposed substitution to the specified material to assure compliance with the
contract requirements.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 60 00 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 01 65 00
PART l
STARTING OF SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.01
STARTING SYSTEMS
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Notify project inspector 7 days prior to start-up of each item.
C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt
tension, control sequence, or other conditions, which may cause damage.
D. Verify that tests, meter readings and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the
equipment or system manufacturer.
E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative if required by
manufacturer or contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior
to
start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
H. Submit a written report in accordance with applicable Section of Specifications that equipment or system
has been properly installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and is functioning
correctly.
1.02
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Government personnel 7 days prior to date of
final inspection.
B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for demonstration. Review contents of manual with
government personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and
shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled times, at equipment designated location.
D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data
becomes apparent during instruction.
1.03
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A. Contractor will appoint, employ and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting
and balancing.
B. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Contracting Officer indicating observations and
results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 65 00 - 1
MS0612
SECTION 01 70 00
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Closeout procedures.
B. Final cleaning.
C. Adjusting.
D. Project record documents.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Spare parts and maintenance products.
G. Warranties.
H. Maintenance service.
1.02
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and
that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for final inspection.
B. Upon completion of final inspection, correct punch list items to the satisfaction of the government, and
submit all closeout documents, the Government shall take beneficial occupancy of building (BOD). All
warranties will start when government takes BOD.
C. Provide closeout submittals to Government as required by contract documents. Complete and submit
attached closeout checklist.
1.03
FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign
substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum and remove any stains from carpeted and
soft surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface
and material being cleaned.
D. Replace filters of operating equipment.
E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
1.04
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
01 70 00 - 1
MS0612
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Specifications.
Addenda.
Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. Do not put extraneous marks or
other information on these documents. Maintain documents in good, clean condition free from tears or
damage.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed,
including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each construction change on the respective drawing
sheet or sheets to record actual construction including:
1. Addenda issued prior to receipt of bid or proposal.
2. Change orders issued during the construction phase.
3. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum.
4. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to
permanent surface improvements.
5. Measured locations of external and internal utilities, and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
6. Field changes of dimension and detail.
7. Details not on original Contract drawings.
8. Field changes related to materials.
G. Prior to final inspection the contractor shall:
1. Submit original record documents to Contracting Officer. Contractor is advised to have a reproduced
copy of the original record documents made for their records.
2. Obtain Disc copies of the contract drawings in current version of AUTOCAD used by 1SOCES/CEP.
Verify with the project inspector. Correct drawing files (sheets) to reflect all as-built conditions based
on the changes made as per item F. above. Add the words “AS BUILT” to the revision block of each
sheet title block, the date the drawings were changed and the initials of the person making the
change.
3. Submit one set of prints of the corrected contract drawing files to allow Base Civil engineer to verify
accuracy of the corrected drawings against the record documents.
4. Upon review and approval of the corrected contract drawing files, provide disc copies to the
government for their records.
5. Completed Construction Data Worksheet. See Section 01 00 00, paragraph 1.07
6. Project Closeout Check List. See end of section.
7. See Section 01 00 00, paragraph 1.15.C referencing 3% payment retention until receipt and
approval of Closeout Documents.
8. See Section 01 10 00, paragraph 3.05. referencing location of buildings, etc. to be
submitted with As-Built documents.
H. Upon acceptance of the building, project record documents and the “As Built” drawings by the Contracting
Officer and the Base Civil Engineer, final payment will be made to the contractor
1.06
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 70 00 - 2
MS0612
A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three ring binders with durable plastic covers and digital
electronic copy. General contractor shall assemble all O & M data required on project and submit as a
single submittal.
B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of
project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described
below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description
identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors,
and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification
section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and
suppliers. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and
materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Air and water balance reports.
c. Certificates.
d. Photocopies of manufacturer's warranties.
E. Submit 1 draft copy of completed volumes 5 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and
returned after final inspection, with comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to
final submission.
F. Submit two sets of revised final volumes, within 10 days after final inspection.
G. DIGITAL COPY: Contents of digital copy shall match those described for printed materials. Organize the
digital copy, per Volume, with a Table of Contents (digital file folder structure) for Parts 1-3. Designated
sections in file folders and subfolders shall be arranged by system and subdivided by specification section
and information required. For example:
A. Part 3 – Project Documents
1. HVAC System
a. Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units
i.
Shop drawings
ii.
Reports
iii.
Certifications
iv.
Warrantiies
1.07
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification
sections.
B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
1.08
CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR WARRANTIES
A. Provide triplicate notarized copies.
01 70 00 - 3
MS0612
B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers.
C. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
D. All warranties shall be submitted within 10 days from BOD with warranty start dates printed on warranties.
1.09
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of components where indicated in specification sections during the
warranty period.
B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and
lubricate as required.
C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts
whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or Subcontractor without prior
written consent of the Government
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED);
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 70 00 - 4
MS0612
PROJECT CLOSEOUT CHECK LIST
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR (mark n/a next to those items that are not applicable for this project)
________
TEST AND BALANCE REPORT SUBMITTED, APPROVED AND INCLUDED IN THE O&M
MANUALS. REPORT SHALL BE SUBMITTED PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION.
________
HAVE O&M MANUALS BEEN SUBMITTED AND APPROVED. MANUALS ARE TO BE
ASSEMBLED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND SUBMITTED UNDER A SINGLE
COVER PER SECTION 01700. (SEE ATTACHED LIST). MANUALS SHALL BE SUBMITTED
PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION.
________
PUNCH LIST COMPLETED.
________
HAS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION BEEN COMPLETED.
________
HAS COMPLETED CONSTRUCTION DATA WORKSHEET.
________
HAVE THE RECORD DOCUMENTS AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS BEEN SUBMITTED AND
APPROVED PER SECTION 01700.
________
HAS THE DDC PROGRAMMING FOR THE HOST COMPUTER BEEN DOWN LOADED TO
THE CONTROLS SHOP.
________
HAS FINAL CLEANING BEEN COMPLETED.
________
HAVE SPARE PARTS BEEN TURNED OVER TO THE GOVERNMENT. (SEE ATTACHED
LIST)
________
HAVE WARRANTIES BEEN SUBMITTED AND APPROVED. (SEE ATTACHED LIST)
________
HAVE DIGITAL RECORD DRAWINGS BEEN SUBMITTED (SECTION 02811 LANDSCAPE
IRRIGATION AND 15330 FIRE SUPPRESSION)
________
HAS ALL REQUIRED TRAINING BEEN ACCOMPLISHED. (SEE ATTACHED LIST)
________
HAS ALL REQUIRED TESTING BEEN ACCOMPLISHED. (SEE ATTACHED LIST).
________
HAVE ITEMS TO BE TURNED OVER TO GOVERNMENT BEEN TURNED OVER.
________
HAVE REPLACEMENT TREES BEEN PLANTED IN AUTHORIZED LOCATION
________
IS CONSTRUCTION SITE STABLE, NO EROSION
________
HAS ALL CONTRACTOR HAZMAT BEEN REMOVED FROM PROJECT SITE
________
HAS CONTRACTOR SUBMITTED THE TOTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS USED DURING
CONTRACT
________
HAS CONTRACTOR PROVIDED WITNESSED AND NOTARIZED STATEMENT THAT
PROJECT WAS CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
INCLUDING ALL CHANGES MADE DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE.
________
WARRANTY FORM
01 70 00 - 5
MS0612
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
INSPECTORS
________
HAVE THE ABOVE ITEMS BEEN COMPLETED BY THE CONTRACTOR.
________
HAS 100% COMPLETION LETTER AND BLUE BOOKS BEEN SENT TO CONTRACTING.
________
HAS FINAL PAYMENT BEEN APPROVED.
________
HAS WARRANTY DATE BEEN ESTABLISHED. DATE:__________________
________
HAVE RECORD DRAWINGS AND ORGINALS BEEN TURNED OVER TO DRAFTING FOR DOING
AS-BUILTS AND FILING.
________
HAVE O&M MANUALS BEEN TURNED OVER THE SHOPS.
________
HAS 1354 BEEN COMPLETED AND TURNED OVER TO REAL PROPERTY ALONG WITH
INPECTORS AND ENGINEERS FOLDERS. **
________
HAS CONTRACTOR’S WRITTEN, WITNESSED AND NOTARIZED STATEMENT RE COMPLETION
OF THE PROJECT BEEN TURNED OVER TO THE GOVERNMENT.
SEE SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, PARAGRAPH 1.15.
________
HAS PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS BEEN RECEIVED, COMPLETED AND RETURNED.
________
HAVE ASBESTOS RECORDS BEEN RECEIVED FROM CONTRACTOR AND TURNED OVER TO
CEV.
________
HAVE ENVIRONMENTAL PERMIT CERTIFICATIONS ISSUED FOR POTABLE WATER,
SANITARY SEWER, OR STORMWATER BEEN CLOSED OUT.
** 1354 SHOULD BE COMPLETED PRIOR TO TURNING IN O&M MANUALS, AS-BUILTS DRAWINGS AND BLUE
BOOKS.
01 70 00 - 6
MS0612
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
SPARE PARTS
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 09 51 13 ceiling tile
________ Section 09 65 00 flooring base
Section 12 21 13 blinds
________ Section 21 13 13 fire sup. heads
Section 23 54 00 filters
________ Section 23 73 00 filters
Section 26 24 16 keys
________ Section 26 28 26 keys
Section 26 52 00 lamps
________ Section 28 16 00 intrusion detection
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
O&M MANUALS
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 32 84 00 irrigation sys
________ Section 09 30 00 ceramic tile
Section 09 68 00 carpet
________ Section 10 44 00 fire extinguishers
Section 22 13 43 lift stations
________ Section 21 13 18 high expansion foam system
Section 21 13 13 fire suppr.
________ Section 22 10 00 plumbing piping
Section 22 11 19 plumbing spec.
________ Section 22 40 00 plumbing fixtures
Section 22 30 00 pluming eq.
________ Section 23 21 16 hydronic spec.
Section 23 21 23 pumps
________ Section 23 52 34 boilers
Section 23 54 00 furn. & a/c
________ Section 23 55 00 unit heaters
Section 23 64 00 chillers
________ Section 23 73 00 air handlers
Section 23 34 23 ventilators
________ Section 23 36 00 terminal units
Section 23 09 23 controls
________ Section 26 12 00 transformers
Section 26 28 26 transfer switch
________ Section 26 24 27 bypass switch
Section 26 51 00 interior lights
________ Section 26 56 00 site lighting
Section 26 33 00 emer. power
________ Section 26 32 13 generators
Section 28 31 00 fire alarm
________ Section 28 13 00 intrusion detection
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 23 72 00 enthalpy and desiccant wheel systems
WARRANTIES
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 31 31 16 termite control
________ Section 07 42 13 metal roofing
Section 07 90 00 joint sealers
________ Section 07 52 00 bituminous roofing
Section 08 14 16 wood doors
________ Section 13 34 19 metal bldg. roofing
Section 13 34 19 metal bldgs
________ Section 22 40 00 water cooler
Section 22 30 00 water heater
________ Section 23 52 34 boiler
Section 23 54 00 compressor
________ Section 23 55 00 unit heater
Section 23 64 00 chiller
________ Section 23 36 00 terminal units
Section 26 55 50 ballfield lighting
________ Section 26 33 00 emer. power supply
Section 26 32 13 generator
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 21 13 18 high expansion foam system
TRAINING
________
________
________
________
________
Section 23 52 34 boilers
________ Section 23 64 00 chillers
Section 23 09 23 controls
________ Section 26 32 13 generators
Section 28 31 00 alarm system
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 21 13 18 high expansion foam system
01 70 00 - 7
MS0612
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
TESTING
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 31 23 23 backfill
________ Section 31 23 16 trenching
Section 32 12 16 paving
________ Section 32 84 00 irrigation sys
Section 03 30 00 concrete
________ Section 04 05 03 mortar
Section 22 13 43 lift stations
________ Section 21 13 13 fire suppression
Section 22 10 00 plumbing piping
________ Section 22 15 00 compressed air
Section 23 21 13 hydronic piping
________ Section 23 52 34 boilers
Section 23 64 00 chillers
________ Section 23 81 26 heat pumps
Section 23 81 26 OA Units
________ Section 23 31 00 ductwork
Section 23 09 23 controls
________ Section 26 05 13 med-voltage cable
Section 26 27 26 wiring devices
________ Section 26 05 26 grounding
Section 26 32 13 generators
________ Section 28 31 00 alarm system
Section 28 16 00 detection sys
________ Section 27 00 00 LAN systems
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 23 72 00 enthalpy and desiccant wheel systems
01 70 00 - 8
MS0612
PR O J E C T
W A R R A N T Y
F O R M
BUILDING NUMBER & STREET ADDRESS: ____________________________________________________
PROJECT NUMBER & TITLE:
____________________________________________________
CONTRACT NUMBER: _____________________________________________________________________
PROJECT MANAGER & PHONE NO:
_______________________________________________
CONTRACT SPECIALIST & PHONE NO. _______________________________________________________
DATE OF GOVERNMENT ACCEPTANCE: ______________________________________________________
GENERAL 0NE YEAR WARRANTY EXPIRATION DATE: __________________________________________
ONE YEAR WARRANTY INPSECTION DATE (30 days prior to expiration)___________________________
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ____________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
PRIME KTR, PHONE NO. & FAX NO. __________________________________________________________
HVAC SUBKTR, PHONE & FAX NO. __________________________________________________________
PLUMBING SUBKTR, PHONE & FAX NOS. _____________________________________________________
ELECTRICAL SUBKTR. PHONE & FAX NO'S ___________________________________________________
E X T E N D E D
W A R R A N T I E S
SPEC.
ITEM & WARRANTY -
RESPONSIBLE PARTY (IES)
31 31 16
Termite Treatment, 5 yrs,
Prime ktr & installer
32 84 00
Irrigation System, 2 yr,
Prime ktr & subktr
04 20 00
Masonry, 2 yr,
Prime ktr & subktr
07 42 13
Preformed Metal Roofing, general, 2 yr
Prime ktr & subktr
Panel finish, 20 year,
Manufacturer
Leaking, 20 yr,
Manufacturer
07 52 00
Modified Bitumen Roofing, 10 yr,
Manufacturer
07 62 00
Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim, finish 20 yr,
Manufacturer
08 33 23
Overhead Rolling Doors, one year plus warranty,
Manufacturer
13 34 19
Pre-Engineered Building Systems, general, 2 yr,
Prime ktr & installer
Siding finish, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
Panel finish, 20 yr,
Manufacturer
Leaking, 20 yr,
Manufacturer
22 40 00
Plumbing, water cooler compressor, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
22 30 00
Plumbing, water heater tank, 6 yr,
Manufacturer
22 15 00
Compressed Air Systems, air compressor, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
23 52 34
Finned Water Tube Boilers, boiler heat exchanger, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
01 70 00 - 9
MS0612
E X T E N D E D
W A R R A N T I E S, continued.
SPEC.
ITEM & WARRANTY -
RESPONSIBLE PARTY (IES)
23 54 00
Forced Air Furnaces &Split System Air Conditioning,
5 yr compressor, 10 yr heat exchanger,
Manufacturer
23 55 00
Fuel Fired Unit Heaters, unit heat exchanger, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
23 64 00
Air Cooled Water Chillers, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
26 55 50
Ballfield Lighting, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
26 33 00
Emergency Power Supply, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
G E NE R A L
I N F O R M A T I O N
SPEC
ITEM DESCRIPTION; MANUFACTURER, SPEC #, STYLE, TYPE, COLOR, ETC.
04 20 00
Brick, __________________________________________________________________________
04 20 00
Concrete Masonry _______________________________________________________________
04 20 00
Glass Masonry __________________________________________________________________
06 41 00
Custom Casework _______________________________________________________________
07 24 00
EIFS ___________________________________________________________________________
07 42 13
Prefrmd. Roofing & Access. _______________________________________________________
07 52 00
Modif'd Bitumen Memb. Roofing ___________________________________________________
08 13 14
Steel Doors & Frames ____________________________________________________________
08 14 16
Wood Doors ____________________________________________________________________
08 41 13
Alum. Entry & Storefront __________________________________________________________
08 51 13
Alum. Windows, Oper. & Fixed _____________________________________________________
08 71 00
Door H'dware Latchsets __________________________________________________________
Locksets _______________________________________________________________________
Closers ________________________________________________________________________
Exit Devices ____________________________________________________________________
09 30 00
Cer. Tile Floor & Wall _____________________________________________________________
09 51 13
Susp. Acoust. Ceiling ____________________________________________________________
09 65 00
Resilient Floor __________________________________________________________________
09 68 00
Carpet _________________________________________________________________________
09 90 00
Painting ________________________________________________________________________
10 21 14
Plas. Lam. Toil. Part's ____________________________________________________________
10 26 00
Bumper, Corner & Wall Prot. ______________________________________________________
10 14 00
Interior Signage _________________________________________________________________
10 28 00
Toil. & Bath Access. _____________________________________________________________
12 21 13
Mini & Vert. Blinds _______________________________________________________________
13 34 19
Pre-Engr. Bldg. Systems __________________________________________________________
26 12 00
Distribution Transfmers. __________________________________________________________
26 24 16
Panelboards ____________________________________________________________________
26 24 17
Load Centers ___________________________________________________________________
01 70 00 - 10
MS0612
G E NE R A L
I N F O R M A T I O N, continued.
SPEC
ITEM DESCRIPTION; MANUFACTURER, SPEC #, STYLE, TYPE, COLOR, ETC.
26 28 26
Transfer Switch _________________________________________________________________
26 28 27
By-pass Isolation Switch _________________________________________________________
26 51 00
Interior Luminaires ______________________________________________________________
26 56 00
Site Lighting ____________________________________________________________________
26 32 13
Pkg. Engine Generator Syst. ______________________________________________________
28 31 00
Fire Detect. & Alarm Syst. _________________________________________________________
28 16 00
Intrusion Detect. Syst. ____________________________________________________________
I N S T R U C T I O N S
1. The prime contractor shall complete this form and provide it with the close out documentation.
2. Extended warranties; Provide name, phone and fax number for the responsible party (ies).
3. General Information; Provide name, phone and fax number, and pertinent information indicated for each item
listed.
4. It may not be required to use all of the items listed under Extended Warranties and General Information, in the
construction of this project. Should this occur, simply line through the item to indicate it was not used on this
project.
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Prime Contractor (See note below)
Date
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Mailing Address
City, State and Zip Code
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Phone Number
Fax Number
____________________________________
E-mail Address
If prime contractor is a corporation, affix the corporate seal below and provide signature of responsible party who can
legally obligate the corporation.
01 70 00 - 11
MS0612
SECTION 01 81 13:
PART 1
GREEN PROCUREMENT
GENERAL
1.01
GREEN PROCUREMENT & POLLUTION PREVENTION
A. Green Procurement is a mandatory component of the Air Force pollution prevention program. The
AF Installation Pollution Prevention Program Guide includes this goal for Green Procurement: “100% of
all products purchased each year in each of U.S. EPA’s ‘Guideline Item’ categories shall contain recycled
materials meeting U.S. EPA’s Guideline Criteria.”
B. Currently, reporting of green procurement purchases is limited to contracts having a total value greater
than $100,000.00, which includes the purchase of any amount of U.S. EPA-designated items.
C. This document contains guidelines for implementing the RCRA, EO, DOD, and Air Force requirements
1.02
AUTHORITY & REFERENCES:
A. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), section 6002 (42 U.S.C. 6962)
B. Executive Order (EO) 13101, Greening the Government through Waste Prevention, Recycling, and
Federal Acquisition.
C. Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 247, Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for
Products containing Recovered Material.
D. Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR)
1.03
REGULATORY BACKGROUND
A. Section 6002 of RCRA requires federal agencies to give preference in the acquisition process to products
and practices that conserve and protect natural resources and the environment. EO 13101 requires
federal agencies to expand waste prevention and recycling programs, implement affirmative procurement
programs for the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) -designated items, and procure
other environmentally preferable products and services. The stated purpose of the Green Procurement
Program is to stimulate the market for recovered materials. As a result of EO 13101, the EPA issued the
Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG’s) that have established the mandatory procurement by
federal agencies of 36 items produced with recovered materials. The EPA has also issued Recovered
Material Advisor Notices (RMANs) to accompany the CPGs and provide detailed information on the
designated items.
B. Please direct all questions regarding the plan to the Contracting Officer for forwarding to the 1 SOCES/CEAN
Environmental Flight, 8844651.
1.04
DOD AND AIR FORCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Green Procurement programs are required of all Air Force (USAF) installations. Department of Defense
(DOD) Instruction 4715.4, Pollution Prevention, calls for program establishment in accordance with RCRA
and EO 12873. Green Procurement is also addressed in Air Force Instruction (AFI) 32-7080, Pollution
Prevention Program, and the 24 July 1995 Air Force Pollution Prevention Strategy. The Strategy sets
program goals, and the AFI provides program guidance.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Sections 01 00 00, 01 33 00 and 01 60 00.
B. Each contractor as defined in paragraph 1.08 Definitions must complete the form attached at the end of
this section, indicating which products containing recycled or recovered products are going to be
incorporated in the construction of this project. In accordance with paragraph 1.09 Exemptions, provide
which exemption is applicable to each listed product.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s material specifications, installation instructions, physical
characteristics,
01 81 13 - 1
MS0612
D. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed the specified requirements.
E. Sample: Submit sample for record.
1.06
RECYCLED OR RECOVERED PRODUCTS
A. Those construction materials identified on the Form at the end of this section.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Companies specializing in the manufacture of products that comply with the requirements
of this section with a minimum of three (3) years documented experience.
1.08
DEFINITIONS:
A. GREEN PROCUREMENT: The purchase of environmentally preferable products manufactured from
recycled and reclaimed materials.
B. ACQUISITION: The acquiring by contract with appropriated funds for supplies or services (including
construction) by and for the use of the Federal Government through purchase or lease, whether the
supplies or services are already in existence or must be created, developed, demonstrated, and
evaluated. Acquisition begins at the point when agency needs are established and includes the
description of requirements to satisfy agency needs, solicitation and selection of sources, award of
contracts, contract financing, contract performance, contract administration, and those technical and
management functions directly related to the process of fulfilling agency needs by contract.
C. CONTRACTOR (S): The prime contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and equipment suppliers
who provide the products that will be used in the construction of this project.
D. ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE: Products or services having a lesser or reduced effect on human
health and the environment when compared to competing products or services, serving the same
purpose. This comparison may consider raw materials acquisition, production, manufacturing, packing,
distribution, reuse, operation, maintenance, or product or service disposal. (EO 13101)
E. EPA DESIGNATED ITEM: An item that is or can be made with recovered material; that is listed by the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in a procurement guideline (40CFR, part 427); and for which
EPA has advised purchasing recommendations in a related Recovered materials Advisory Notice
(RMAN). (FAR 23.402)
F. EXECUTIVE AGENCY OR AGENCY: An executive agency as defined in 5 U.S.C. 105. For the purpose
of this order, military departments, as defined in 5 U.S.C. 102 are covered under the auspices of the
Department of Defense.
G. FORM: The Affirmative Procurement Reporting Form found at the end of this section.
H. POLLUTION PREVENTION: Source reduction as defined in the Pollution Prevention Act of 1990 (42
U.S.C. 13102), and other practices that reduce or eliminate the creation of pollutants through (a)
increased efficiency in the use of raw materials, energy, water, or other resources; or (b) protection of
natural resources by conservation.
I.
PRODUCT: Materials and equipment that will be used in the construction of this project.
J.
POST CONSUMER MATERIAL: A material or finished product that has served its intended use and has been
discarded for disposal or recovery, having completed its life as a consumer item. “Postconsumer material” is a
part of the broader category of “recovered material”.
K. PROCUREMENT: The purchase and providing of products to be used in the construction of this project.
L. RECOVERED MATERIALS: Waste materials and by-products which have been recovered or diverted from
solid waste, but such term does not include those materials and by-products generated from, and commonly
reused within, an original manufacturing process. (EO 13101, 42 U.S.C. 6903 (19) and FAR 23.402)
01 81 13 - 2
MS0612
M. RECYCLABILITY: The ability of a product or material to be recovered from or otherwise diverted from the
solid waste stream for the purpose of recycling. (EO 13101)
N. RECYCLING: The series of activities, including collection, separation, and processing by which products or
other materials are recovered from the solid waste steam for use in form of raw materials in the manufacture
of new products other than fuel for producing heat or power by combustion. (EO 13101)
O. RECYCLED MATERIAL: A material utilized in place of raw or virgin material in product manufacturing
consisting of materials derived from postconsumer waste, industrial scrap, material derived from agricultural
wastes, and other items, all of which can be used in new product manufacturer. (EPA Guidelines & OFPP
Policy Letter 92-4)
P. RECYCLED PRODUCT: A recycled product is one made completely or partially from waste materials or byproducts recovered or diverted from the solid waste stream.
Q. SOLID WASTE: Garbage, refuse, sludges and other discarded materials including those from industrial,
commercial, and agricultural operations, and from community activities. This excludes solids or dissolved
materials in domestic sewage or other significant pollutants in water resources, such as silt, dissolved or
suspended solids in industrial waste water effluents, dissolved materials in irrigation return flow, etc. (EPA
Guidelines)
R. SPECIFICATION (S): A clear and accurate description of the technical requirements for materials, products,
or services including the minimum requirement for materials’ quality and construction and any equipment
necessary for an acceptable product. In general, specifications are in the form of written descriptions,
drawings, prints, commercial designations, industry standards, and other descriptive references.
S. UNREASONABLE PRICE: If the cost of the recycled content product exceeds the cost of a non-recycled item,
the Air Force considers the cost to be unreasonable. (Air Force Affirmative Procurement Plan)
T. VERIFICATION: Procedures used by procuring agencies to confirm both vendor estimates and certifications
of the percentages of recovered materials contained in the products supplied to them or to be used in the
performance of a contract. (EPA Guidelines)
U. WASTE PREVENTION: Any change in the design, manufacturing, purchase, or use of materials or products
(including packaging) to reduce their amount or toxicity before they are discarded. Waste prevention also
refers to the reuse of products or materials.
V. WASTE REDUCTION: Preventing or decreasing the amount of waste being generated through waste
prevention, recycling, or purchasing recycled and environmentally preferable products.
1. 09 EXEMPTIONS
A. U.S. EPA recommends minimum content levels for those items listed at paragraph 1.10. The minimum
content levels are indicated in the Form. These levels are mandatory for Air Force procurements unless one
of the following exemptions applies. RCRA provides the following exemptions from the requirement to
purchase EPA-designated items:
1. The product is not available from a sufficient number of sources to maintain a satisfactory level of
competition (i.e., available from two or more sources).
2. The product is not available within a reasonable period of time.
3 The product does not meet the performance standards in applicable specifications or fails to meet
reasonable performance standards of the procuring agency.
4. The product is not available at a reasonable price. For Air Force purposes, “unreasonable price” is
defined as follows: If the price of the recycled-content product exceeds the cost of a non-recycled item,
then the price is considered unreasonable.
B. Each contractor is responsible for completion of the Form with respect to his or her work and products being
provided. Each contractor shall provide written documentation to support his/her decision not to acquire items
meeting the minimum content levels. This documentation shall be forwarded to the Contracting Officer for
review and approval. In the event the documentation fails to support the contractor’s findings, the Contracting
Officer shall return the documentation to the contractor citing the reason(s) for disapproval. The contractor
shall resubmit and address the deficiencies.
01 81 13 - 3
MS0612
1.10
U.S. EPA-DESIGNATED ITEMS
A. The 54 U.S. EPA-designated items are listed below. Not all of these items and the products listed under
each item may be required in the construction of this project. Please refer to the drawings and
specifications. The executed Form shall be used to demonstrate compliance with the stated procurement
requirements.
1. PAPER PRODUCTS
Item 1:
All paper and paper products, excluding building and construction paper grades.
2. VEHICULAR PRODUCTS
Item 2:
Lubricating oils containing re-refined oil, including engine lubricating oils, hydraulic fluids, and
gear oils, but excluding marine and aviation oils.
Item 3:
Tires, excluding airplane tires.
Item 4:
Reclaimed engine coolants, excluding coolants used in non-vehicular applications
3. CONSTRUCTION PRODUCTS
Item 5:
Building insulation products.
Item 6:
Structural fiberboard products for applications other than building insulation.
Item 7:
Laminated paperboard products for applications other than building insulation.
Item 8:
Cement and concrete, including products such as pipe and block, containing fly ash.
Item 9:
Cement and concrete, including concrete products such as pipe and block, containing
ground-granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag.
Item 10:
Carpet made of polyester fiber for use in low- and medium-wear applications.
Item 11:
Floor tiles containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 12:
Patio blocks containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 25:
Shower and restroom dividers/partitions containing recovered steel or plastic.
Item 26:
Reprocessed and consolidated latex paint for specific uses.
Item 37:
Carpet cushion
Item 38:
Flowable fill.
Item 39:
Railroad grade crossing surfaces.
4. TRANSPORTATION PRODUCTS
Item 13:
Traffic barricades used in controlling or restricting vehicular traffic.
Item 14:
Traffic cones used in controlling or restricting vehicular traffic.
Item 27:
Parking stops.
Item 28:
Channelizers used as temporary traffic control devices.
Item 29:
Delineators used as temporary traffic control devices.
Item 30:
Flexible delineators used as temporary traffic control devices.
5. PARK AND RECREATION PRODUCTS
Item 15:
Playground surfaces containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 16:
Running tracks containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 31:
Plastic fencing.
Item 40:
Park benches and picnic tables.
Item 41:
Playground equipment.
6. LANDSCAPING PRODUCTS
Item 17:
Hydraulic mulch products containing recovered paper or recovered wood.
Item 18:
Compost made from yard trimmings, leaves, and/or grass clippings.
Item 32:
Garden and soaker hoses containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 33:
Lawn and garden edging containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 42:
Food waste compost.
Item 43:
Plastic lumber landscaping timbers and posts.
7. NON-PAPER OFFICE PRODUCTS
Item 19:
Office recycling containers.
Item 20:
Office waste receptacles.
Item 16:
Plastic desktop accessories.
Item 22:
Toner cartridges.
Item 23:
Binders.
Item 24:
Plastic trash bags.
Item 34:
Printer ribbons (re-inked ribbons or re-inking equipment/service for ribbons).
Item 35:
Plastic envelops.
Item 44:
Solid plastic binders.
Item 45:
Plastic clipboards.
01 81 13 - 4
MS0612
Item 46:
Plastic file folders.
Item 47:
Plastic clip portfolios.
Item 48:
Plastic presentation folders.
8. MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
Item 36:
Pallets
Item 49:
Sorbents.
Item 50:
Industrial drums.
Item 51:
Awards and plaques.
Item 52:
Mats
Item 53:
Signage, including supports and posts.
Item 54:
Manual grade strapping.
1.11
APPLICABILITY
A. These procedures apply to all contractors employed in the construction of this project.
B. Please direct all questions regarding the plan to the Contracting Officer for forwarding to the 1 SOCES/CEAN
Environmental Flight, 884-4651.
1.12
INTENT
A. The intent of this section is to increase the awareness of all contractors as to the availability of products
manufactured from or that contain recycled materials, thereby increasing the use of these products in the
construction of this project.
B. The various sections of the specifications contain references to products to be used in the construction of this
project. The listed product may or may not be manufactured from or contain recycled materials. Therefore
all contractor(s), subcontractors, equipment suppliers and material suppliers are responsible for
compliance with this specification and those items/products listed on the Form. Recycled products
shall be used wherever possible subject to the exemptions as per paragraph 1.09.
C. Substitution of recycled materials or recycled products for specified products are subject to the provisions of
paragraph 1.05 Submittals (above) and Section 01 00 00, paragraph 1.11.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PARTIAL LIST OF PRODUCT SOURCES AND INFORMATION
A. GENERAL DATA:
1. GreenSpec Binder, Environmental Building News, www.ebuild.com
2. Certified Forest Products Council, www.certifiedwood.org/
3. Wiley Series in Sustainable Design, www.wiley.com/
4. The Carpet and Rug Institute, www.carpet-rug.com/
5. Information, McGraw-Hill, [email protected]
6. Florida Directory of Recycled Product Vendors,
www.2.dep.state.fl.us/waste/programs/rbac/downloads/rbac_dir.pd
7. Oikos Green Building Source, News, searchable products data base, library, www.oikos.com
8. Green Design Network, News, publications, databases, www.greendesign.net
9. Green Works Recycled Content7 Product Guide, detailed vendors directory,
www.metrokc.gov/greenworks/recycontent.htm>
B. DIVISION 03 00 00, CONCRETE
1. GranCem, granulated blast-furnace slag, www.grancem.com/
2. Syndesis, cement-based, pre-cast product workable with wood tools, www.syndesisinc.com/
C. DIVISION 04 00 00, MASONRY
1. Heble Building Systems, autoclaved aerated concrete blocks, www.heble.com/
2 Ytong Florida Ltd., autoclaved aerated concrete blocks, www.ytong-usa.com/
D. DIVISION 06 00 00, WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
1. Avonite, solid surfacing, www.avonite.com/
2. Chemical Specialties, wood treatment, www.treatedwood.com/
01 81 13 - 5
MS0612
3. Homasote Company, structural fiberboard, www.homasote.com/
4. Isoboard, fiberboard composed of straw fibers and non-toxic resins, www.isoboard.com/
5. TrusJoist Mac Millan, engineered wood products, www.homasote.com/
E. DIVISION 07 00 00, Thermal & Moisture Protection
1. Duro-Last Roofing, recycled PVC walkway pads, 1-800-2480280
2. Johns Manville, Insulation products, www.jm.com/
3. Majestic Skylines, rubber-based slate-look roofing for steep roofs, www.majesticskylines.com/
4. Owens-Corning, insulation products, www.owenscorning.com/
F. DIVISION 08 00 00, OPENINGS
1. Marvin Window & Door, windows, some meeting “Energy Star Label”, www.marvin.com/
2. Pella, energy efficient windows, www/pella.com/
G. DIVISION 09 00 00, FINISHES
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.-Flooring Systems, www.armstrong-floors.com/
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.-Ceiling Systems, www.ceilings.com/
3. Benjamin Moore & Co., VOC free acrylic interior latex paint, www.benjaminmoore.com/
4. CanFibre Group Ltd., all-green medium-density fiberboard, www.canfibre.com
5. Chemrex Inc., low-e interior paint, www.chemrex.com/
6. Collins & Aikman Floor coverings, carpet with 100% post-consumer backing, www.powerbond.com/
7. DesignTex, Inc., polyester panel fabric made from 100% PET fiber, www.dtex.com/
8. Dodge-Regupol, Inc., 100% recycled rubber-flooring, www.regupol.com/
9. Eco-sensitive modular tile, vinyl tile with 100% recycled carpet-backing, www.powerbond.com/
10. Environmental Stone Products, stone manufactured from 100% recycled glass,
www.environmentalstone.com/
11. Glidden: residential interior latex paints 100% free of VOC, www.icipaintstores.com/
12 Homasote Inc., sound barrier, www.homasote.com/
13. Isoboard Enterprises, Inc. panel made from wheat straw and non-toxic resins, 1-503-2427345
14. Marley-Flexco Co., flooring made form 95% recycled truck and bus tires, www.marleyflexco.com/
15. The Mat Factory, Inc., interlocking roll-up tiles made from 100% postconsumer tire rubber and PVC plastic
from electric cable covers, 1-949-6453122
16. Permafirm Pad Co., carpet pads made from almost 100% recycled content, 1-800-3446977
17. Sherwin Williams, VOC compliant paints and enamels, www.sherwin.com/
18. SierraPine Limited, formaldehyde-free particleboard and medium density fiberboard containing
recycled/recovered wood fiber, www.sierrapine.com/
19. Summittville Tiles, impervious porcelain tiles using feldspar tailings, www.summitville.com/
20 Tectum, natural-fiber acoustical ceiling and wall panels, www.tectum.com/
21. Tiles with natural fibers, tiles made of a bio-alloy material and natural fibers, www.maderatile.com
22. USG Interiors, Inc., synthetic gypsum board, www.usg.com/
23. Decorative Architectural Tiles, floor, counter & wall tile made from 100 % postconsumer glass, 1-8088857812
24. Forbo, linoleum-flooring utilizing renewable resources, www.forbo.com/
H. DIVISION 10 00 00, SPECIALTIES
1. The Access Store, modular ramping system made from 100% recycled rubber, www.accessstoe.com/
2. BP Solar, photovoltaic modules and systems, www.bp.com/bpsolar/index
3. Mecho Shade Systems, interior shadecloths, www.mechoshade.com/
4. R Control, structural insulated panel (SIP), www.mechoshade.com/
I.
DIVISION 12 00 00, FURNISHINGS
1. Guilford of Maine, fabric from 100% recycled materials, www.terratex.com/
2. Phenix Biocomposites, tabletops made from soy based products free of petrochemicals, 1-800-3248187
3. Safe Solutions, LLC, furniture manufactured from waste wood, 1-970-2473333
J.
DIVISION 14 00 00, CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
1. Montgomery KONE, AC girlies elevators, www.montgomery-kone.com/
K. DIVISION 26 00 00, ELECTRICAL
1. Advance Transformer Company, linear reactor ballast, www.advancetransformer.com/
01 81 13 - 6
MS0612
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
7.
8.
PART 3
Artemide Inc., energy efficient cold-cathode lighting, www.artemide.com/
Edison Price Lighting, track mounted metal-halide PAR 30 &38 lamps, 1-212-5216995
Leviton Manufacturing Corporation, Inc., occupancy sensors, www.leviton.com/
Phillips Lighting, energy efficient compact fluorescent lamps, www.phillips.com/lighting
Osram Sylvania, mercury-free lamps and energy efficient fluorescent lamps, www.osramsylvania.com/
Sensor Switch, lighting control occupancy sensors, www.sensorswitch.com/
Venture Lighting, pulse-start high performance lamp and ballast system, www.venturelighting.com/
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittals.
Install materials and systems in proper relation to adjacent construction and with uniform appearance.
B. Coordinate with work of other sections.
C. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper function.
D. Clean and protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION
01 81 13 - 7
MS0612
GREEN PROCUREMENT REPORTING FORM
(PER EXECUTIVE ORDER 13101)
PROJECT NUMBER:___________________________________
BLDG NUMBER:_______________________________________
PROJECT MANAGER___________________________________
PROJECT INSPECTOR:_________________________________
CONTRACTOR:________________________________________
This form is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted through 1 SOCONS to 1 SOCEC. It is the responsibility
of the 1 Special Operations Civil Engineering Squadron construction inspector to submit this data to 1
SOSCES/CEAN who in-turn reports it to AFSOC MAJCOM IAW E.O. 13101, Federal Acquisition, Recycling, and
Waste Prevention.
RECYCLED OR RECOVERED
PRODUCT
% REQUIRED
(MINIMUM)
-ROCK WOOL INSUL
-FIBERGLASS INSUL
-LOOSE FILL/SPRAY ON INSUL
-PERLITE COMP BOARD INSUL
-PLASTIC RIGID FOAM INSUL
-GLASS FIBER REINF FOAM INSUL
-PHENOLIC RIGID FOAM INSUL
-STRUCTURAL FIBER BD
-LAMINATED PAPER BD
-CEMENT/CONCRETE (FLYASH)
-CARPET (PET)
-PATIO BLOCKS/RUBBER
-PATIO BLOCKS/PLASTIC
-FLOOR TILES/RUBBER
-FLOOR TILES/PLASTIC
-TRAFFIC CONES
-TRAFFIC BARRICADES
-PLAYGROUND SURFACES
-RUNNING TRACKS
-COMPOST
-WOOD-BASED HYDRAULIC
MULCH
-PAPER-BASED HYDRAULIC
MULCH
REPROCESSED LATEX PAINT
WHITE, OFF-WHITE & PASTEL
COLORS
REPROCESSED LATEX PAINT
GREY, BROWN, EARTHTONES &
OTHER DARK COLORS
CONSOLIDATED LATEX PAINT
75%
20-25%
75%
23%
9%
6%
5%
80-100%
100%
SEE SPEC
25-100%
90-100%
90-100%
90-100%
90-100%
50-100%
80-100%
90-100%
90-100%
100%
100%
PLASTIC/RUBBER PARKING
STOPS
CONCRETE CONTAINING COAL
FLY ASH PARKING STOPS
CONCRETE CONTAINING GGBF
PARKING STOPS
PLASTIC SHOWER & RESTROOM
DIVIDERS/PARTITIONS
100%
100%
20%
50-99%
100%
20-40%
25-70%
20-100%
01 81 13 - 8
%
AVAIL
(ACTUAL)
QUANTITY
USED/UI
EXEMPTED
1,2,3,4
MS0612
CERTIFICATION
I hereby certify the Statement of Work/Specifications for the requisition/procurement of all materials listed on this form
comply with EPA standards for recycled/recovered materials content.
_______________
Contractor
_______________
Inspector
_______________
Environmental Flight
The following exemptions may apply to the non-procurement of recycled/recovered content materials:
1) The product does not meet appropriate performance standards
2) The product is not available within a reasonable time frame
3) The product is not available competitively (from two or more sources)
4) The product is only available at an unreasonable price (compared with a comparable non-recycled content
product.)
01 81 13 - 9
MS0114
SECTION 03 10 00
PART 1
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping.
1.02
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. See applicable section of the specifications.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
B. ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
D. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork.
E. APA/EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.04
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing in accordance with ACI 318 to conform to
the design and all applicable building code requirements to achieve concrete shape, line and dimension
as indicated on the construction documents.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties.
1.06 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
c. Certify lumber is harvested from Forest Stewardship Council Certified well managed forest.
C.
Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
c. Certified wood products.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 318.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.08
QUALIFICATIONS
03 10 00 - 1
MS0114
A. Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of
this work and licensed in the State of Florida.
1.09
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of formwork.
1.10
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture.
1.11
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this section with other sections of work, which require attachment of components to formwork.
B. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement,
request instructions from the Contracting Officer before proceeding.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site
3. Certified Wood Materials: Furnish wood materials certified in accordance with FSC Guidelines
2.02
WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: APA/EWA PS1, C Grade.
2.03
FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap-off type, galvanized metal, adjustable length, 1 inch back break dimension, free of
defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface.
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil, which will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture.
C. Corners: Chamfered type, 3/4 inch x 3/4 inch size.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with
Drawings.
3.02
EARTH FORMS
A. Earth forms are not permitted.
3.03
ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of
ACI 318.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by
construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during
stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
03 10 00 - 2
MS0114
E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members, which are not indicated on Drawings.
F. Provide chamfer strips on exposed external corners of concrete edge.
3.04
APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes, which are effected
by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to
placement of concrete.
3.05
INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work.
B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses. chases,
sleeves, bolts. anchors, and other inserts.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure
items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
3.06
FORM CLEANING
A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and
debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
D. During cold weather, remove ice from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts or water to clean out forms,
unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or
other means to remove foreign matter.
3.07
FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301 and ACI 117.
3.08
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork
design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 2 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not
patch formwork.
3.09
FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and
imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces
scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged.
Discard damaged forms.
END OF SECTION
03 10 00 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 03 20 00
PART 1
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast in place concrete.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
C. ANSI/ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.
D. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
E. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice.
F. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars.
G. ACI SP-66 – ACI Detailing Manual.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric,
bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices and anchor bolt layout.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a.
Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b.
Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a.
Products with recycled material content.
b.
Regional products.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with ACI SP-66.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
D. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
03 20 00 - 1
MS0612
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
2.02
REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel:
1. ASTM A615, 60-ksi yield grade
2. Deformed billet steel bars.
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 Plain Type; in flat sheets; plain finish: (Sidewalk Reinforcement)
C. Slab on Grade Reinforcement shall be:
1. #3 rebar at 12” o/c each way.
2.03
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gauge annealed type.
B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement
during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier
puncture. Brick or CMU may not be used for support except as permitted by references in paragraph 1.02
above.
2.04
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Conform to ACI 318 for concrete cover over reinforcement.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 41 00.
END OF SECTION
03 20 00 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 03 30 00
PART 1
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Slabs on grade, slabs on grade including integral footings, foundations, beams, columns, and elevated
floor and roof slabs.
B. Equipment pads and thrust blocks.
C. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
B.
ACI 304R – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete
C.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
D.
ACI 306R - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
E.
ACI 308R - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete.
F.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
G.
ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
H.
ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
I.
ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
J.
ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
K.
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
L.
ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
M.
ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric
Method.
N.
ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method.
O.
ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
P.
ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
Q.
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use
as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
R.
ASTM C685 - Standard Specification for Concrete Made By Volumetric Batching and Continuous
Mixing.
S.
ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous
Type).
T.
ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
03 30 00 - 1
MS0612
U.
ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or
Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
V.
ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
W.
ASTM D6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and
Asphalt Pavements
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, sealants, attachment accessories and admixtures.
C. Concrete mix design.
D. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.
E. Provide 12-inch long sample of expansion joint and control joint.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components, which are concealed from view.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
D. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
E. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
1.07
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form
accessories.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal or Type III - High Early Strength Portland type.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. Course aggregate shall be washed and shall consist of
crushed stone. Particle shape of coarse shall be generally cubicle in shape.
03 30 00 - 2
MS0612
C. Water: ACI 318; potable, Clean and not detrimental to concrete with no chloride ions.
2.02
ADMIXTURES
A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.
B. Chemical: ASTM C494, Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding or Type E - Water Reducing and
Accelerating Admixture.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618. Type C or Type F (Loss on ignition for type F shall not exceed 6%). If an approved
pozzolanic material is used, the weight of flyash used shall not exceed 10% determined by
dividing the weight of flyash by the weight of Portland cement.
D. Use of all admixtures must be approved by the Contracting Officer. The use of ‘plastisizers’ is
prohibited unless approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion or two component modified epoxy resin.
B. Vapor Barrier: ASTM E1745, Class “B” reinforced, multi-ply vapor retarder (Water vapor resistance 0.3
perms, Tensile strength 30.0 lbf/in, Puncture resistance 1700 grams). Install in strict compliance with
manufacturer’s written instructions including filed taping of seams and installation of pipe boots
penetrating through the slab.
C. Non-shrink Grout: ASTM C1107: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,
water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400
psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days.
2.04
JOINT TYPES, DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS (Identify Type on Structural Drawings)
A. Isolation Joint (IJ): Asphalt impregnated glass fiber filler Type A: ASTM D994, minimum 1/2" inch thick or
as indicated on drawings.
B. Exterior Construction Joint (ECJ): Integral galvanized steel, formed to tongue and groove profile, with
removable top strip exposing sealant trough, and ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge.
C. Exterior Tooled Contraction Joint (ETC): Tool formed joint located between isolation joints.
C. Interior Transverse Construction Joint (ITC): Integral galvanized steel, formed to tongue and groove
profile, with ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge with removable cap for sealant pocket.
D. Interior Longitudinal Contraction Joint (ILC): Joint that is saw cut into the surface of the concrete as soon
as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates from becoming dislodged by the cutting
process (usually 4-12 hours after the concrete hardens) and completed before drying shrinkage causes
cracking. Initial cut shall be 1/3 the thickness of the slab. After concrete has cured, joints shall be re-cut to
½” width x ½” depth. Provide foam backer rod and fill joint with sealant flush with top of slab.
E. All joint material shall match the thickness of the slab.
F. Sealant:
1. ASTM D6690: Hot applied synthetic rubber compound.
2. Cold applied two-part liquid neoprene.
2.05
CONCRETE MIX
A. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301. Mix concrete in accordance
with ACI 304R. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather ONLY when approved by Contracting Officer. Use of
admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
C. Accelerating admixtures shall not contain more than 0.1% calcium chloride.
D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Contracting Officer.
03 30 00 - 3
MS0612
E. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions.
B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately
placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials.
3.03
SCHEDULE - JOINT CONTROL
A. Floor Slab Perimeter and Exterior/Interior Isolation Joints: Joint filler Type A set 1/8 inch below floor slab
elevation.
B. Exterior/Interior Construction Joints: Set joints to line and grade.
C. Contraction Joints: Saw-cut joints to dimensions shown on the drawings.
D. See 2.04. above.
3.04
PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318.
B. Notify Contracting Officer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations.
C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers and joint devices are not disturbed
during concrete placement.
D. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 8 inches and seal watertight by
taping edges and ends.
E. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier
material; lap over damaged areas minimum 8 inches and seal watertight.
F. Install joint fillers, primer and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Install construction joint device in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to
required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
H. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover flush with floor finish.
I.
Deposit concrete at final position. Prevent segregation of mix.
J.
Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test
samples taken.
K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
L. Do not interrupt successive placements; do not permit cold joints to occur.
M. Saw cut joints within 12 hours of placing using 3/16-inch thick blade. Depth of cut shall not be less than
one-third (1/3) the thickness of the slab.
N. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
03 30 00 - 4
MS0612
3.05
CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHING
A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Monolithic Foundation and Slab-on-Grade: 6” thick, 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, formed to line and grade.
Steel trowel finishes surface of slab. Vertical surfaces shall be repaired/patched and finished no later
than one day after form removal. Wet and rub surface with a carborundum brick or other approved
abrasive, producing a satisfactory finish, smooth and uniform in color and texture. Seal all joints with an
approved joint sealer.
C. Beams, Columns, Elevated Floor and Roof Slabs Exposed to View: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete.
Patch/repair surfaces after form removal, wet and rub surface with a carborundum brick or other approved
abrasive after patching/repair, producing a satisfactory finish, smooth and uniform in color and texture.
D. Exposed Exterior Sidewalks, Aprons, Landings, Steps: 4” thick, 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, air entrained,
and non-slip broom finish.
E. Below Grade Footings, Single-Story Structures: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, form finish.
F. Below Grade Footings, Multi-Story Structures: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, form finish.
3.06
CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for
hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Cure concrete floor surfaces to requirements of Section 03 39 00.
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of Section
01 41 00.
B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to testing firm for review and approval prior to
commencement of work.
D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.
E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 40 or less cubic yards of each class of concrete
placed. Perform one compression test each at 7 days and 28 days, and one spare to be tested when
directed by Contracting Officer.
F. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. Slump shall be within 3”-5” range except
monolithic foundation and slab-on-grade shall be within 2”-4” range.
3.08
PATCHING
A. Allow Contracting Officer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.
B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Contracting Officer upon
discovery.
C. Patch imperfections as directed in accordance with ACI 301.
3.09
DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements. Concrete not conforming to specified strength in 28 days will be considered
defective.
03 30 00 - 5
MS0612
B. Defective concrete will be removed and replaced. Removal will be to the nearest construction joint in all
directions. Repair of defective concrete will be permitted only upon approval from the Contracting Officer.
C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
Contracting Officer for each individual area.
END OF SECTION
03 30 00 - 6
MS0612
SECTION 03 35 00:
PART 1
CONCRETE FINISHING
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings.
1.02
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface treatment with concrete hardener-sealer coating.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Manufacturer's Data and Installation Instructions: Indicate criteria for preparation and application.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1.
Materials Resources Certificates:
Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
Certify volatile organic compound content for each flooring system.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1.
Provide cost data for the following products:
Products with recycled material content.
Regional products.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1.
Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2.
Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1.
Interior Concrete, Wood, Bamboo, and Cork Floor Finishes: Maximum volatile organic compound
content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113, including sealers and stains.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: HARDENERS AND SEALERS
A. Hardener & Sealers: "Crystaloid" liquid hardener as manufactured by Concrete Service Materials Co.,
"Sealco 800" by Cormix Construction Chemicals, "Clear Bond" by Guardian Chemical Co., "Sonosil" by
Sonneborn Building Products.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
03 35 00 - 1
MS0612
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
CLEANING AND EXAMINATION
A. Upon completion of the interior of the building, including but not limited to, painting, acoustical ceilings,
electrical, etc., the contractor shall thoroughly clean the concrete floor slab using materials recommended by
the manufacturer of the hardener and sealer. Upon completion of the cleaning, verify that floor surfaces are
acceptable to receive the work of this Section.
3.02
FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT
A. Apply hardener and sealer (number of coats as required by manufacturer to be qualified as a "heavy-duty"
coating) in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions on interior floor surfaces.
END OF SECTION
03 35 00 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 03 39 00
PART 1
CONCRETE CURING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
B. ACI 302.1 – Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
C. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete.
D. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
E. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
F. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
G. ASTM D2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds, product characteristics, compatibility and limitations.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate criteria for preparation and application.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Maintain one copy of document on site.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compound Type A: ASTM C309, white pigmented Type 2, Class B, free of paraffin.
B. Absorptive Mats Type B: ASTM C171.
03 39 00 - 1
MS0612
C. Waterproof Paper Type C: ASTM C171, treated to prevent separation during handling and placing,
standard color.
D. Polyethelene Film Type D: ACTM C171, 6 mil. thick, clear.
E. Water: Potable and not detrimental to concrete.
2.02 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured.
3.02
EXECUTION - HORIZONTAL SURFACES
A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
B. Membrane Curing Compound at Exterior Exposed Concrete Only: Apply curing compound in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions in 2 coats with second coat at right angles to first.
C. All Floor Slabs shall be cured with Polyethylene Film (Optional for other horizontal surfaces): Spread
polyethylene film over floor slab areas, lapping edges and sides and sealing with pressure sensitive tape;
maintain in place for 7 days. Other wet-cure methods may be used if approved by the Contracting
Officer.
3.03
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
END OF SECTION
03 39 00 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 04 05 03:
PART 1
MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mortar for masonry.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute:
1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.
B. ASTM C91 – Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
C. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
D. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
E. ASTM C387/C387M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and
Concrete.
F. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry.
G. International Building Code (Latest Edition), Chapter 21 Masonry.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1.
Materials Resources Certificates:
Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
2.
Provide cost data for the following products:
Products with recycled material content.
Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Provide design mix, Proportion method (by volume), required environmental conditions, and Forrer admixture
limitations. Base volume on cubic foot measurements. See table 2103.7(1) 2000 International Building Code.
The use of the Forrer admixture requires a reduction in the volume of water. Include volume of water required
in gallons. Do not use hydrated lime or lime putty in the design mix.
C. Submit premix mortar manufacturer's certificate indicating conformance to ASTM C270 and installation
instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect products at site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. Maintain packaged materials
clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Cold Weather Construction.
04 05 03 - 1
MS0612
B. Hot Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Hot Weather Construction.
1.07
MIX TESTS
A. Test mortar in accordance with Section 01 41 00 and in accordance with ASTM C780.
B. Test mortar mix for compressive strength, consistency and slump. Provide 4 copies of test results to
Contracting Officer for review and approval prior to commencement of work. Mix design for all masonry units
exposed to the weather, standard CMU and face brick must include Forrer Dry Block II or Forrer Dry Brick
Admixture, in the proportions recommended by the manufacturer for the type of mortar specified. See 2.04
Mortar Mixes below. The use of Forrer Dry Block II or Dry Brick is not required in mix design for masonry units
not exposed to the weather.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)
of Project site.
2.02
MATERIALS:
A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type M or Type S.
B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.
C. Premix Mortar: ASTM C387, Type S, white cement, for glass unit masonry.
D. Admixtures: Forrer Dry Block or Dry Brick Admixture.
2.03
MORTAR MIXES
A. Mortar for Non-load Bearing Walls and Partitions and Glass Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S utilizing the
Proportion Method to achieve 1800 psi strength.
B. Mortar for load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type M, utilizing the Proportion Method to achieve
2500 psi strength.
2.04
MORTAR MIXING
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270.
Mortar shall be mixed between 3-5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer with the required amount of water to
provide the required consistency. Hand mixing is not permitted. See 1.03.B above.
B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
C. Mortars that have become stiffened may be re-tempered by adding the minimum amount of water to achieve
the required consistency.
D. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after mixing. Discard mortar beyond 2-1/2 hours.
2.05
TEST PANEL:
A. Provide 4’ x 4’ test panel to illustrate laying of masonry units including width and tooling of mortar joints. Do
not lay any masonry units until the Inspector has approved the test panel. The approved test panel shall be
the standard of quality for the project.
PART 3
EXECUTION
04 05 03 - 2
MS0612
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install mortar to requirements of the specific masonry Section.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM C780 and under provisions of Section
01 41 00.
B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each type of mortar to testing firm for review and approval prior to
commencement of work.
D. Tests of mortar, aggregates and admixtures may be performed to ensure conformance with specified
requirements.
E. Three undisturbed samples of molded mortar test cylinders will be taken as follows:
1. For every 1000 s.f. of gross wall area or fraction thereof.
END OF SECTION
04 05 03 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 04 20 00
PART 1
UNIT MASONRY
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete masonry units.
B. Brick masonry units.
C. Glass masonry units.
D. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
E. Parged masonry surfaces.
F. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
1.02
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. See applicable sections of the Specifications and the Drawings.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
B. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Brick.
C. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
D. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
E. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
F. ASTM C62 - Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
G. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
H. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
I.
ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale).
J.
ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
K. ASTM C744 - Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units.
L. ASTM D1056 – Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials – Sponge or Expanded Rubber
M. ASTM D2240 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness.
N. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
O. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures.
P. International Building Code (Latest Edition), Chapter 21 Masonry.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit one sample of each masonry unit to be used in the construction to illustrate type, texture, range,
etc. under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
04 20 00 - 1
MS0114
B. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01 33 00 that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
C. Submit product data and manufacturer's written installation instructions of all products used in the
construction under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
D. Submit copy of UL Design for fire-rated wall assemblies.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
1.05 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.06
OUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer / Subcontractor: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 3
years documented experience.
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the successful manufacture of many different styles and colors of
masonry units as specified in this Section with minimum of 3 years documented experience.
1.07
MOCK-UP
A. Prior to start of work, provide 4' x 4' mock-up of each type of exposed masonry unit except glass masonry
units. Provide 16” x 16” mock-up of glass units. Mock-up shall be constructed from approved CM units.
When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate the minimum standard for the work. Mock-up may not remain
as part of the work. Do not start masonry work until mock up has been approved.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products at site on pallets to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and
damage to the products by weather, water or breakage. Products shall be delivered and stored in original
plastic packages until ready for use. Damaged packages will be rejected. Products must be kept dry.
Delivery, storage and handling shall also be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.09
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Cold Weather Construction.
B. Hot Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Hot Weather Construction.
1.10
WARRANTY
A. The prime contractor and masonry subcontractor shall warrant the materials and installation for two years
from the date of acceptance by the Contracting Officer. Warranty shall include cleaning of efflorescence
from the Brick and Concrete Masonry Units, and repair of damaged BM / CMU due to efflorescence. Presealer and water repellant sealer shall be re-applied after repair or cleaning of the Brick / CMU.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
04 20 00 - 2
MS0114
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
2.02
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type II - Non-Moisture Controlled, normal weight.
B. Solid Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type II - Non-Moisture Controlled, normal weight.
C. Hollow Non-Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Type II - Non-Moisture Controlled, normal weight.
D. Fire Rated Concrete Masonry Units: CM units produced in accordance with the Standard for Concrete
Masonry Units, UL-618, are classified without further fire tests. Other CM Units are classified on the basis
of fire tests conducted in accordance with the Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials, UL-263. Supplier shall provide the appropriate Underwriters Laboratories Certificate indicating
the correct classification, in hours, for the unit to be incorporated into the construction. Construction of
fire-rated wall assemblies shall be in strict accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UL Design
(Number) listed on the drawing. A copy of the UL design is available form the Base Civil Engineer's
office, Engineering Flight.
E. Concrete Brick Units: ASTM C55, of same Grade, Type, and weight as block units.)
F. Shape & Size: Nominal modular size of 8-inch x 8 inch x l6 inch, 4-inch x 8-inch x l6- inch and as
indicated on the Drawings. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, lintels, and
bullnosed corners where indicated on the Drawings.
1. Back-up Wythe, interior partitions to receive additional finish, and below grade: Plain/standard CMU.
2. Exposed to view, above grade: Split Face, Split Face/Split Ribbed or Smooth or plain as indicated on
the drawings.
G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
BRICK MASONRY UNITS
A. Face Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBX, Grade MW; color as selected.
B. Common Brick: ASTM C62, Grade MW; solid units.
C. Size & Shape: Nominal modular size of 4 inches x 2-2/3 inches x 8 inches. Provide special units for 90degree corners, lintels, and bull-nosed corners as indicated on drawings.
1. Back-up Wythe, interior partitions to receive additional finish, and below grade: Common brick.
2. Exposed to view, above grade: Face Brick color and texture as per 2.03.G below.
3. Color shall match similar units used on base and must be approved by the Contracting Officer or his
representative.
D. Special Brick Shape: Shaped to profile indicated, surface texture on face, sides or ends as indicated on
the drawings.
E. Size and Shape of Giant Brick Units: As indicated on the drawings. Provide special units for 90-degree
corners, lintels, and bull-nosed corners as indicated on drawings.
F. Modular Brick Units: All brick units must be produced at one time for color/shade consistency.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Cunningham Brick Company, Lexington KY, Winestone Rockface
2. Cunningham Brick Company, Lexington KY, Winestone
G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
GLASS MASONRY UNITS:
A. Hollow Glass Units: Permanently sealed hollow units by heat fusing joint with joint key and factory coating
at units edges to assist mortar bond. Provide special corner units, curved units, end units etc., as required
04 20 00 - 3
MS0114
and indicated on the drawings. Nominal size 8 inches x 8 inches x 4 inches. Color and pattern as
indicated on the drawings.
B. Solid Glass Units: Factory coated edges to assist mortar bond. Provide special corner units, curved units,
end units etc., as required and indicated on the drawings. Nominal size 8 inches x 8 inches x 3 inches.
Color and pattern as indicated on the drawings.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Pittsburgh Corning Inc., 800 Presque Isle Road, Pittsburgh, PA 15239, phone1-800-9925769
2. Weck, Glashaus Inc., 450 Congress Parkway Suite “E”, Crystal Lake, IL, phone 1-815-356-8440
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.05
GROUT
A. Fine Grout: Ready mixed concrete fill at small spaces of CM units shall be 3000 psi concrete without
coarse aggregate. Use at spaces at least 0.75” wide horizontally but less than 3”. Spaces smaller than
0.75” shall be filled with mortar. Slump shall be between 8”-10”, about 8” for units with low water
absorption and about 10 “for units with high water absorption. Limit fly ash to 15% of the weight of
cement.
B. Coarse Grout: Ready mixed concrete fill at cell(s) of CM units shall be 3000 psi concrete with pea gravel
aggregate or smaller depending on job conditions. Use at spaces greater than 3 “ wide horizontally.
Slump shall be between 8”-10”, about 8” for units with low water absorption and about 10 “ for units with
high water absorption. Limit fly ash to 15% of the weight of cement.
2.06
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Joint Reinforcement: Truss type hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, high tensile cold-drawn steel
conforming to ASTM A82; manufactured by Dur-o- Wall or equal.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60-ksi-yield grade; deformed billet steel bars sized and located as shown
on the Drawings.
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A. Through-Wall Flashing Assembly:
1. 5 ounce copper-fabric type; full sheet copper, asphalt coated both sides, laminated under pressure
between two layers (one each side) of treated glass fabric.
2. Termination bar, 1" x 1/8" stainless steel bar with pre-punched holes, top of bar 16" above weeps (at
foundation or steel angle lintel). Secure bar to each stud wall with stainless steel self-tapping screws.
Apply sealant to screw heads.
3. Steel Lintel Drip Edge: 26 gauge stainless steel, width to equal horizontal leg of lintel with 3/4" vertical
leg up and down. Place on top of lintel and install copper-fabric flashing on top of drip edge.
B. Preformed Control Joints: Polyvinylchloride material, regular, wide flange or “tee” design as required.
Provide with corner and tee accessories, cement fused joints. Must meet ASTM D-2240.
C. Preformed Joint Filler: Neoprene filler strip used at veneer control joints. Must meet ASTM D-1056, Class
RE41 or 2A1.
D. Veneer Wall Ties, Studwall Backup: 3/4" x 5" x 12 gauge hot galvanized steel screwed to studs with hot
galvanized 3/16" wire ties. (Dur-O-Wal #D/A 207 & D/A 703 or 750 trapezoid wire ties or equal)
E. Building Paper: No. 15 or 30 asphalt saturated felt as indicated on the drawings.
F. Nailing Strips: Softwood, preservative treated for moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry
joints.
G. Veneer Wall Ties, Masonry Backup: Rectangular adjustable wall ties, hot dipped galvanized 3/16” wire,
double pintel and double eye rod, at 16” o.c. vertically and 24” o.c. horizontally. Maximum vertical
adjustment 1.25”. (Dur-O-Eye D/A 3700 or approved equal)
04 20 00 - 4
MS0114
H. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement, Single Wythe: Hot dipped galvanized deformed bars, 3/16” side rods with
#9 truss rod bracing, @ 16” o.c. vertically. Stagger with corrugated metal ties.
I.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement, Glass Masonry Units: Hot dipped galvanized deformed bars, 9 gauge
side rods @ 1.625-1.75” o.c. to suite GMU, @ 16” o.c. 9 gauge ladder type bracing @ 8” o.c.
J.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement, Double Wythe: Hot dipped galvanized deformed bars, 3/16” side rods
with 3/16” truss rod bracing, hot dipped galvanized 3/16” welded double eye rod at and double pintel @
16” o.c. vertically.
K. Expansion strips, Glass Masonry Units: Dense glass fiber7/16 inch x 4-inch nominal size.
L. Panel Anchors, Glass Masonry Units: Steel strips, 20 gauge x 1-3/4 inch wide, punched with three
rows of elongated holes, pattern staggered, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to 1.25 ounce per square
foot.
M. Perimeter channel, Glass Masonry Units:
Extruded aluminum, channel profile, size as required to fit
GM unit, one piece per length installed (no joints/splices), anodized to match color as indicated on the
drawings.
N. Glass Masonry Units Grid System: Extruded anodized aluminum grid block system to accept Glass
Masonry Units. Manufacturer, Innovative Building Products Inc., phone 1-800-923-2263.
O. Z Bar Wall Ties: 0.25” thickness x length required @ 16” o.c., galvanized steel wire with moisture drip.
P. Weep Holes-Wicks: Cotton rope, 0.375” diameter x 7” in length at 16” o.c. horizontally at veneer
applications. On single wythe walls, install weep holes in center of each cell of CM units.
Q. Rigid Steel Partition Anchors: 0.25” thick x 1.25” (w) x length required @ 16” o.c.vertically.
R. Dovetail Anchors and Slots: Dovetail slot with dovetail anchors (corrugated ties, triangular wire-ties, and
stone anchors) as required to secure masonry to structure.
S. Mortar Net: High density polyethylene or nylon strands woven into a minimum 90% open mesh, installed
on top of through-wall flashing at the inside of the cavity. Thickness of materials shall match the depth of
the cavity. Material must not react with common building materials (PVC, polystyrene, polyethylene,
copper, lead, asphalt, etc. Must be a minimum of 16" above the top of the flashing and designed to
last the life of the building.
T. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, as recommend by masonry manufacturer for masonry to be painted, not
harmful to masonry work or adjacent material.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized a located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing condition.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors and accessories supplied in this section and other
sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure
provides permanent bracing
3.03
COURSING
04 20 00 - 5
MS0114
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.
C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and on mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
Joints shall be struck flush and tooled concave.
3.04
PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints uniformly jointed with other work.
B. Lay first course of hollow masonry units with full mortar bedding. Lay subsequent units with face shell
bedding on head and bed joints.
C. Buttering corners of joint or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
E. Interlock intersections and external corners.
F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made,
remove mortar and replace.
G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges.
Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
H. Protect all CMU, the air space on veneer construction, and the air space in cavity wall construction, from
water intrusion during construction by covering with plastic sheeting. CMU must be kept dry at all times.
I.
Glass Masonry Units: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
J.
It is extremely important that the air space between the back of the unit and sheathing be kept free
of mortar to allow for drainage of water and free air circulation. The contractor must use
moveable wood strips or other methods approved by the Contracting Officer, to prevent mortar
accumulation within the air space.
3.05
WEEPS AND MORTAR NET
A. Install weep hole-wicks as per 2.06.P. horizontally above through-wall flashing at first course above grade
and above shelf angles to allow for drainage and air circulation. Extend wick to the full depth of the air
space and under mortar net. Weeps at cored units shall be installed at the center of each cell to allow
drainage of water and air circulation within the masonry unit. Leave approximately 1” of rope extending
beyond the exterior face of the wall. Upon completion of all masonry work and prior to sealing the
masonry, carefully remove wick from the wall
B. Install mortar net above flashing and shelf angles as per manufacturer’s written instructions and
paragraph 2.07.
3.06
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches o.c. vertically.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings.
Extend minimum 16 inches each aide of opening.
C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.
D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings.
E. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with steel partition anchors 16 inches o.c.
alternating courses with horizontal reinforcement.
F. Install vertical wall reinforcement in accordance with the drawings.
3.07
LINTELS
A. Install lintels as scheduled on Drawings.
04 20 00 - 6
MS0114
B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where precast concrete lintels are not scheduled.
C. Use single piece reinforcing bars only.
D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned
position.
E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. Rod grout to insure full and complete filling
of each cell, free of voids.
F. Allow masonry lintel to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.
G. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.
3.08
GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Reinforce bond beam as indicated on the drawings. If not indicated on the drawings, provide a minimum
of 2, No. 5 bars, and 1 inch from bottom web.
B. Lap rebar splices a minimum 24”.
C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned
position.
D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. Rod grout to insure full and complete filling
of each cell, free of voids.
E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cells with grout for a minimum 16 inches either side of opening.
F. Maximum height of CMU wall(s) prior to grouting cells is 4’-8”. Grout cells in accordance with the
drawings. After grout has been placed, continue CMU walls in 4’-8” increments until wall reaches full
height.
3.09
CONTROL JOINTS (Brick and CMU only)
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints. Provide corrugated metal ties at 8”
o/c (vertically) at each portion of wall at each side of control joint.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner-joints in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. In lieu of preformed control joints, contractor may field construct control joints by providing ½” clear space
free of mortar between ends of masonry units. Provide backer rod and sealant.
D. Provide control joints:
1. Location and size of control joint as indicated on the drawings. If not shown on the drawings, see E.
below.
2. Where masonry meets dissimilar construction materials and remains in the same plane.
3. Where control or expansion joints occur in the structure.
E. Maximum control joint spacing measured horizontally:
1. 20-feet in either direction for walls up to 10 feet high.
2. 28-feet in either direction for walls 10 feet plus-14 feet in height.
3. 36-feet in either direction for walls 14 feet plus-18 feet in height.
4. Placement of the above shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer or his designated Civil
Engineering representative.
3.10
BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build in metal door and glazed frames, anchor bolts, plates and other items
furnished by other Sections.
B. Build in items plumb and level.
04 20 00 - 7
MS0114
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout.
3.11
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch.
B. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more.
C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more.
D. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in 30 feet.
E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.
3.12
CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for pipes, conduit, cleaves and other items as may be required.
B. Obtain Contracting Officer for approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where
appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.13
CLEANING
A. Cleaning shall be in strict accordance with each manufacturer’s written instructions. Using cleaning
solution recommended by manufacturer. Provide two copies of each to Contracting Officer prior to
commencement of cleaning. If the manufacturer’s instructions conflict with the following procedure, notify
Contracting Officer immediately.
B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears.
C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.14
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation without damaging completed work; provide protective boards at exposed
external corners, which may be damaged by construction activities.
3.15
FINISH
A. See section 09 90 00 PAINTING.
END OF SECTION
04 20 00 - 8
SECTION 07 21 20: SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM (SPF) INSULATION
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sprayed polyurethane foam (SPF) insulation.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AIHA Z88.6 – Respiratory Protection - Respirator Use-Physical Qualifications for Personnel
B. ASTM C1029 – Standard Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation
C. ASTM C518 – Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter
Apparatus
D. ASTM D1622 – D Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics
E. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
F. ANSI/ISEA Z87.1 – Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data. Submit product data including material description, physical properties,
recommended storage conditions, Material Safety Data Sheets, and shelf life expiration date.
B. Submit certificates under provisions of Section 01 33 00 indicating qualifications of manufacturer and
qualifications of applicator.
C. Submit manufacturer's written installation instructions of all products used in the construction under
provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1. Polyurethane foam: Submit manufacturer's complete application instructions and details, and to
include storage, handling, and warnings or precautions on flammability and toxicity. Include
manufacturer's written recommendations for primers and for surface preparation of wood metals,
concrete, and other materials and surface substrates over which sprayed polyurethane foam system
will be applied.
2. Surface preparation: Submit manufacturer's complete application instructions and details, and to
include storage, handling, and warnings or precautions on flammability and toxicity. Include
manufacturer's written recommendations for surface preparation of wood metals, concrete, and other
materials and surface substrates over which sprayed polyurethane foam system will be applied.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Manufacturer: Sprayed polyurethane foam products manufacturer shall have a minimum
of 10 years’ experience in the manufacture of polyurethane foam products.
1. Manufacturer's Technical Representative: Manufacturer's technical representative shall have a
minimum of 10 years’ experience with sprayed polyurethane insulation systems products and
installations and be thoroughly familiar with the products to be installed, installation requirements and
practices, quality control of the installation, and with any special considerations in the geographical
area and climate where construction will take place. The representative shall be available to perform
field inspections and attend meetings as needed.
B. Qualification of Applicator: The insulation system applicator shall have prior manufacturer training in the
application of sprayed polyurethane foam materials. Applicator shall be certified and approved by the
foam manufacturer to apply the specified materials and provide the specified manufacturer warranty.
Applicator shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in application of the specified materials and
minimum of 10 years’ experience in the application of sprayed polyurethane foam insulation systems.
Mechanics applying the foam materials shall have minimum 3 years prior experience in handling and
spraying the type of materials specified and spray equipment must be operated by or under the direct fulltime supervision of manufacturer-trained personnel. The applicator shall supply the names, locations and
client contact information of 5 projects of similar size and scope that the applicator has constructed using
the manufacturer's insulation products submitted for this project within the previous three years.
07 21 20 – 1
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver and store materials in sufficient quantity to allow for uninterrupted flow of work.
Materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in their original unopened packages, clearly marked with the
manufacturer's name, brand name, description of contents, and shelf life of containerized materials.
B. Storage: Materials shall be stored in clean, dry areas, away from excessive heat, sparks, and open flame.
Storage area shall be ventilated to prevent build-up of flammable gases. Maintain temperatures in the
storage area below the materials' flash point and within limits recommended by the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
C. Handling: Handle materials and containers during application work safely and in accordance with
manufacturer recommendations. Store liquids in airtight containers and keep containers closed except
when removing materials. Do not use equipment or containers containing remains of dissimilar materials.
Do not expose foam component containers to direct sunlight for periods of time sufficient to cause
contents to exceed 80 degrees F. Mark and remove from job site materials which have been exposed to
moisture or that exceed shelf life limits. Not more than half the shelf life shall have expired when
materials are applied.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam: Relative humidity shall be within limits recommended by the sprayed
polyurethane foam manufacturer's printed instructions. Determine the dewpoint at the jobsite prior to and
upon completion of each work day unless variable weather conditions require more frequent monitoring.
The wet bulb and dry bulb temperatures during application of sprayed polyurethane foam shall be within
the ranges recommended by the sprayed polyurethane foam manufacturer.
1.07
CONTRACTOR'S FOAM SPRAY EQUIPMENT
A. Applicator: Use an airless foam spray gun of the mechanical, self-cleaning type that does not require a
flushing solvent during the spray operation.
B. Equipment Calibration: Fully calibrate the foam metering equipment to monitor each liquid component to
within 2 percent of the foam material manufacturer's required metering ratio.
C. Moisture Protection: Protect the surfaces of component supply containers or tanks used to feed the foam
metering equipment from moisture.
D. Compressed Air: Supply compressed air in contact with foam components during mixing or atomization
through moisture traps that are continuously bled.
E. Dispense Excess Materials: Do not deposit materials used for cleaning of equipment or materials
dispensed for calibration purposes and establishment of spray gun pattern on the surfaces to be sprayed.
Dispense such materials into scrap containers or onto plastic film, or cardboard, and dispose of in
compliance with safety requirements and jobsite regulations.
1.08
SPECIAL SAFETY PROVISIONS
A. During application, the following shall be required unless in conflict with the manufacturer's
recommendations or requirements of a recognized legal authority, in which case, the manufacturer's
recommendations or the legal authority's requirements take precedence:
B. Special Equipment
1. Air Masks: Wear fresh air supply masks when applying foam or when handling hazardous liquid
materials. Respiratory protective devices shall be as recommended by AIHA Z88.6. Instruct
personnel required to use respiratory protective devices in the use of the devices. Maintain such
equipment and inspect regularly.
2. Eye and Face Masks: Use eye and face protection during materials application. Eye and face
protective equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ISEA Z87.1.
3. Clothing and Gloves: Wear protective clothing and gloves during materials application. Skin areas
not covered by clothing shall be protected by protective creams.
07 21 20 – 2
C. Handling Precautions:
1. Venting of Material Containers: Partially unscrew material container and drum caps to gradually vent
the containers prior to opening. Do not inhale vapors. Decontaminate empty component containers
by filling with water and allowing to stand for 48 hours with bung caps removed. Under no
circumstances seal, stop, or close the containers which have been emptied of the foam component.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM
A. Urethane foam shall be standard product of the manufacturer, and containers shall be factory marked
with the manufacturer's name or trademark. The foam material shall be of a formulation suitable for the
environmental and climatic conditions in which foam will be applied. Foam shall be closed-cell
polyurethane meeting the requirements of ASTM C1029, Type II, with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84. Urethane foam shall meet the
following requirements:
Properties
Density (Sprayed in Place)
K-Factor (aged)
R-Value
PART 3
Properties in Inch-Pound Units
ASTM Test
Value
ASTM D1622
1.5 (minimum)
ASTM C518
Units
lb./ft3
0.15 (maximum)
BTU per SF/hr;
degrees F per inch
6.2 (minimum)
Deg F*hr*SF/
BTU*inch
at 75 degrees F
EXECUTION
3.01
SPRAY FOAM APPLICATION
A. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not apply insulation until COMM wiring, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive
insulation are masked.
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to
prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Spray Foam Application: Apply spray foam application to envelop the area from the top of the wall, up the
underside of the roof to totally seal the attic from the outside environment as indicated on the drawings.
3.02
PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
A. Protect the building contents, piping, communication wiring, equipment, and other surfaces adjacent to
the work from overspray from foam materials. Use protective shields or barriers to prevent uncontrolled
overspray. Any surfaces damaged by foam system products shall be restored or replaced to the
satisfaction of the Government at no additional expense to the Government.
B. Masking: Provide masking protection to protect surfaces immediately adjacent to foam terminations at
time of application.
3.03
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Material Handling: Handle materials and containers during application work safely and in accordance with
recommendations of the manufacturer. Store liquids in airtight containers and keep containers closed
except when removing materials. Do not use equipment or containers containing remains of dissimilar
materials or products.
B. Fire and Explosion Hazards: Prohibit open flames, sparks, welding, and smoking in the application area.
Provide and maintain a fire extinguisher of appropriate type and size in the application area.
07 21 20 – 3
3.04
SURFACE PREPARATION FOR FOAM APPLICATION
A. Surfaces that are to be primed or receive spray foam application shall be dry; completely cured; free of
grease, oils, dirt and other foreign matter or contaminants which will interfere with total adhesion of
polyurethane foam. Prior to foam application, fill or otherwise seal openings where foam spray may
damage or contaminate interior or exterior items or surfaces.
3.05
SPRAY FOAM APPLICATION
A. Spray Foam: Apply foam to provide a minimum finished thickness of 3 inches in at least two spray
passes. Apply each spray pass at right angles to the previous pass to the extent practicable. Each pass,
except for filleting or tapering as required at terminations, shall be between 1 inch and 2 inch in thickness.
Check foam thickness during application by probing depth with probe wire. Adjust application procedures
as necessary to develop required foam thickness.
B. Finish Removal: Remove foam that is not bonded, of poor cell structure, wet, or otherwise does not meet
the material quality specifications.
C. Spray Foam Clean Up: Remove overspray masking materials and coverings upon completion of the spray
foam application. Remove foam overspray found on adjacent surfaces not scheduled to application of the
protective coating.
3.06
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Construction Monitoring: During progress of the roof work, Contractor shall make visual inspections as
necessary to insure compliance with specified parameters. Additionally, verify the following:
1. Protection measures are in place.
2. Equipment is in working order. Metering devices are accurate.
3. Materials are not installed in adverse weather.
4. Surfaces are cleaned and substrates are in acceptable condition prior to application of materials.
5. Materials comply with specified requirements.
6. All materials are properly stored, handled and protected from moisture or other damages.
3.07
CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES
A. Correction of deficiencies shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer at no additional cost to the
Government.
3.08
CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL
A. All waste material, material containers, and debris shall be cleaned up daily and placed in appropriate
trash containers. At completion of the work all waste material, debris, and containers shall be removed
from the job site and disposed of as required by local regulations.
END OF SECTION
07 21 20 – 4
MS0114
SECTION 08 33 23
PART 1
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 653
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process
B. ASTM E 84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
C. ASHRAE
Handbook, Fundamentals I-P Edition
D. NEMA ICS 2
Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not
More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
E. NEMA ICS 6
Enclosures
F. NEMA MG 1
Motors and Generators
G. NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
H. NFPA 80
Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A. Overhead rolling doors shall be spring counterbalanced, rolling type, with interlocking slats, complete with
guides, fastenings, hood, brackets, and operating mechanisms, and shall be designed for use on
openings as indicated. Fire doors shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories, Warnock Hersey, Factory
Mutual or other nationally recognized testing laboratory label for the rating listed on the drawings. Each
door shall be provided with a permanent label showing the manufacturer's name and address and the
model number of the door. Doors in excess of the labeled size shall be deemed oversize and shall be
provided with a certificate signed by an official of the company, certifying that the door and operator have
been designed to meet the specified requirements.
1. Wind Load Requirements: Doors and components shall be designed to withstand the minimum
design wind load of 40 psf. Doors shall be constructed to sustain a superimposed load, inward and
outward, equal to 1.2 times the minimum design wind load. The door shall support the superimposed
loads for a minimum period of 10 seconds without evidence of serious damage and shall be operable
after conclusion of the tests. Test data showing compliance with design windload requirements for the
door design tested in accordance with a uniform static load equal to 1-1/2 times the minimum design
windload, shall be provided. The uniform static load test specimen shall be supported using guides,
endlocks, and windlocks as required for project installation. Recovery shall be at least 3/4 of the
maximum deflection within 24 hours after the test load is removed.
2. Operational Cycle Life: All portions of the door and door operating mechanism that are subject to
movement, wear, or stress fatigue shall be designed to operate through a minimum of 50,000 cycles.
(One complete cycle of door operation will begin with the door in the closed position, move to the full
open position and return to the closed position.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
08 33 23 - 1
MS0114
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, test data, and summary of forces and
loads on the walls/jambs.
C. Shop Drawings: Drawings showing the location of each door including schedules.
Drawings shall include elevations of each door type, details and method of anchorage, details of
construction, location and installation of hardware, shape and thickness of materials, details of joints and
connections, and details of guides, power operators, controls, and other fittings. Door, guides, motors and
related components shall be from one manufacturer. Provide manufacturer's preprinted installation
instructions.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Four complete copies of operating instructions outlining the
step-by-step procedures required for motorized door and shutter operation. The instructions shall include
the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment
and their basic operating features. Four complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine
maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, troubleshooting guides, and simplified
diagrams for the equipment as installed. Also spare parts data for each different item of material and
equipment specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, source of supply, and a
list of the high mortality maintenance parts.
1.05
QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Manufacturer must have a minimum of three- (3) year’s experience in the design and fabrication of
overhead rolling doors.
B. Installer must be approved by the door manufacturer and have a minimum of three years verifiable
experience in the installation of overhead rolling doors.
1.06
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Doors shall be delivered to the jobsite wrapped in a protective covering with the brands and names clearly
marked thereon. Doors shall be stored in a dry location that is adequately ventilated and free from dirt
and dust, water, and other contaminants, and in a manner that permits easy access for inspection and
handling.
1.07
WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a 1-year period shall
be provided.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
OVERHEAD ROLLING DOORS
A. Doors shall be surface-mounted type with guides at jambs set back a sufficient distance to clear the
opening. Exterior doors shall be mounted as indicated, on interior side of walls.
1. Curtains: The curtains shall roll up on a barrel supported at the head of opening on brackets, and
shall be balanced by helical springs. Galvanized steel slats for doors less than 15 feet wide shall be
minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0269 inches (22 gauge). Slats for fire doors over 12 feet wide and
less than 20 feet wide shall be not less than 20 gauge steel.
08 33 23 - 2
MS0114
a. Insulated Curtains: The slat system shall supply a minimum R-value of 7 when calculated in
accordance with ASHRAE. Slats shall be of the flat type as standard with the manufacturer. Slats
shall consist of a urethane core not less than 11/16 inches thick, completely enclosed within metal
facings. Exterior face of slats shall be gauge as specified for curtains. Interior face shall be not
lighter than 24 gauge. Insulation shall have a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a
smoke development factor of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Endlocks and Windlocks: The ends of each alternate slat for interior doors shall have malleable
endlocks of manufacturer's stock design. Endlocks shall be provided in accordance with
manufacturer's listing on fire doors when required by test results performed by the code-listing
agency. In addition to endlocks, exterior doors shall have the manufacturer's standard windlocks as
required to withstand the wind load. Windlocks shall prevent the curtain from leaving guides because
of deflection from specified wind pressure.
3. Bottom Bar: The curtain shall have a standard bottom bar consisting of two hot-dip galvanized steel
angles for steel doors. A sensing edge shall be attached to the bottom bar of doors that are
electric-power operated.
4. Guides: Guides shall be steel structural shapes or formed steel shapes, of a size and depth to
provide proper clearance for operation and resistance under the design windload. Guides shall be
attached to adjoining construction with fasteners recommended by the manufacturer. Spacing of
fasteners shall be as required to meet the minimum design windload.
5. Barrel: The barrel shall be steel pipe or commercial welded steel tubing of proper diameter for the
size of curtain. Deflection shall not exceed 0.03 inch per foot of span. Ends of the barrel shall be
closed with cast-iron or steel plugs, machined to fit the pipe.
6. Springs: Oil tempered helical steel counter-balance torsion springs shall be installed within the barrel
and shall be capable of producing sufficient torque to assure easy operation of the door curtain.
Access shall be provided for spring tension adjustment from outside of the bracket without removing
the hood.
7. Brackets: Brackets shall be of steel plates to close the ends of the roller-shaft housing, and to provide
mounting surfaces for the hood. An operation bracket hub and shaft plugs shall have sealed
prelubricated ball bearings.
8. Hoods: Hoods shall be steel, with minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0209 (24 gauge), formed to fit
contour of the end brackets, and shall be reinforced with steel rods, rolled beads, or flanges at top and
bottom edges. Multiple segment and single piece hoods shall be provided with support brackets of
the manufacturer's standard design as required for adequate support.
9. Weatherstripping: Exterior doors shall be fully weatherstripped. A compressible and replaceable
weather seal shall be attached to the bottom bar. Weather seal at door guides shall be continuous
vinyl or neoprene, bulb or leaf type, or shall be nylon-brush type. A weather baffle shall be provided at
the lintel or inside the hood. Weatherstripping shall be easily replaced without special tools.
10. Operation: Doors shall be operated by the following:
a. Electric Power Operator with Auxiliary Chain Hoist Operation: Electric power operators shall be
heavy-duty industrial type. The unit shall operate the door through the operational cycle life
specified. The electric power operator shall be complete with electric motor, auxiliary operation,
necessary means of reduction, brake, mounting brackets, push button controls, limit switches,
magnetic reversing starter, and all other accessories necessary to operate components specified
in other paragraphs of this section. The operator shall be so designed that the motor may be
removed without disturbing the limit-switches settings and without affecting the emergency chain
operator. Doors shall be provided with an auxiliary operator for immediate emergency manual
operation of the door in case of electrical failure. The emergency manual operating mechanism
shall be so arranged that it may be operated from the floor without affecting the settings of the
limit switches. A mechanical device shall be included that will disconnect the motor from the drive
operating mechanism when the auxiliary operator is used. Where control voltages differ from
motor voltage, a control voltage transformer shall be provided in and as part of the electric power
operator system. Control voltage shall not exceed 120 volts.
08 33 23 - 3
MS0114
(1).
Motors: Drive motors shall conform to NEMA MG 1, shall be high-starting torque, reversible
type, and shall be of sufficient wattage horsepower and torque output to move the door in
either direction from any position at a speed range of 6 to 8 inches per second without
exceeding the rated capacity. Motors shall be suitable for operation on 120 volts, 60 hertz,
single phase current and shall be suitable for across-the-line starting. Contractor shall
verify voltage and phase requirements with electrical drawings prior to providing submittals
for review. Motors shall be designed to operate at full capacity over a supply voltage
variation of plus or minus 10 percent of the motor voltage rating. Motors shall be provided
with overload protection.
(2).
Controls: Control equipment shall conform to NEMA ICS 2. Enclosures shall conform to
NEMA ICS 6, Type 1. Type 7 or 9 shall be used in hazardous locations, in accordance with
NFPA 70, Articles 501, 502, 503 and 504, Section 50. Each control station shall be of the
three position button or switch type, marked "OPEN," "CLOSE," and "STOP." The "OPEN"
and "STOP" controls shall be of the momentary contact type with seal-in contact. The
"CLOSE" control shall be of the momentary contact type. When the door is in motion and
the "STOP" control is pressed, the door shall stop instantly and remain in the stop position;
from the stop position, the door shall be operable in either direction by the "OPEN" or
"CLOSE" controls. Controls shall be of the full-guarded type to prevent accidental
operation. Readily adjustable limit switches shall be provided to automatically stop the
doors at their fully open and closed positions.
(3).
Sensing Edge Device: The bottom edge of electric power operated doors shall have an
electric sensing edge that will immediately reverse the door movement upon contact with an
obstruction and cause the door to return to its full open position. The sensing edge shall not
substitute for a limit switch. Exterior doors shall be provided with a combination
compressible weather seal and sensing edge.
(4).
Electrical Work: Conduit and wiring necessary for proper operation shall be provided
Division 16. Flexible connections between doors and fixed supports shall be made with
extra flexible type SJO cable, except in hazardous locations where wiring shall conform to
NFPA 70, Article 501, 502, 503, or 504 as appropriate. The cable shall have a
spring-loaded automatic take up reel or a coil cord equivalent device.
11. Locking:
a. Manual chain hoist shall have chain keeper lock suitable for padlocking by others.
b. Locking for motor operated doors shall consist of self-locking gearing and an interior mounted
slide lock with electrical interlock.
12. Finish: Steel slats and hoods shall be hot-dipped galvanized G90 in accordance with ASTM A 653,
and shall be treated for paint adhesion and shall receive a baked on prime coat and a field applied
finish coat. The paint system shall withstand a minimum of 1500 hours without blistering, bubbling, or
rust. Surfaces other than slats, hood, and surfaces to be joined or tightly fitted shall be cleaned and
treated to assure maximum paint adherence and shall be given a factory dip or spray coat of rust
inhibitive metallic oxide or synthetic resin primer, including bonderizing with a field applied finish coat.
Finish color to be selected from manufacturer's custom powder-coat colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Doors shall be installed in accordance with approved detail drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
Anchors and inserts for guides, brackets, motors, switches, hardware, and other accessories shall be
accurately located. Upon completion, doors shall be free from warp, twist, or distortion. Doors shall be
lubricated, properly adjusted, and demonstrated to operate freely. Fire doors shall be installed in
conformance with the requirements of NFPA 80 and the manufacturer's instructions.
3.02
TESTS
08 33 23 - 4
MS0114
A. The fire doors shall be drop tested in accordance with NFPA 80 to show proper operation and full
automatic closure and shall be reset in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. A written record
of initial test shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.
END OF SECTION
08 33 23 - 5
MS0612
SECTION 09 21 16:
PART 1
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Gypsum board.
B. Taped and sanded joint treatment.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM C1396 – Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.
B. ASTM C475 – Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
C. ASTM A1011 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High
Strength, Low Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra High Strength.
D. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
E. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached
Gypsum Panel Products.
F. ASTM C1002 – Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
G. GA-214 – Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish
H. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
I.
Gypsum Construction Handbook, published by United States Gypsum Board Co.
J.
South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with 3 years documented experience, and
approved by manufacturer.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
09 21 16 - 1
MS0612
A. Submit product data, including but not limited to, manufacturer's installation instructions, metal accessories,
gypsum board, joint tape, screws, texturing material, drywall compound, etc., under provisions of Section 01
33 00.
B. Submit one sample of gypsum board panels, 2'x2', illustrating textured finish.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)
of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
2. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with
SCAQMD Rule 1168.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Domtar, Georgia-Pacific, Gold Bond, Temple-Inland, U.S. Gypsum Co.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible
length; ends square cut, tapered edges.
B. Moisture Resistant and Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; 5/8-inch thick, maximum permissible
length; ends square cut, tapered edges.
C. Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C1396; moisture resistant and fire resistant type; 1/2 inch thick, maximum
permissible length; ends square cut, book tongue and grooved edges; water repellent paper faces.
D. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping, corrosive-resistant screws as recommended by the gypsum board
manufacturer.
2.04
ACCESSORIES
A. Corner Beads, Edge Trim, Control Joints, Casing Beads, and Accessories: Metal.
B. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; GA 216; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.02
GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 214, GA 216, Gypsum Construction Handbook, and in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Butt all joints loosely with maximum joint of 1/8”.
Maximum joint at outlet box, switch box and other similar devices, 3/8”.
09 21 16 - 2
MS0612
B. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over
firm bearing.
C. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing.
Applies regardless of fire rating of wall.
D. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.
E. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.
F. Double Layer Applications: Use fire rated gypsum-backing board for first layer of fire rated partitions. Tape
and mud joints. Place second layer parallel to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.
G. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board
abuts dissimilar materials.
3.03
CONTROL JOINTS
A. Provide control joints at each side of door and window openings from the header to the top of the wall.
Attach control joint to double studs spaced 0.5” apart.
B. Provide control joints:
1. Where partitions or ceilings of dissimilar construction meet and remain in the same plane.
2. Wings of “L”, “U”, & “T” shaped ceiling areas are joined.
3. Where control or expansion joints occur in the base wall construction and/or structure.
C. Maximum control joint spacing:
1. Partitions, 30 feet maximum in either direction.
2. Interior Ceilings with perimeter relief, 50 feet maximum in either direction.
3. Interior Ceilings without perimeter relief, 30 feet maximum in either direction.
4. Exterior Ceilings, 30 feet maximum in either direction.
3.04
JOINT MATERIALS/FINISH
A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive final finish
coat. All walls will be textured with a minimum ‘orange peel’ texture unless otherwise noted. Provide 12” x
12” sample of texture coat on 5/8” gypsum board for review, approval and record. The approved sample will
serve as the standard of quality the contractor must achieve with the actual final finish. Minimum finish will
be Level 3 for textured walls and Level 5 for untextured walls.
B. Walls with indentations, visible joint lines, ripples, surface defects, etc. will not be accepted.
C. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
D. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.05
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
09 21 16 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 09 51 13
PART 1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Suspended metal grid-ceiling system and perimeter trim.
B. Acoustical panels.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
B. ASTM C636 – Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-in Panels.
C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
D. Green Seal:
1. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and/or ceiling panels with
5 years minimum experience.
B. Installer: Company with 3 years minimum documented experience, and approved by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit and indicate on shop drawings, grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or
ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system, and product data including
manufacturer's installation instructions, under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00. One 6” x 6” sample of ceiling tile and one 12”-24”
sample of ceiling grid, hanger wire, wall trim.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and
after installation.
09 51 13 - 1
MS0612
1.07
SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust-generating
activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.
1.08
EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide 2 cartons of extra panels upon completion and Government acceptance of work.
1.09
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)
of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Flat and Non-Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS-11.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Chicago Metallic Corporation, National Rolling Mill, Inc., Donn.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CEILING PANELS
A. Armstrong, Celotex, United States Gypsum.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
SUSPENSION SYSTEM – CEILING PANEL COMPONENTS
A. See Room Finish and Color Schedule. Provide products that are equal to and match as close as possible the
salient characteristics of the products specified. Match as close as possible, includes but is not limited to, type
of suspension system, color, ceiling panel size, thickness, surface texture, acoustical properties, etc.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturer's installation instructions, including #8
galvanized steel hanger wire to rigidly secure the suspension system to the structure above, including integral
mechanical and electrical components with a maximum deflection not to exceed 1/360.
B. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
C. Supply and install hangers, clips, etc. for attachment to the building structural system.
09 51 13 - 2
MS0612
D. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit.
E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected
hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
F. Locate suspension system in room according to reflected ceiling plan.
G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed
deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner
or support components independently.
H. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
I.
Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter
corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions.
J.
Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function.
K. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to shortest room axis. Fit border neatly against
abutting surfaces.
L. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
M. Lay sound control insulation, 24" x 48" x 6" batts, on top of ceiling panels maintaining tight fit to adjacent
insulation batts. See drawings, Room Finish Schedule for location of sound control insulation.
3.03
TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
B. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum.
END OF SECTION
09 51 13 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 09 90 00
PART 1
PAINTING AND COATING
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Surface preparation
B. Surface finish schedule
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications.
B. ASTM D1653 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating Films
C. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
D. Green Seal:
1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.
2. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with three years
experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years experience approved
by product manufacturer.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements for finishes.
1.06
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each flooring system.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00. Paint and primers used shall be the highest
quality, top-of-the-line, professional coatings manufactured by each respective paint manufacturer.
B. Provide product data on all finishing products.
09 90 00 - 1
MS0612
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
D. Submit one sample 12” x 12” in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface
finishing product scheduled, for selection.
E. Submit manufacturer's preparation and application recommendations for each type of material to be painted
under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
D. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface
preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90
degrees F (32 degrees C), in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.09
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45
degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 Degrees C) for interiors, 50 Degrees F
(10 degrees C) for exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)
of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Flat and Non-Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS-11.
2. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC-03.
3. Interior Clear Wood Finishes, Floor Coatings, Stains, Primers, and Shellacs: Maximum volatile organic
compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113.
4. Interior Concrete, Wood, Bamboo, and Cork Floor Finishes: Maximum volatile organic compound content
in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113, including sealers and stains.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (PRIMER AND PAINT)
A. Devoe, Glidden, Benjamin Moore, Pittsburgh, Sherwin-Williams.
1. Paint and primers used shall be the highest quality, top-of-the-line, professional coatings manufactured by
each respective paint manufacturer.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
09 90 00 - 2
MS0612
2.03
CLEANER, PRE-SEALERS & WATER REPELLANT SEALER FOR ARCHITECTURAL EXPOSED
CONCRETE & INTEGRALLY COLORED DECORATIVE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. CMU Pre-Sealer: Pre-sealer used on all concrete and CMU surfaces to fill capillaries and large pores prior to
the application of the water repellant sealer. Pre-sealer must be manufactured by and compatible with the
water repellant sealer. Submit test data to substantiate conformance to ASTM D1653, and E96.
B. Water Repellant Sealer: Water based, VOC compliant, deep penetrating clear silane and/or siloxane blend to
protect horizontal and vertical surfaces. Manufacturer must have a minimum of 5 years experience in the
manufacturer of masonry sealer.
C. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent material.
2.04
MATERIALS
A. Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogenous coating.
B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically
indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
2.05
FINISHES
A. Refer to Room Finish and Color Schedule on drawings for colors.
B. All surfaces exposed to view shall be painted in accordance with the schedule at the end of this Section.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
B. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat and ready to receive paint. Correct minor defects and clean
surfaces which affect work of this Section.
C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse
with clean water and allow surface to dry.
E. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching
primer.
F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale,
salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a
solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow masonry to dry as per paint
manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Architectural Exposed Concrete Scheduled to Receive Pre-Sealer and Water Repellant Sealer: Remove dirt,
loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of
tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals
with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
H. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are
evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after
repairs.
09 90 00 - 3
MS0612
I.
Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make
touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. (Prime metal
items including shop primed items.)
J.
Mill Finish Aluminum: Clean as per paint manufacturer’s recommendations.
K. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal all surfaces, including top and bottom edges with primer.
L. Existing painted walls to receive new paint shall be repaired to “like new” condition prior to start of painting.
“Like new” means to remove all nails or other devices used for attaching objects to the wall, fill holes, sand
and make ready to receive prime and finish coats.
M. Beginning of painting means acceptance of surface and site conditions.
3.02
PROTECTION
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other
surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
3.03
APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into grain before set. Wipe excess
from surface.
H. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
I.
Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish with gloss varnish reduced 25
percent with mineral spirits.
3.04
FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical sections for schedule of color-coding and identification banding of
equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.
B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and
paint separately.
C. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,
brackets, collars, and supports, except where items are prefinished.
D. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally.
E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through
grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind
louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
09 90 00 - 4
MS0612
F. Paint exposed conduits and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing
equipment.
H. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with color schedule. Color band
and identify with flow arrows and names.
I.
Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
3.05
CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus
materials, and debris.
C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material, which may constitute a fire hazard and place in closed metal
containers and remove daily from site.
3.06
SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
(Includes, but is not limited to, the following and all conduits, disconnect switches, louvers, condensing units,
roof vents, exhaust fans, masonry, etc. visible when viewing the exterior of the building.)
A. Steel
1.
Organic Zinc Rich Urethane Primer (Primer)
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
Generic Type:
Solids By Volume:
Zinc Content:
Test Criteria:
Organic Zinc Rich Urethane Primer
63%
83% by weight.
Test Criteria
ASTM B 117
Salt Spray (Fog)
Test Duration
50,000 hours
(Scribed Panel)
ASTM G 85
Prohesion
15,000 Hours
ASTM D 4585
Humidity
ASTM 4541
Adhesion
ASTM G8
Cathodic Disbondment
Immersion Service
(Potable Water)
4,000 hours
Average of Three
Tests
30 Days Exposure
Proposed Product Test Results
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rusting:
Blistering:
Report PSI Adhesion
7 years – No Failure
Epoxy Intermediate Coat
1.
2.
3.
Generic Type:
Solids By Volume:
Test Criteria:
Test Criteria
ASTM B 117
Salt Spray (Fog)
Polyamide Epoxy
56%.
Test Duration
10,900 hours
(Scribed Panel)
09 90 00 - 5
Proposed Product Test Results
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
MS0612
ASTM G 85
Prohesion
15,000 Hours
ASTM D 4585
Humidity
4,000 hours
ASTM D 4060
Abrasion
CS-17 Wheel
1,000 Gram Load
1,000 Cycles
Average of Three
Tests
30 Days Exposure
ASTM 4541
Adhesion
ASTM G8
Cathodic Disbondment
Immersion Service
(Potable Water)
3.
8.04
1.
2.
3.
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rusting:
Blistering:
Report mg Loss / Average of three
tests
Report PSI
7 years – No Failure
Exterior Finish Coat
Generic Type:
Solids By Volume:
Test Criteria:
Fluoropolymer Polyurethane
60%.
Test Criteria
ASTM B 117
Salt Spray (Fog)
Test Duration
10,000 hours
(Scribed Panel)
ASTM D 4585
Humidity
3,000 hours
ASTM D 4060
Abrasion
CS-17 Wheel
1,000 Gram Load
1,000 Cycles
Average of Three
Tests
16,000 hours
ASTM 4541
Adhesion
ASTM D 4587
QUV Exposure
Cycle 4: 8 hours UV –
4 hours condensation
ASTM D 4587
QUV Exposure
Cycle 4: 8 hours UV –
4 hours condensation
ASTM D 4141
(EMMAQUA)
Exterior Exposure
ASTM D 4141
(EMMAQUA)
Exterior Exposure
ASTM D 522
Flexibility
ASTM 2794
Impact
ASTM D 503`1
Weatherometer
AAMA 2604-98
Proposed Product Test Results
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rusting:
Blistering:
Report mg Loss / Average of
three tests
Report PSI
Gloss Retention:
25,000 hours
Gloss Retention:
Color Change: DED FMCII
1,260MJ/m2
Exposure
Gloss Retention:
Color Change:
3,500MJ/m2
Exposure
Gloss Retention:
Color Change:
Method A
Conical Mandrel
Cracking:
% Elongation:
Average of Three
Trials
5,500 hours
Direct Impact:
% Gloss Retention:
Color Change: DED
5 Years Exposure
Report:
Color Retention:
Gloss Retention:
09 90 00 - 6
MS0612
Chalking:
Erosion:
B. Steel - Galvanized
1. Two coats Acrylic Latex, semi-gloss.
C. Aluminum Mill Finish
1. Prime coat as per paint manufacturer’s recommendation.
2. Two coats Acrylic Latex, semi-gloss.
D. Architectural Exposed Concrete
1. Upon completion of the cleaning, allow the concrete to dry as recommended by the manufacturer of the
sealer system. Verify that the surface is cleaned and ready to receive the pre-sealer. The area to receive
the sealer must be cleaned, etc. to the satisfaction of the installer and sealer system manufacturer and
allowed to dry. If not acceptable to the sealer manufacturer's representative, the area must be re-cleaned,
etc. Paint system manufacturer shall certify that the surface is acceptable to receive the sealer prior to the
application of the finish coats. Correction of any surface irregularities or imperfections will then be the
responsibility of the contractor applying the pre-sealer and finish coats. Installation shall be in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Upon completion of and curing of the pre-sealer, install sufficient number of coats of the sealer as per the
manufacturer’s written instructions. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the written instructions.
E. Concrete Masonry Units
1. Upon completion of the cleaning, allow the masonry to dry as recommended by the manufacturer of the
paint system. Verify that the surface is cleaned and ready to receive the primer-sealer. The area to
receive the primer-sealer must be cleaned, etc. to the satisfaction of the installer and paint system
manufacturer and allowed to dry. If not acceptable to the paint manufacturer's representative, the area
must be re-cleaned, etc. Paint system manufacturer shall certify that the surface is acceptable to receive
the primer-sealer prior to the application of the finish coats. Correction of any surface irregularities or
imperfections will be the responsibility of the contractor applying the primer sealer and the finish coats.
Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Upon completion of and curing of the primer-sealer, paint a minimum two coats Acrylic Latex (flat) and
additional coats as directed by the manufacturer’s written instructions. Installation shall be in strict
accordance with the written instructions.
F.
Existing Painted CMU or EIFS Surfaces:
1. Prepare surface and prime as per paint manufacturer recommendations.
2. Paint two coats Acrylic Latex, or as recommended by manufacturer, flat, on CMU surfaces.
3. Paint two coats 100% Acrylic, or as recommended by manufacturer, flat, on
EIFS surfaces.
G. Factory Finished Items:
1. Prepare surface as per paint manufacturer recommendations and paint two coats Acrylic Latex, semigloss or flat.
H. Miscellaneous Surfaces:
1. One coat primer as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Acrylic Latex, semi-gloss or flat.
3.07
SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES
A. Steel - Unprimed
1. One coat Latex primer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
B. Steel - Shop Primed
1. Touch-up with original primer or as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
09 90 00 - 7
MS0612
C. Steel - Galvanized
1. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
D. Aluminum Mill Finish
1. One coat as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin.
E. Plaster, Gypsum Board
1. One coat Latex wall primer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, eggshell.
F. Plywood, Wood (Painted)
1. One coat Latex Primer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
G. Plywood, Wood (Clear or Stained)
1. One coat alkyd based, non-masking, penetrating stain.
2. Two coats clear acrylic polyurethane, low luster.
H. Miscellaneous Surfaces
1. One coat primer as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
I.
Factory Finished Items
1. Prepare surface and paint two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
J.
Existing Painted Surfaces:
1. Prepare surface as per paint manufacturer recommendations.
2. Prime as required and paint two coats Acrylic Latex, flat or Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
3.08
SCHEDULE
A. As per Room Finish and Color Schedule.
END OF SECTION
09 90 00 - 8
MS0612
SECTION 10 44 00
PART 1
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Cabinets.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NFPA 10 – Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
B. UL 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers.
C. UL 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage details and
cabinet/extinguisher dimensions.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide units conforming to UL 711.
1.06
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 10 for requirements for extinguishers.
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
10 44 00 - 1
MS0612
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)
of Project site.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. J.L. Industries; Larsen's Manufacturing Co.; Potter-Roemer; Watrous.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
EXTINGUISHERS
A. Dry Chemical Type: UL 299, Cast steel tank, with pressure gage;
1. Class 4A-60BC with rechargeable metal heads.
2. Class 2A-10BC for use at dormitory or similar units with rechargeable metal heads.
2.04
EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Metal: Formed sheet steel, white epoxy finish primer; 18 gage thick base metal, size to accommodate
extinguisher.
B. Configuration: Semi-recessed type, sized to accommodate accessories.
C. Extinguisher cabinets recessed within fire-rated walls or partitions shall be fire-rated to match that of the wall
or partition.
D. Trim Type: Rolled edge construction, 2.5" return trim projection.
E. Door:
1. 18 gage thick reinforced for flatness and rigidity; flush pull to meet ADA code and projection
requirements, full glass, non-locking with friction catch or rolling ball latch.
2. Fire extinguishers used at exterior applications shall use doors, hinges, etc. of stainless steel and be
equipped with locks.
F. Door Glazing:
1. Glass, clear, 1/4 inch thick tempered.
2. Fire extinguishers used at exterior applications shall use break-away-acrylic-panel.
G. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet and as recommended by manufacturer.
2.05
FINISHES
A. Extinguisher: Steel, baked enamel to standard red color.
B. Cabinet Interior, Exterior Trim and Door: White baked enamel finish.
2.06
EXTERIOR CABINETS
A. Surface mounted injection molded ABS plastic with brass lock, removable or breakable cover, and labels.
Sized to accommodate required fire extinguisher.
2.07
FABRICATION
A. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles.
B. Pre-drill for anchors.
C. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon roller type catch.
D. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
E. Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing.
2.08
BRACKETS
10 44 00 - 2
MS0612
A. Fire extinguishers in mechanical rooms or similar spaces shall be bracket mounted.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify location of extinguishers in accordance with drawings.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, height above finish floor to conform to ADA code.
C. Secure rigidly in place.
D. Place extinguishers in cabinets.
E. Mounting height shall be 4’-0” to top of cabinets or extinguisher.
3.03
CLEANING
A. Clean glass, interior and exterior of cabinet and extinguisher.
END OF SECTION
10 44 00 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 00:
PART 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 21, 22, and 23 Sections, in addition to
Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.02
WORK SEQUENCE
A. During the construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Prime contractor.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable Building Code for the state of Florida.
B. Fire Protection: Conform to NFPA.
C. Plumbing: Conform to International Plumbing Code.
D. The contractor shall perform all demolition, installation, inspection and maintenance of air conditioning
equipment in accordance with the latest Environmental Protection Agency guidance, specifically Title IV of
the Clean Air Act, Amendments Section 608.
E. All personnel servicing air conditioning equipment shall be certified in refrigerant recovery and recycling by
a State of Florida authorized organization.
F. All equipment used in servicing air conditioning equipment shall be certified for refrigerant recovery and
recycling by a State of Florida authorized organization.
G. Any servicing of air conditioning equipment must recover, and if possible, recycle all refrigerant. The only
alternate to this is to recover and dispose of the refrigerant in accordance with the latest and most
restrictive guidance from the Environmental Protection Agency or the Florida Department of
Environmental Regulation.
1.04
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including
changes to Work specified in other Sections. Submit for approval before proceeding.
C. Where existing equipment (i.e. air handlers, chillers, water heaters, etc.) is to remain, the contractor shall
verify condition of that equipment prior to beginning work. If equipment does not work properly, contractor
shall notify government for that item to be fixed or problem to be noted prior to beginning work. If
contractor does not notify government of any problems it is assumed that all existing equipment to remain
is in perfect working order and will be returned in that condition. Contractor is responsible for protection of
existing equipment to remain, and any operation of equipment required while under construction.
D. When existing air handling equipment is to remain in service during construction the Contractor shall place
temporary construction filters at all return air grilles. These filters shall be removed when construction is
complete. The Contractor shall replace the filters at the unit for all existing and new air handlers after
construction is complete.
E. Project drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all required turns, elbows, transitions, etc. that may
be required due to existing conditions or work done by other trades. It is the contractors responsibility to
provide all such turns, elbows, transitions, etc. and coordinate with other trades as required to provide a
complete and operational system. This shall be done at no additional cost to the government.
F. All mechanical equipment shall be provided with concrete housekeeping pads.
G. All pumps shall be anchored in place.
23 05 00 – 1
MS0612
H. On all air handling and exhaust systems, the Contractor shall provide approved fixed ladder/platform for
maintenance and repair of new equipment installed.
1.05
GAS SERVICE
A. Where gas services are required it is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with local gas utility
(Okaloosa County Gas District). Any charges associate with gas services are the responsibility of the
contractor.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. All warranties shall begin on the day the government takes beneficial occupancy of the project unless
system is placed in operation in several phases at government’s request. When system is completed the
contractor shall submit letter requesting acceptance of that system. Warranty for that system shall begin
on the date it is accepted by the government.
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide operation and maintenance manuals and other info as required to be included in project O & M
Manuals per Section 01 70 00 of this specification. Manuals shall contain written instructions for each
system, shop drawings, as-builts, schematic drawings, catalog cuts (submittal information),
manufacturer’s instructions, warranties, and test and balance report as applicable for every section in this
division.
B. Manuals shall be available for review at the time of the final inspection.
1.08
TEST AND BALANCE/COMMISSIONING
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide the services of a third party, independent firm for Test and
Balance and Commissioning.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
23 05 00 – 2
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 01:
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
SECTION INCLUDES
Removal of designated mechanical items.
B.
Removal of designated construction.
C.
Disposal of materials. Storage of removed materials.
1.02
A.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
Submit work plan for outages and temporary services to areas that remain occupied (see paragraph
3.01E).
1.03
A.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to all applicable codes for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical
disconnection and re-connection.
B.
Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit.
C.
Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without approval by base fire department.
D.
Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.
1.04
A.
B.
PART 2
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Conduct demolition to minimize interference with any adjacent and occupied building areas.
Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Contracting Officer. Do not
resume operations until directed.
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
PREPARATION
Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.
B.
Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued
Owner occupancy.
C.
Protect existing materials and finishes which are not to be demolished.
D.
Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring.
E.
Maintain existing mechanical and plumbing systems to any occupied areas of the building. Where
disruption of systems feeding these areas can not be avoided, contractor shall minimize disruption to the
greatest extent possible. Contractor shall submit for approval a work plan that shows how he intends to
minimize disruption and the duration of any anticipated disruption. Contractor shall notify occupants 48
hours prior to any disruption of services. Work may be required to be done over a weekend. Where
duration of disruption exceeds 2 days (unless noted otherwise) the contractor shall provide temporary
services.
F. Where ductwork systems or air handling equipment is to remain in place during demolition and
construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene over openings to prevent
construction dust from entering. Contractor will be required to clean ductwork, air handlers and coils
where this has not been accomplished.
23 05 01 – 1
MS0612
G. Confirm with Contracting Officer’s Representative about disposition of any systems to be retained by the
Government.
3.02
A.
DEMOLITION
Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members and building
components to remain.
B.
Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury
materials on site.
C.
Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in clean condition.
D.
Where piping, wiring, ductwork and/or equipment are being removed passes through walls, floors, ceilings
or roofs, patch holes to match adjacent finishes. Patch holes in fire rated walls as required to maintain fire
rating.
E.
Where exposed mechanical items are being removed, finish surfaces behind item to match adjacent
surfaces.
F.
Where removal of mechanical items require demolition of existing building components to remain, make
repairs to match construction that was removed.
G.
Remove all controls and electrical associated with the removal of mechanical items unless they are shown
to remain or required for installation of new equipment. Removal shall be back to any existing panels or
devises that remain in operation.
H.
Remove all hangers, supports, and anchors associated with mechanical items being removed. Patch
surfaces to match adjacent finishes.
END OF SECTION
23 05 01 – 2
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 19:
GAGES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
SECTION INCLUDES
Pressure gages and Pressure gage taps.
B.
Thermometers and thermometer wells.
C.
Static pressure gages.
D.
Filter gages.
1.02
A.
REFERENCES
ASME B40.1 – Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.
A.
ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.
B.
ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.
C.
UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service.
D.
UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
SUBMITTALS
Section 01 33 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers data which indicates use, operating range, total range, accuracy,
and location for manufactured components.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps,
supports and test plugs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
PRESSURE GAGES
Gage: ASME B40.1, UL 393, UL 404 with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front
recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background.
1.
Case: Steel.
2.
Bourdon Tube: Brass.
3.
Dial Size: minimum 3-1/2 inch diameter.
4.
Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
5.
Scale: Both psi and kPa.
All gages shall be liquid filled on mechanical systems.
PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS
Needle Valve: Brass or Steel, 1/4 inch NPT for minimum 300 psi.
B.
Ball Valve: Brass, 1/8 inch NTP for 250 psi.
C.
Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch NPT connections.
D.
Siphon: Steel, Schedule 40 or Brass, 1/4 inch NPT angle or straight pattern.
23 05 19 – 1
MS0612
2.03
A.
STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
Thermometer: ASTM E1, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case
with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device.
1.
Size: 7 inch scale.
2.
Window: Clear glass.
3.
Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch NPT, 3 1/2 inch long.
4.
Accuracy: ASTM E77, 2 percent.
5.
Calibration: Both degrees F and degrees C.
2.04
A.
THERMOMETER SUPPORTS
Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and
with cap and chain.
B.
Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass
perforated stem.
2.05
A.
TEST PLUGS
Test Plug: 1/4 inch NPT or 1/2 inch NPT brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter
pressure or temperature probe with:
a.
Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F.
b.
Nordel core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F.
c.
Viton core for temperatures up to 400 degrees F.
2.06
A.
STATIC PRESSURE GAGES
Dial Gages: 3-1/2 inch diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on white
background, front recalibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.
B.
Inclined Manometer: Plastic with red liquid on white background with black figures, front recalibration
adjustment, 3 percent of full scale accuracy.
C.
Accessories: Static pressure tips with compression fittings for bulkhead mounting, 1/4 inch diameter
tubing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install one pressure gage per pump, with taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump;
pipe to gage.
C.
Install extensions on all gages, gage tappings, valves, thermometers, and test plug as required to allow
access without cutting back or removing insulation.
D.
Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide needle valve or ball valve to isolate each gage.
Install siphon on gages in steam systems. Extend nipples and siphons to allow clearance from
insulation.
E.
Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2
inches (64 mm) for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation.
F.
Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.
G.
In hydronic systems install test plug adjacent to controls system thermostats, transmitters, or sensors.
Coordinate with controls contractor.
H.
Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 10 feet downstream of mixing dampers, coils, or other
devices causing air turbulence.
23 05 19 – 2
MS0612
I.
Install static pressure gages to measure across filters and filter banks, (inlet to outlet). On multiple
banks, provide manifold and single gage.
J.
Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.
Select scale ranges where the operating points are about mid scale.
K.
Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level.
Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
L.
Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.
END OF SECTION
23 05 19 – 3
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 29: HANGARS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors.
B. Equipment bases, supports, and curbs.
C. Sleeves, seals, and chases.
D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13.
B. Supports for Ductwork: In conformance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and
Flexible.
C. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is
installed according to specified requirements.
D. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration
firestopping.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
G. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut
nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
H. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
I.
Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180
degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.
J.
Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe covering protective
saddles.
K. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non-conducting saddles in 90
degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness.
L. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
23 05 29 – 1
MS0612
2.02
HANGER RODS
A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
2.03
INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral
adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger
rods.
2.04
FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel.
B. Lead Flashing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead for waterproofing; one lb/sq ft sheet lead for soundproofing.
C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.05
SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with
steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated
fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
F. Stuffing or Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
G. Calk: Acrylic sealant.
H. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to
requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance
rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another,
with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.
2.06
FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for
continuous insulation wrapping.
B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
2.07
CHASES
A. PVC chases/conduit run underground or under slabs for the purpose of running refrigerant piping or other
mechanical services shall have wall thickness equal to schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated.
2.08
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers: Galvanized steel band iron or rolled angle and 3/8" (9 mm) rods.
B. Wall supports: Galvanized steel band iron or fabricated angle bracket.
2.09
EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant, 1-1/2 inch thick
insulation, factory installed wood nailer. Color to match color of roofing panels on metal roofs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
23 05 29 – 2
MS0612
3.01
INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
B. Provide inserts for suspended hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and side of reinforced concrete
beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface.
E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed
square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.
3.02
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Support horizontal piping as follows:
PIPE SIZE
1/2 to 1-1/4 inch
1-1/2 to 2 inch
2-1/2 to 3 inch
4 to 6 inch
8 to 12 inch
PVC (All Sizes)
C.I Bell & Spigot
(or No-Hub)
MAX. HANGER SPACING
6'-6"
10'-0"
10'-0"
10'-0"
14'-0"
6'-0"
5'-0"
and at Joints
HANGER DIAMETER
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"
5/8"
7/8"
3/8"
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
E. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.
F. Support vertical piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers.
H. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
3.03
EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond all
floor supported equipment unless detailed otherwise on drawings.
B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
3.04
FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or
waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Seal floor, shower, mop sink and other drains watertight to adjacent materials.
C. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flexible
sheet flash and counterflash with sheet metal; seal watertight.
3.05
SLEEVES
23 05 29 – 3
MS0612
A. Install sleeves at all wall, ceiling, and floor piping and ductwork penetrations. Sleeves shall extend a
minimum of 1 inch beyond building element on both sides. Size sleeve to allow minimum of 1 inch void
between sleeve and building element.
B. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
C. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Calk sleeves full depth and provide
floor plate.
D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and
adjacent work with stuffing or fire stopping insulation and calk seal air tight. Install chrome plated steel
escutcheon covers where penetration is located in occupied spaces or below finished ceilings. Install
penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturers written installation instructions.
3.06
CHASES
A. Install chases water tight. Caulk both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a
firm but pliable mass, or provide a segmented elastomeric seal.
3.07
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Duct up to 30" wide - 1" x 16 gauge at 10' spacing.
B. Horizontal duct on wall supports up to 18" wide - 1-1/2" x 16 gauge or 1" x 1/8" at 8' spacing.
3.08
ROOF CURBS
A. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash and
counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach counterflashing mechanical equipment and lap
base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.
B. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks.
Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
3.09
FIRE STOPPING
A. At penetrations through fire rated walls, ceilings, or floors, install fire stopping materials to achieve fire
ratings of adjacent construction.
3.10
FINISH
A. Prime coat steel hangers and supports. Paint exposed steel hangers and supports to match color of walls
and/or ceilings. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and above suspended ceiling
spaces are not considered exposed.
END OF SECTION
23 05 29 – 4
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 53: IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Identification of mechanical products installed under Division 23 00 00.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Color: Unless specified otherwise, conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color.
C. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
D. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.
E. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF
INSULATION OR PIPE
3/4" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 6"
8" - 10"
Over 10"
Ductwork and Equipment
LENGTH OF
COLOR FIELD
8"
8"
12"
24"
32"
-------
SIZE OF
LETTERS
1/2"
3/4"
1-1/4"
2-1/2"
3-1/2"
2-1/2"
F. Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel.
G. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and fluid being conveyed.
H. Plastic Tape Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings.
I.
Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape of not less than
6 inch wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Identification markers/markings shall be applied after application of insulation and/or final painting.
B. Plastic Nameplates: Install with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
C. Plastic or Metal Tags: Install with corrosive-resistant chain.
D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
23 05 53 – 1
MS0612
E. Plastic Tape Markers: Install complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Install 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.
G. Equipment: Identify air handling units, pumps, condensers, exhaust fans, VAV boxes, chillers, tanks,
water treatment devices and any other equipment with plastic nameplates or stencil painting. Small
devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with plastic or metal tags. Equipment shall be identified
as they are shown and scheduled on drawings(i.e. AHU-1, CWP-1, CH-1).
H. Controls: Identify control panels, thermostats, switches, disconnects and other major control components
outside panels with plastic nameplates. Controls should be identified to indicate the piece of equipment
they control and/or purpose of control component.
I.
Piping/Piping Insulation: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers, plastic tape
markers, or stenciled painting. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align
with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops,
adjacent to each valve and "T", at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each
obstruction. See applicable sections for pipe painting requirements on applicable services.
J.
Ductwork/Ductwork Insulation: Identify ductwork with stenciled painting or plastic tape markers. Identify as
to type of air (supply, return or exhaust), piece of equipment serving ductwork, and flow direction. Locate
identification on main trunk lines and branch lines at air handling equipment, at each side of a structure or
enclosure penetration, at each obstruction and at a spacing of not more than 20 feet. See Section on
ductwork for ductwork painting requirements.
K. Valves shall be identified with a metal tag that has the valve identification number and a designation as
“NORMALLY OPEN” or “NORMALLY CLOSED” or “THROTTLING.”
END OF SECTION
23 05 53 – 2
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 93: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.
C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
D. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.
E. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
Systems.
B. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,
Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.
C. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
D. TABB - International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 21 days after award of Contract.
B. Submit test and balance reports prior to the final inspection. Include full size drawing (24” x 36”) with test
report indicating the location of all items tested as required.
C. Prior to commencing work, submit draft reports indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data
required.
D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for
Contracting Officer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
E. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing
tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and
equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
F. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National Project
Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance.
G. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
H. Upon approval of the test and balance report, submit copy of the report in digital (MS Word or
Excel) format.
1.04
SCHEDULES
A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:
1. HVAC Pumps.
2. Boilers.
3. Forced Air Furnaces.
4. Chillers.
5. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers.
6. Packaged Heating/Cooling Units.
7. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units.
8. Unit Air Conditioners.
9. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units.
23 05 93 – 1
MS0612
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Air Coils.
Terminal Heat Transfer Units.
Unit Ventilators.
Fan Coil Units.
Air Handling Units.
Fans.
Air Terminal Units.
Air Inlets and Outlets.
Heat Exchangers.
1.05
REPORT FORMS
A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance or NEBB forms.
B. Forms shall include the following information:
1. Title Page:
a. Company name (Test and balance contractor)
b. Company address
c. Company telephone number
d. Project name
e. Project location
f. Project Contractor (General contractor and Mechanical sub-contractor)
2. Instrument List:
a. Instrument
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Serial number
e. Range
f. Calibration date
3. Air Moving Equipment:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Return air flow, specified and actual
f. Outside air flow, specified and actual
g. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
h. Inlet pressure
i. Discharge pressure
j. Fan RPM
4. Exhaust Fan Data:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
f. Inlet pressure
g. Discharge pressure
h. Fan RPM
5. Return Air/Outside Air Data:
a. Identification/location
b. Design air flow
c. Actual air flow
d. Design return air flow
e. Actual return air flow
f. Design outside air flow
g. Actual outside air flow
h. Return air temperature
i. Outside air temperature
j. Required mixed air temperature
k. Actual mixed air temperature
l. Design outside/return air ratio
m. Actual outside/return air ratio
6. Electric Motors:
23 05 93 – 2
MS0612
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
a. Manufacturer
b. HP/BHP
c. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.
d. RPM
e. Service factor
f. Starter size, rating, heater elements
V-Belt Drive:
a. Identification/location
b. Required driven RPM
c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d. Belt, size and quantity
e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM
f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
Duct Traverse:
a. System zone/branch
b. Duct size
c. Area
d. Design velocity
e. Design air flow
f. Test velocity
g. Test air flow
h. Duct static pressure
i. Air temperature
j. Air correction factor
Air Monitoring Station Data:
a. Identification/location
b. System
c. Size
d. Area
e. Design velocity
f. Design air flow
g. Test velocity
h. Test air flow
Air Distribution Test Sheet:
a. Air terminal number
b. Room number/location
c. Terminal type
d. Terminal size
e. Area factor
f. Design velocity
g. Design air flow
h. Test (final) velocity
i. Test (final) air flow
j. Percent of design air flow
Terminal Unit Data:
a. Manufacturer
b. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct
c. Identification/number
d. Location
e. Model
f. Size
g. Minimum static pressure
h. Minimum design air flow
i. Maximum design air flow
j. Maximum actual air flow
k. Inlet static pressure
Pump Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Manufacturer
c. Size/model
d. Impeller
e. Service
f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
23 05 93 – 3
MS0612
g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
h. Discharge pressure
i. Suction pressure
j. Total operating head pressure
k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
l. Shut off, total head pressure
13. Air Cooled Chillers:
a. Identification/number
b. Manufacturer
c. Capacity
d. Model
e. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual
f. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual
g. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual
h. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual
i. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual
j. Condenser leaving water temperature, design and actual
k. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual
l. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual
14. Cooling Coil Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
e. Air flow, design and actual
f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
j. Water flow, design and actual
k. Water pressure drop, design and actual
l. Entering water temperature, design and actual
m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
n. Air pressure drop, design and actual
15. Heating Coil Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
e. Air flow, design and actual
f. Water flow, design and actual
g. Water pressure drop, design and actual
h. Entering water temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
j. Entering air temperature, design and actual
k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual
l. Air pressure drop, design and actual
16. Flow Measuring Station:
a. Identification/station
b. Location
c. Size
d. Manufacturer
e. Model
f. Design flow rate
g. Design pressure drop
h. Actual/final pressure drop
i. Actual/final flow rate
j. Station calibrated setting
17. Duct Leak Test:
a. Description of ductwork under test
b. Duct design operating pressure
c. Duct design test static pressure
d. Duct capacity, air flow
23 05 93 – 4
MS0612
18.
19.
20.
21.
e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
f. Test apparatus
1) Blower
2) Orifice, tube size
3) Orifice size
4) Calibrated
g. Test static pressure
h. Test orifice differential pressure
i. Leakage
Combustion Test:
a. Manufacturer
b. Model number
c. Serial number
d. Firing rate
e. Overfire draft
f. Gas meter timing dial size
g. Gas meter time per revolution
h. Gas pressure at meter outlet
i. Gas flow rate
j. Heat input
k. Burner manifold gas pressure
l. Percent carbon monoxide (CO)
m. Percent carbon dioxide (CO2)
n. Percent oxygen (O2)
o. Percent excess air
p. Flue gas temperature at outlet
q. Ambient temperature
r. Net stack temperature
s. Percent stack loss
t. Percent combustion efficiency
u. Heat output
Air Cooled Condenser:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Manufacturer
d. Model number
e. Serial number
f. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
g. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
h. Number of compressors
Electric Heater:
a. Manufacturer
b. Identification/number
c. Location
d. Model number
e. Design kW
f. Number of stages
g. Phase, voltage, amperage
h. Test voltage (each phase)
i. Test amperage (each phase)
j. Air flow, specified and actual
k. Temperature rise, specified and actual
Unit Ventilator and Fan Coil Data:
a. Manufacturer
b. Identification/number
c. Location
d. Model number
e. Size
f. Air flow, design and actual
g. Water flow, design and actual
h. Water pressure drop, design and actual
i. Entering water temperature, design and actual
j. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
23 05 93 – 5
MS0612
k.
l.
Entering air temperature, design and actual
Leaving air temperature, design and actual
1.06
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit record documents.
B. Accurately record actual locations of balancing valves and rough setting.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and certified by AABC MN-1. Perform Work under
supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and
Adjusting Supervisor. All documentation shall be signed by a registered Professional Engineer.
B. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC MN-1 or NEBB Procedural Standards
for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
1.08
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before
Substantial Completion of Project.
B. No modifications shall be performed on any factory supplied systems without written approval of the
Government. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer is system modification is required above
standard procedure and practice.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following:
1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Correct fan rotation.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage has been minimized.
12. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Correct pump rotation.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
15. Service and balance valves are open.
B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Contracting Officer.
C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system balance.
D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed.
E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available
to Base Civil Engineering (BCE) to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
23 05 93 – 6
MS0612
3.03
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent
for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated.
B. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design conditions indicated.
3.04
ADJUSTING
A. Recorded data shall represent actually measured, or observed condition.
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be
restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has
been rectified.
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to
electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as
selected and witnessed by the Owner.
F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.
3.05
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air
quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers
and splitters.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary
branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total
pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
J.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.
K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.
Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full
heating.
L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required
relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure.
M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm
connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature
control.
3.06
WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
23 05 93 – 7
MS0612
A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.
B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gages to determine flow rates
for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature
difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.
C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to
thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air
balancing.
D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.
E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not
use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.
F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in
one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
3.07
COMMISSIONING
A. The commissioning procedures shall be performed as required.
END OF SECTION
23 05 93 – 8
MS0612
SECTION 23 07 00:
PART 1
HVAC INSULATION
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Ductwork insulation.
B. Insulation jackets.
C. Equipment insulation.
D. Covering.
E. Breeching insulation.
F. Piping insulation.
G. Jackets and accessories.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
C. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
D. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement.
E. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
F. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in
Sheet and Tubular Form.
G. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
H. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
I.
ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications.
J.
ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
K. ASTM C1290 – Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts.
L. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
M. ASTM E2231 - Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess
Surface Burning Characteristics.
N. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in insulation application with three years minimum experience.
B. Insulation, Coverings, and Linings: UL listed; maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, using specimen procedures and mounting procedures of
ASTM E 2231.
23 07 00 – 1
MS0612
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesive and insulation.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Type A: Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C1290; commercial grade; 'k' value of 0.29 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu ft
minimum density; 0.002 inch foil scrim facing. Insulation shall be made of at least 20% post consumer
glass cullet.
B. Type B: Rigid glass fiber; ASTM C612, Class 1; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 0.002 inch foil scrim
facing. Insulation shall be made of at least 20% post consumer glass cullet.
C. Type C: Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C553; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu ft minimum density;
coated air side for maximum 4,000 ft/min (20.3 m/sec) air velocity. Insulation shall be made of at least
20% post consumer glass cullet.
D. Adhesives: Waterproof fire-retardant type.
E. Indoor Jacket: 6 oz/sq yd canvas.
F. All exterior ductwork shall be factory double wall ductwork and shall be sealed watertight. All exterior
ductwork shall be finished to match the adjacent building components.
G. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to NFPA 255.
H. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage. Secure with epoxy adhesive as recommend by manufacture.
I.
Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh.
J.
Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.
K. All ductwork insulation systems shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1 requirements in addition to the
requirements of this section.
2.02
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. When factory insulation of HVAC equipment is available or is offered as an option, all HVAC equipment
shall be provided with pre-insulated with factory insulation.
B. Type A: Flexible mineral fiber blanket; ASTM C553; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 2.0 lb/cu ft density.
C. Type B: Rigid mineral fiber board; ASTM C612; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 6.0 lb/cu ft density.
D. Type C: Cellular glass; ASTM C552; 'k' value of 0.35 at 75 degrees F; 8.0 lb/cu ft density.
E. Type D: Calcium silicate; ASTM C533; asbestos free; 'k' value of 0.40 at 250 degrees F; 14 lb/cu ft
density.
2.03
EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Bedding Compounds: Non-shrinking, permanently flexible, compatible with insulation. All bedding
compounds shall contain zero VOC’s.
23 07 00 – 2
MS0612
B. Vapor Barrier Coating: Non-flammable, fire resistant, polymeric resin, compatible with insulation. All vapor
barrier coatings shall contain zero VOC’s
C. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195, hydraulic setting mineral wool. All insulating cement shall contain zero
VOC’s.
D. Wire Mesh: Corrosive resistant metal; hexagonal pattern.
2.04
PIPING INSULATION
A. Type A: Glass fiber insulation; ASTM C547, Type I; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; noncombustible.
Insulation shall be made of at least 20% post consumer glass cullet.
B. Type B: Cellular glass; ASTM C552, Type II, Class 2; maximum water vapor transmission rating of 0.1
perms; 'k' value of 0.40 at 75 degrees F.
C. Type C: Cellular foam; ASTM C534, Type I; tubular form, flexible, plastic; 'k' value of 0.28 at 75 degrees F.
All cellular foam piping insulation shall be provided with a metal jacket.
2.05
PIPE INSULATION JACKETS
A. Interior Applications:
1. Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints.
2. PVC Jackets: One piece, premolded type.
3. Canvas Jackets: UL listed treated cotton fabric, 6 oz/sq yd.
B. Exterior Applications:
1. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.020 inch thick; smooth finish.
2. Stainless Steel Jackets: Type 304 stainless steel; 0.010 inch thick; smooth finish.
2.06
PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Bands: 3/4 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick galvanized steel.
B. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
C. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting mineral wool. All insulating cement shall contain zero
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC’s).
D. Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M. All finishing cement shall contain zero VOC’s.
E. Fibrous Glass Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
F. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation and containing zero VOC’s..
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Install materials after ductwork /piping has been tested and approved.
B. Clean surfaces for adhesives.
3.02
DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed may be below ambient temperature.
C. Exterior Insulation (Type A or Type B) Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or
tape to match jacket.
2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent
sagging. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Stop
23 07 00 – 3
MS0612
and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing
wrapping.
D. Liner (Type C) Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. Secure insulation with mechanical
fasteners on 15 inch centers maximum on top and side of ductwork with dimension exceeding 20
inches. Seal and smooth joints. Do not use nail-type fasteners. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by
mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
2. Ductwork dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase ductwork to
allow for insulation thickness.
E. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
F. Exposed insulation or ductwork: Where ductwork or insulation is exposed in mechanical rooms or in
finished spaces, paint jacketing to match color of interior finish as approved by architect. Use paint
suitable for substrate and in accordance with manufactures instructions.
G. Where externally insulated ductwork connects to internally insulated ductwork or internally insulated
pieces of equipment ensure there is a thermal break to prevent condensation on internally insulated items.
3.03
EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.
C. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation, if
necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires , or bands.
D. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
E. Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of insulating cement.
F. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such.
G. When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install
insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage.
H. Select insulation types best suited for the equipment which it is to be installed, as recommended by
insulation manufacturer. Insulation shall have a neat appearance and provide protection against heat loss
or gain and condensation. Provide vapor barriers at all equipment below ambient temperature. Insulation
shall be a minimum 2” thick.
I.
3.04
Equipment shall be provided from the manufacture with insulation which has documentation that the
equipment will not condensate.
PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
C. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
E. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not
insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations.
F. Provide an insert, not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation,
23 07 00 – 4
MS0612
between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket, on piping 2 inches diameter or larger, to
prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating
material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used.
G. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
H. Install preformed insulation, of the same type and thickness, and aluminum jackets, where aluminum
jackets are required, at elbows, tees, valves, etc.
I.
Jackets:
1. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature shall
have standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field applied. Insulate fittings,
joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass
cloth and adhesive. PVC jackets may be used. Excluding Type C insulation.
2. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated dual-temperature pipes or pipes conveying fluids below
ambient temperature shall have vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied. Insulate fittings,
joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe, and finish
with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. Excluding Type C insulation.
3. Indoor, Exposed Applications: For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished
spaces, insulate as for concealed applications. Finish with canvas jacket; size for finish painting. Do
not use PVC jackets. Include on all types of insulation.
4. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jackets. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located
on bottom side of horizontal piping. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material
and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Include
on all types of insulation.
5. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with selfsealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with one mil (0.025 mm) thick aluminum
foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a polyester
film. Excluding Type C insulation.
J.
Finish Painting: Finish exterior of pipe jackets on all indoor exposed piping to match color of surface
located behind pipes. Finish exterior of pipe jackets on all exterior piping to match color of surfaces
behind piping.
3.05
SCHEDULES:
A. Ductwork
LOCATION
Ductwork Exposed in Mech Rooms or
other finished areas
Ductwork not Exposed (above ceilings)
Air Transfer Ducts
TYPE
B
THICKNESS (INCH)
2” (unless noted otherwise)
A
C
2” (unless noted otherwise)
2” (unless noted otherwise)
B. Equipment
EQUIPMENT
Domestic Hot Water Storage Tanks
Domestic Cold Water Storage Tanks
Domestic Cold Water Pressure Tanks
Heat Exchangers/Converters
Air Separators
Hot Thermal Storage Tanks
Boiler Feed Water Storage Tanks
Steam Condensate Receivers
Condensate Tanks
Stacks to Roof
Chiller Cold Surfaces (Not Factory Insulated)
Cold Thermal Storage Tanks
Chilled Water Pump Bodies
Expansion Tanks
23 07 00 – 5
MS0612
C. Piping
PIPING
Domestic Hot Water
Tempered Domestic Water
Domestic Cold Water
Roof Drains
Chilled Drinking Water
Heating Water Supply and Return
Low Pressure Steam Piping
Low Pressure Steam Condensate
Boiler Feed Water
Chilled Water
Condenser Water
Cold Condensate Drains
Refrigerant Suction
Refrigerant Hot Gas
TYPE
A
A
A
A
C
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
C
C
C
PIPE SIZE,
INCH
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1/2" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
1/2" - 1-1/4"
-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
1/2" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
1/2" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
END OF SECTION
23 07 00 – 6
THICKNESS,
INCH
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
2"
1"
1"
1"
1"
MS0612
SECTION 23 08 00:
PART 1
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. HVAC commissioning description.
2. HVAC commissioning responsibilities.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: For requirements and procedures
concerning testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical systems.
B. Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Submittal, training, and programming
requirements.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE Guideline 1 - The HVAC Commissioning Process.
B. Building Commissioning Association:
1. BCA - Commissioning Handbook.
C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau:
1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Building Systems Commissioning.
D. Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau:
1. TABB - Commissioning Manual.
1.04
COMMISSIONING DESCRIPTION
A. HVAC commissioning process includes the following tasks:
1. Testing and startup of HVAC equipment and systems.
2. Equipment and system verification checks.
3. Assistance in functional performance testing to verify testing and balancing, and equipment and
system performance.
4. Provide qualified personnel to assist in commissioning tests, including seasonal testing.
5. Complete and endorse functional performance test checklists provided by Commissioning Authority to
assure equipment and systems are fully operational and ready for functional performance testing.
6. Provide equipment, materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found during
commissioning process to fulfill contract and warranty requirements.
7. Provide operation and maintenance information and record drawings to Commissioning Authority for
review verification and organization, prior to distribution.
8. Provide assistance to Commissioning Authority to develop, edit, and document system operation
descriptions.
9. Provide training for systems specified in this Section with coordination by Commissioning Authority.
B. Equipment and Systems to Be Commissioned:
1. New HVAC systems that were installed under this Contract.
2. Existing HVAC systems that were modified, adjusted, upgraded, or affected by the work performed
under this Contract.
C. The following is a partial list of equipment that may be included in this HVAC Commissioning:
1. Chillers.
2. Pumps.
3. Cooling tower.
4. Boilers.
5. Piping systems.
6. Ductwork.
7. Variable frequency drives.
8. Gas-fired heating ventilating units.
9. Gas-fired makeup air units.
23 08 00 - 1
MS0612
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
Packaged roof top air conditioning units.
Split system air conditioning units.
Humidifiers.
Air handling units.
Air handling unit AHU duct system.
Packaged heat pump units.
Self-contained air conditioning units.
Packaged terminal air conditioning units.
Packaged terminal heat pump units.
Water source heat pumps.
Induction Units.
Unit Ventilators.
Fan Coil Units.
Electric terminal heating equipment.
Hot water terminal heating equipment.
Unit heaters.
Heat exchangers.
Computer room units.
Data room units.
Constant volume terminal units.
Variable volume terminal units.
Fans.
Variable volume changeover bypass system.
Fume hoods.
Laboratory room differential pressures.
Hospital room differential pressures.
Specialty fans.
Chemical treatment systems.
Fire dampers.
Smoke dampers.
Indoor air quality.
Equipment sound control.
Equipment vibration control.
Egress pressurization.
Smoke evacuation system.
Dust collection system.
Radiant floor heating system.
Kitchen hood supply systems.
Kitchen hood exhaust systems.
Automatic HVAC control system.
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work.
1.05
COMMISSIONING SUBMITTALS
A. Draft Forms: Submit draft of system verification form and functional performance test checklist.
B. Test Reports: Indicate data on system verification form for each piece of equipment and system as
specified. Use AABC forms as guidelines.
C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing completion of equipment or system verification checks
equipment or system to achieve specified performance.
1.06
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 – Contract Closeout: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record revisions to equipment and system documentation necessitated by
commissioning.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit revisions to operation and maintenance manuals when
necessary revisions are discovered during commissioning.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with AABC requirements.
23 08 00 - 2
MS0612
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.08
COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Equipment or System Installer Commissioning Responsibilities:
1. Attend commissioning meetings.
2. Ensure temperature controls installer performs assigned commissioning responsibilities as specified
below.
3. Ensure testing, adjusting, and balancing agency performs assigned commissioning responsibilities as
specified.
4. Provide instructions and demonstrations for Owner's personnel.
5. Ensure subcontractors perform assigned commissioning responsibilities.
6. Ensure participation of equipment manufacturers in appropriate startup, testing, and training activities
when required by individual equipment specifications.
7. Develop startup and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s startup procedures and functional
performance checklists for equipment and systems to be commissioned.
8. During verification check and startup process, execute HVAC related portions of checklists for
equipment and systems to be commissioned.
9. Perform and document completed startup and system operational checkout procedures, providing
copy to Commissioning Authority.
10. Provide manufacturer’s representatives to execute starting of equipment. Ensure representatives are
available and present during agreed upon schedules and are in attendance for duration to complete
tests, adjustments and problem-solving.
11. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain validity of
warranties.
12. Provide personnel to assist Commissioning Authority during equipment or system verification checks
and functional performance tests.
13. Prior to functional performance tests, review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and
equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during tests.
14. Prior to startup, inspect, check, and verify correct and complete installation of equipment and system
components for verification checks included in commissioning plan. When deficient or incomplete
work is discovered, ensure corrective action is taken and re-check until equipment or system is ready
for startup.
15. Perform verification checks and startup on equipment and systems as specified.
16. Assist Commissioning Authority in performing functional performance tests on equipment and
systems as specified.
17. Perform operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning Authority.
18. Conduct HVAC system orientation and inspection.
B. Temperature Controls Installer Commissioning Responsibilities:
1. Attend commissioning meetings.
2. Review design for ability of systems to be controlled including the following:
a. Confirm proper hardware requirements exist to perform functional performance testing.
b. Confirm proper safeties and interlocks are included in design.
c. Confirm proper sizing of system control valves and actuators and control valve operation will
result capacity control identified in Contract Documents.
d. Confirm proper sizing of system control dampers and actuators and damper operation will result
in proper damper positioning.
e. Confirm sensors selected are within device ranges.
f. Review sequences of operation and obtain clarification from Architect/Engineer.
g. Indicate delineation of control between packaged controls and building automation system, listing
BAS monitor points and BAS adjustable control points.
h. Provide written sequences of operation for packaged controlled equipment. Equipment
manufacturers’ stock sequences may be included, when accompanied by additional narrative to
reflect Project conditions.
3. Inspect, check, and confirm proper operation and performance of control hardware and software
provided in other HVAC sections.
4. Submit proposed procedures for performing automatic temperature control system point-to-point
checks to Commissioning Authority and Architect/Engineer.
5. Inspect check and confirm correct installation and operation of automatic temperature control system
input and output device operation through point-to-point checks.
6. Perform training sessions to instruct Owner's personnel in hardware operation, software operation,
23 08 00 - 3
MS0612
programming, and application in accordance with commissioning plan.
7. Demonstrate system performance and operation to Commissioning Authority during functional
performance tests including each mode of operation.
8. Provide control system technician to assist during Commissioning Authority verification check and
functional performance testing.
9. Provide control system technician to assist testing, adjusting, and balancing agency during
performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
10. Assist in performing operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning
Authority.
C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Commissioning Responsibilities:
1. Attend commissioning meetings.
2. Participate in verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing report for verification or diagnostic
purposes. Repeat sample of 20 percent of measurements contained in testing, adjusting, and
balancing report.
3. Assist in performing operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning
Authority.
1.09
COMMISSIONING MEETINGS
A. Attend initial commissioning meeting and progress commissioning meetings as required by
Commissioning Authority.
1.10
SCHEDULING
A. The General Contractor shall prepare schedule indicating anticipated start dates for the following:
1. Piping system pressure testing.
2. Piping system flushing and cleaning.
3. Ductwork cleaning.
4. Ductwork pressure testing.
5. Equipment and system startups.
6. Automatic temperature control system checkout.
7. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
8. HVAC system orientation and inspections.
9. Operation and maintenance manual submittals.
10. Training sessions.
B. Schedule seasonal tests of equipment and systems during peak weather conditions to observe full-load
performance.
C. Schedule occupancy sensitive tests of equipment and systems during conditions of both minimum and
maximum occupancy or use.
1.11
COORDINATION
A. Notify Commissioning Authority minimum of two weeks in advance of the following:
1. Scheduled equipment and system startups.
2. Scheduled automatic temperature control system checkout.
3. Scheduled start of testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
B. Coordinate programming of automatic temperature control system with construction and commissioning
schedules.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install additional balancing dampers, balancing valves, access doors, test ports, and pressure and
temperature taps required to meet performance requirements.
B. Place HVAC systems and equipment into full operation and continue operation during each working day
of commissioning.
23 08 00 - 4
MS0612
C. Install replacement sheaves and belts to obtain system performance, as requested by Commissioning
Authority.
D. Install test holes in ductwork and plenums as requested by Commissioning Authority for taking air
measurements.
E. Prior to start of functional performance test, install replacement filters in equipment as specified in
individual section.
3.02
FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Seasonal Sensitive Functional Performance Tests:
1. Test heating equipment at winter design temperatures.
2. Test cooling equipment at summer design temperatures.
3. Participate in testing delayed beyond Final Completion to test performance at peak seasonal
conditions.
B. Be responsible to participate in initial and alternate peak season test of systems required to demonstrate
performance.
C. Occupancy Sensitive Functional Performance Tests:
1. Test equipment and systems affected by occupancy variations at minimum and peak loads to
observe system performance.
2. Participate in testing delayed beyond Final Completion to test performance with actual occupancy
conditions.
END OF SECTION
23 08 00 - 5
MS0612
SECTION 23 09 23: DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Direct Digital Control (DDC) Systems for HVAC Systems.
B. Software.
1.02
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designation only.
A. AIR-MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSN, INC (AMCA)
AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters
B. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE, INC (ANSI)
ANSI B40.1 -Gauges-Pressure Indicating Dial Type-Elastic Element
C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
1. ASTM A 269 -Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service
2. ASTM B 88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube
3. ASTM D 635 Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a
Horizontal Position
3. ASTM D 1693 - Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics
D. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)
FCC Part 15 - (Vol II) Radio Frequency Devices
E. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)
FS GG-T-321 - (Rev D; Am 2) Thermometers, Self-Indicating Liquid-in-Glass for Machinery and Piping
Systems
F. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS, INC (IEEE)
IEEE No. 587 - Guide for Surge Voltage in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits
G. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSN (NEMA)
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment Incl Rev 1 (1000 Volts Maximum)
H. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC (UL)
1. UL 94 - Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances
2. UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment
1.03
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.
The standard products shall have been in a satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to
bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product
which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be
acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the
manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. The equipment items shall be supported by a service
organization. The Contractor shall submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations and
qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment on a regular
and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
B. Identical Items: Items of the same classification as specified in PART 2 - PRODUCTS shall be identical,
including equipment, assemblies, parts, and components.
C. Nameplates, Lens Caps, and Tags: Nameplates and lens caps bearing legends as shown and tags
bearing device unique identifiers as shown shall have engraved or stamped characters. Nameplates shall
23 09 23 – 1
MS0612
be mechanically attached to HVAC control panel interior doors. A plastic or metal tag shall be
mechanically attached directly to each field-mounted device or attached by a metal chain or wire. Each air
flow measurement station shall have a tag showing flow rate range for signal output range, duct size, and
identifier as shown.
D. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, shall verify all
dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any
work.
E. Drawings: Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the mechanical, electrical,
and finish conditions that could affect the work to be performed, shall arrange such work accordingly, and
shall furnish all work necessary to meet such conditions.
F. Power-Line Surge Protection: All equipment connected to ac circuits shall be protected from power-line
surges. Equipment protection shall meet the requirements of IEEE No. 587. Fuses shall not be used for
surge protection.
G. System Support: The contractor shall provide 1 year of system support for all hardware in the control
system at no additional cost to the building owner. System support shall include trouble-shooting,
calibration, hardware replacement and other required services to maintain fully functioning, calibrated
HVAC control systems. The system support service shall be available 5 days per week between 9 am
and 4 pm. During the 1 year system support period, the contractor shall maintain a duplicate set of HVAC
control drawings. At the owner's option, control problems will be solved by verbal instruction or on-site
correction by the contractor. The number of system support calls and site visits shall be unlimited during
the 1 year support period.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data.
B. Detail Drawings
1. Detail drawings shall be submitted. Detail drawings shall include: a drawing index; a list of symbols; a
series of drawings for each HVAC control system using abbreviations, symbols, nomenclature and
identifiers as shown on the contract drawings; valve schedules; damper schedules; and a
compressed-air station schematic on 34-inch by 22-inch sheets. Detail drawings shall also include:
equipment data, product specific catalog cuts, and an ASME air-storage tank certificate. All detail
drawings shall be delivered together as a complete submittal. Valve and damper schedules may be
submitted in advance but shall be included in the complete submittal.
2. Each control-system element on a drawing shall have a unique identifier as shown.
3. Each series of drawings for an HVAC control system shall include a schematic as shown, a ladder
diagram as shown, an equipment schedule as shown, a wiring diagram, a list of equipment with
manufacturer and model number, a control-panel arrangement drawing, and an HVAC control-system
sequence of operation.
4. The wiring diagram shall show the interconnection of conductors and cables to HVAC control-panel
terminal blocks and to the identified terminals of starters and packaged equipment, with all necessary
jumpers and ground connections. The wiring diagram shall show the labels of all conductors. All
sources of power required for HVAC control systems and for packaged-equipment control systems
shall be identified back to the panel board circuit breaker number, HVAC system control panel,
magnetic starter, or packaged control equipment circuit. Each power supply and transformer not
integral to a controller, starter, or packaged equipment shall be shown. The connected volt-ampere
load and the power supply volt-ampere rating shall be shown.
5. The HVAC control-panel arrangement drawing shall show nameplate legends, fabrication details, and
enclosure operating temperature-rise calculations. Fabrication details shall include interior door front
and rear views, back panel layout and terminal block layout.
6. The sequence of operation for each HVAC control system shall be in the language and format shown
on the drawings. No operational deviations from specified sequences will be permitted without prior
written approval of the Contracting Officer. The sequence of operation shall refer to each device by its
unique identifier.
7. The valve schedule shall include each valve's unique identifier, size, flow coefficient (Cv), pressure
drop at specified flow rate, spring range, positive-positioner range, and actuator size, supported by
close-off pressure data, dimensions, operation rate, and access and clearance requirements data.
8. The damper schedule shall contain each damper's and each actuator's identifier, nominal and actual
sizes, orientation of axis and frame, direction of blade rotation, spring ranges, operation rate, positive23 09 23 – 2
MS0612
positioner ranges, locations of actuators and damper end switches, arrangement of sections in multisection dampers, and methods of connecting dampers, actuators, and linkages. The damper
schedule shall include the maximum expected velocity through the damper at the intended location
and the maximum leakage rate at the operating static-pressure differential. The damper schedule
shall contain actuator selection data supported by calculations of the torque required to move and seal
the dampers, access and clearance requirements.
9. The equipment data shall be in booklet form, and indexed to the unique identifiers, and shall consist of
data sheets that document compliance with the specification and a copy of each HVAC control system
bill of materials. Catalog cuts shall be in booklet form indexed by device type. Where multiple
components are show on a catalog cut, the application specific component shall be marked.
C. Test Reports
1. The Contractor shall submit 4 copies of the site testing procedures. The site testing procedures shall
identify each item to be tested and shall clearly describe each test. The test procedures shall include
a list of the test equipment to be used for site testing, manufacturer and model number, and the date
of calibration and accuracy of calibration within 6 months of the test date.
2. The Contractor shall submit 4 copies of the site testing data. Original copies of all data produced
during site testing, including results of each test procedure, shall be turned over to the Government
after Government approval of the site tests.
3. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of the performance verification test plans and procedures. The
test plan and procedures for the performance verification test shall be indexed and submitted in
booklet form 60 days before the Contractor's scheduled test dates.
4. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of the performance verification test report after completion of a
successful test. Documentation of test results for the entire HVAC control system shall be submitted
complete, in booklet form and indexed, within 30 days after each test.
D. Training Data
1. The Contractor shall furnish a training course in the maintenance and operation of the HVAC control
systems specified 60 days prior to the start of training. The training shall be oriented to the specific
systems being installed under this contract. One training manual shall be furnished for each trainee,
plus two additional copies delivered for archival storage at the project site. The manuals shall include
the agenda, the defined objectives for each lesson, and a detailed description of the subject matter
for each lesson. Two copies of audiovisual materials shall be delivered to the Government for archival
storage at the project site, either as a part of the printed training manuals or on the same media as
that to be used during the training session.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1. The Contractor shall furnish 4 complete copies of operation manuals for each HVAC control system,
in booklet form and indexed, outlining the step-by-step procedures required for each HVAC control
system's startup, operation, and shutdown. The manuals shall include all detail drawings, equipment
data, each controller's configuration check sheet and manufacturer supplied operation manuals for all
equipment.
2. The Contractor shall furnish 4 complete copies of maintenance manuals, indexed in booklet form
listing maintenance procedures. The maintenance instructions shall include a maintenance check list
for each HVAC control system. Maintenance manuals shall include spare parts data and
recommended maintenance tool kits for all control devices. Maintenance instructions shall include
recommended repair methods, either field repair, factory repair, or whole-item replacement.
3. If operation and maintenance manuals are provided in a common volume, they shall be clearly
differentiated and separately indexed.
F. Operating Instructions
1. Commissioning Procedures shall be provided for each HVAC control system, and for each type of
terminal-unit control system. The procedures shall reflect the language and format shown. The
commissioning procedures shall refer to the devices by their unique identifiers as shown. The
commissioning procedures shall include step-by-step configuration procedures for each controller.
The configuration procedures shall be product specific and shall include a configuration check sheet
showing all configuration parameters, dip switch settings, initial recommended P, I and D constants.
2. The Contractor shall provide 4 copies of Commissioning Procedures, in booklet form and indexed, for
each type of control device provided, such as controllers, pilot positioners, adjustable relays, and
transmitters. Commissioning procedures shall include general instructions on how to set control
parameters, including: setpoints; proportional, integral, and derivative mode constants; contact output
settings for the specific devices provided. Commissioning procedures shall be specific to each HVAC
system, shall detail the steps involved, and shall refer to the procedures in the booklet for specific
23 09 23 – 3
MS0612
devices. Commissioning procedures shall be submitted 60 days prior to system commissioning.
G. Records
1. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of the calibration, adjustment and commissioning report which
shall include controller setpoints and proportional, integral and derivative-mode constant settings,
calibration data for all instruments and controls, and all the data resulting from adjusting the controlsystem devices and commissioning HVAC control system.
2. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of a list of service organizations qualified to service the HVAC
control system. The list shall include the service organization name and telephone number.
1.05
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Products shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and
dust, and other contaminants, within the storage-condition limits published by the equipment
manufacturer. Dampers shall be stored so that seal integrity, blade alignment and frame alignment are
maintained.
1.06
INTEGRATION OF EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS
A. Where products provided by others are required to interface to the DDC system the Equipment provider
shall be responsible for providing a Bacnet MSTP interface. The Equipment provider is responsible for
providing a product that will properly interface with all specified points exposed and a table of points and
point names to the DDC contractor. The Equipment provider may provide a demo unit to the DDC
contractor for testing. The DDC contractor shall then test the interface and provide the Equipment
provider with feedback that it works, works with deficiencies, or does not work. It is the Equipment
provider’s responsibility to provide a working system. It is the DDC contractor’s responsibility to make
every effort to help verify compatibility and work with the Equipment provider to accomplish a certification
that it will work. Field installation of the Equipment provider’s interfaces will not be acceptable unless this
is approved by all parties before Equipment delivery.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS: The contractor shall provide a Schneider Electric I/A Network
8000 Direct Digital Control System as specified below.
A. Schneider Electric I/A Network 8000 Direct Digital Control System: Schneider Electric I/A Network
8000 Direct Digital Control System, hereinafter referred to as I/A DDC, shall consist of a G3 Building
Controller with Web page engineering and graphics, Microzone II, MNL or MNB for air handling units,
Microzone II, MNL or MNB for the boiler and chiller, and Variable Air Volume Box Controllers for variable
air volume terminals. The system shall be set up for connection to the Base's dedicated area network,
VLAN 466, this system as specified is the ONLY system that has undergone the stringent CTO/RTO
process. The system shall be complete with all sensors, wiring, software, and hardware to form a
functional HVAC automation system. Sensors, sensor wiring, gauges, thermometers and other
accessories which are not part of the packaged I/A Network 8000 system shall be as specified hereinafter.
Training shall be provided in accordance with paragraph 3.06 TRAINING. Control system submittals shall
be made in accordance with paragraph 1.04 SUBMITTALS. In addition to the hardware and software
required at the building, the contractor shall also provide the following software development for the
existing I/A Network 8000 Host System located in the Energy Management Control System (EMCS)
section of Base Civil Engineering.
1. Graphical Building Representation: A graphical building representation with room names and room
numbers shall be created for the Web based System. The software shall allow logical routing from
the room to the boiler and/or chiller through all intermediate items of equipment. At each level, the
user shall be able to route to the previous display, the next logical equipment item, or the main
building plan. User interface shall be web based for use with roller mouse or digitizer for this
operation. All building related attributes such as room setpoints, occupied schedules, etc. shall be
displayed real-time and accessible from the graphic screen for modification.
2. Graphical System Schematics: A graphical system schematic for each air handling unit, chiller, pump,
boiler, and variable air volume terminal shall be supplied with all sensed parameters displayed. In
addition to the sensed parameters, system schematics including water coils shall display the chilled
water or hot water supply temperature as measured at the chiller or boiler respectively. All system
related attributes such as equipment control setpoints, throttling ranges, operating schedules, etc.
shall be displayed real-time and accessible from the graphic screen for modification.
3. System Support: The contractor shall provide 1 year system support for all hardware and software in
the control system at no additional cost to the building owner. The system support service shall be
available 5 days per week between 9 am and 4 pm. During the 1 year system support period, the
23 09 23 – 4
MS0612
contractor shall maintain a duplicate set of building software on his support computer. At the owner's
option, software problems will be solved by verbal instruction, or on site correction by the contractor.
The number of system support calls shall be unlimited during the 1 year period.
B. Electrical and Electronic Devices
1. All electrical, electronic, and electro-pneumatic devices not located within an HVAC control panel shall
have an enclosure NEMA 1 in accordance with NEMA 250 unless otherwise shown.
2. Standard Signals: The output of all analog transmitters and the analog input and output of all singleloop controllers and function modules shall be 4-to-20 mAdc signals. The signal shall originate from
current-sourcing devices and shall be received by current-sinking devices.
C. Ambient Temperature Limits
1. Actuators and positive positioners, and transmitters shall operate within temperature limit ratings of
plus 35 to 150 degrees F. All panel-mounted instruments shall operate within limit ratings of 35 to 120
degrees F and 10 percent to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. All devices installed
outdoors shall operate within limit ratings of minus 35 to 150 degrees F.
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Tubing
1. Copper: Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88 and shall have sweat fittings and valves. Plastic
tubing shall have barbed fittings and valves. Plastic tubing shall have the burning characteristics of
linear low-density polyethylene tubing, shall be self-extinguishing when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 635, shall have UL 94 V-2 flammability classification, and shall withstand stress cracking
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1693. Plastic-tubing bundles shall be provided with mylar
barrier and flame-retardant polyethylene jacket.
2. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A 269, and shall have stainless steel
compression fittings.
B. Wiring
1. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be insulated, modular, feed-through, clamp style with
recessed captive screw-type clamping mechanism, shall be suitable for rail mounting, and shall have
end plates and partition plates for separation or shall have enclosed sides.
2. Control Wiring for 24-Volt Circuits: Control wiring for 24-volt circuits shall be 18 AWG minimum and
shall be rated for 300-volt service.
3. Wiring for 120-Volt Circuits: Wiring for 120-volt circuits shall be 14 AWG minimum and shall be rated
for 600-volt service.
4. Analog Signal Wiring Circuits: Analog signal wiring circuits within control panels shall not be less than
20 AWG and shall be rated for 300-volt service.
5. Instrumentation Cable: Instrumentation cable shall be 18 AWG, stranded copper, single or multipletwisted, minimum 2-inch lay of twist, 100% shielded pairs, and shall have a 300-volt insulation. Each
pair shall have a 20-AWG tinned-copper drain wire and individual overall pair insulation. Cables shall
have an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper cable-shield tape, overall 20-AWG tinned-copper
cable drain wire, and overall cable insulation.
6. Non-conducting Wiring: Non-conducting wiring duct in control panels shall have slotted sides, snapon duct covers, fittings for connecting ducts, mounting clips for securing ducts, and wire-retaining
clips.
2.03
ACTUATORS
A. General Requirements: Actuators shall fail to their spring-return positions as shown on signal or power
failure and shall have a visible position indicator. Actuators shall open or close the devices to which they
are applied within 60 seconds after a full scale input signal change. Electric or electronic actuators
operating in parallel or in sequence shall have an auxiliary actuator driver. Actuators shall be electronic.
1. Damper Actuators: Damper actuators shall be rated for at least 125 percent of the motive power
necessary to operate against the pressure shown. The actuator stroke shall be limited by an
adjustable stop in the direction of power stroke. The actuators shall be provided with mounting and
connecting hardware.
2. Valve Actuators: Valve actuators shall be rated for at least 125 percent of the motive power
necessary to operate the valves over their full range of operation against the total and differential
pressures shown.
2.04
AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
A. Valve Assembly: Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and stuffing boxes with extended necks to clear
the piping insulation. Valve bodies shall be designed for not less than 125 psig working pressure or 150
23 09 23 – 5
MS0612
percent of the system operating pressure, whichever is greater. Valve leakage rating shall be .01 percent
of rated Cv.
B. Butterfly-Valve Assembly: Butterfly valves shall be threaded lug type suitable for dead-end service, and
for modulation to the fully-closed position, with carbon-steel bodies and non-corrosive discs, stainless
steel shafts supported by bearings, and EPDM seats suitable for temperatures from minus 20 degrees to
plus 250 degrees F. Valves shall have a manual means of operation independent of the actuator.
C. Two-Way Valves: Two-way modulating valves shall have equal-percentage characteristics.
D. Three-Way Valves: Three-way valves shall provide linear flow control with constant total flow throughout
full plug travel.
E. Duct-Coil and Terminal-Unit-Coil Valves: Control valves with flare-type ends shall be provided for duct or
terminal-unit coils. Flare nuts shall be furnished for each flare-type end valve.
F. Valves for Chilled-Water, Condenser-Water, and Glycol Service:
1. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends.
Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass, bronze or iron. Bodies for 2inch valves shall have threaded ends. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches shall have
flanged-end connections. Valve Cv shall be 100 percent to 110 percent of the Cv shown. Internal
valve trim shall be brass or bronze except that valve stems may be type 316 stainless steel.
2. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves.
G. Valves for Hot-Water Service Below 250 Degrees F:
1. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends.
Bodies for 2-inch valves shall have threaded ends. Bodies for valves 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches shall
have flanged-end connections. Valve Cv shall be 100 percent to 110 percent of the Cv shown.
2. Internal trim (including seats, seat rings, modulating plugs, and springs) of valves controlling water
hotter than 210 degrees F shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Internal trim for valves controlling water 210 degrees F or less shall be brass or bronze.
4. Nonmetallic parts of hot-water control valves shall be suitable for a minimum continuous operating
temperature of 250 degrees F or 50 degrees F above the system design temperature, whichever is
higher.
5. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves.
2.05
DAMPERS
A. Damper Assembly
1. A single damper section shall have blades no longer than 48 inches and shall be no higher than 72
inches. Maximum damper blade width shall be 8 inches. Larger sizes shall be made from a
combination of sections. Dampers shall be steel, or other materials where shown. Flat blades shall
be made rigid by folding the edges. All blade-operating linkages shall be within the frame so that
blade-connecting devices within the same damper section will not be located directly in the air stream.
Damper axles shall be 0.5-inch (minimum) plated steel rods supported in the damper frame by
stainless steel or bronze bearings. Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings.
Pressure drop through dampers shall not exceed 0.04 inch water gauge at 1,000 fpm in the wide-open
position. Frames shall not be less than 2 inches in width. Dampers shall be tested in accordance with
AMCA 500.
2. Operating links external to dampers (such as crankarms, connecting rods, and line shafting for
transmitting motion from damper actuators to dampers) shall withstand a load equal to at least twice
the maximum required damper-operating force. Rod lengths shall be adjustable. Links shall be
brass, bronze, zinc-coated steel, or stainless steel. Working parts of joints and clevises shall be
brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
3. Adjustments of crankarms shall control the open and closed positions of dampers.
4. Modulating dampers shall be opposed-blade type and two-position dampers shall be parallel-blade
type.
B. Outside-Air, Return-Air, and Relief-Air Dampers: The dampers shall be as shown. Blades shall have
interlocking edges and shall be provided with compressible seals at points of contact. The channel
frames of the dampers shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize air leakage. Dampers shall not leak
in excess of 20 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water gauge static pressure when closed. Seals shall be
suitable for an operating temperature range of minus 40 degrees F to 200 degrees F. Dampers shall be
23 09 23 – 6
MS0612
rated at not less than 2000 fpm air velocity.
C. Mechanical and Electrical Space Ventilation Dampers: The dampers shall be as shown. Dampers shall
not leak in excess of 80 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water gauge static pressure when closed.
Dampers shall be rated at not less than 1500 fpm air velocity.
D. Damper End Switches: Each end switch shall be a hermetically-sealed switch with a trip lever and overtravel mechanism. The switch enclosure shall be suitable for mounting on the duct exterior and shall
permit setting the position of the trip lever that actuates the switch. The trip lever shall be aligned with the
damper blade.
2.06
SMOKE DETECTORS
A. FIRE DETECTING DEVICES: Fire detecting devices shall comply with the applicable requirements of
NFPA 72E, NFPA 90A, UL 268, and UL 521. The detectors shall be provided as indicated. Detector base
shall be detachable and have screw terminals for making connections. No solder connections will be
allowed. Detectors shall be connected into alarm initiating circuits. Installed devices shall conform to the
classification of the area. All fire detecting devices and or detector bases with the exception of flame
detectors shall be addressable and shall be dynamically supervised and uniquely identified in the control
panel.
1. Smoke Detectors: Detectors shall be designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities. Smoke
detectors shall be photoelectric type. Detectors shall contain a visible indicator LED that shows when
the unit is in alarm condition. Detectors shall not be adversely affected by vibration or pressure.
Detectors shall be the plug-in type in which the detector base contains terminals for making all wiring
connections. Smoke detectors shall be addressable and remotely adjustable from the control panel.
a. Duct Detectors: Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed
where indicated. Units shall consist of a Photoelectric Detectors, mounted in a special housing
fitted with duct sampling tubes. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct
detector package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and shall be UL listed for use in
air-handling systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled from
the fire alarm control panel. All LED'S to indicate the operation and alarm condition and the test
and reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place.
Detector mounted above 6 feet and those mounted below 6 feet shall be readily accessible.
Detectors shall have auxiliary contacts to provide control, interlock, and shutdown functions by the
fire alarm control panel. Duct detector shall be addressable and controlled by the fire alarm
control panel. The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm vendor to ensure complete system
compatibility.
2.07
INSTRUMENTATION
A. Measurements: Transmitters shall be calibrated to provide the following measurements, over the
indicated ranges, for an output of 4 to 20 mAdc:
1. Conditioned space temperature, from 50 to 85 degrees F.
2. Duct temperature, from 40 to 140 degrees F except that return-air temperature for economizer
operation shall be minus 30 to plus 130 degrees F.
3. Chilled-water temperature, from 30 to 100 degrees F.
4. Heating hot-water temperature, from 100 to 250 degrees F.
5. Outside-air temperature, from minus 30 to 130 degrees F.
6. Relative humidity, 0 to 100 percent for high-limit applications; from 20 to 80 percent for space
applications.
7. Differential pressure for VAV supply-duct static pressure from 0 to 2.0 inches water gauge.
B. Temperature Instruments
1. Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD): Each RTD shall be platinum with a tolerance of plus or
minus 0.1 percent at 32 degrees F, and shall be encapsulated in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel,
anodized aluminum, or copper. Each RTD shall be furnished with an RTD transmitter as specified,
integrally-mounted unless otherwise shown.
a. Continuous-Averaging RTD: Continuous-averaging RTDs shall have a tolerance of plus or minus
1.0 degree F at the reference temperature, and shall be of sufficient length to ensure that the
resistance represents an average over the cross-section in which it is installed. The sensing
element shall have a bendable copper sheath. Each averaging RTD shall be furnished with an
RTD transmitter as specified, to match the resistance range of the averaging RTD.
b. RTD Transmitter: The RTD transmitter shall be selected to match the resistance range of the
RTD. The transmitter shall be a 2-wire, loop-powered device. The transmitter shall produce a
linear 4-to-20 mAdc output corresponding to the required temperature measurement. The output
23 09 23 – 7
MS0612
error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of the calibrated measurement. The transmitter shall include
offset and span adjustments.
C. Relative-Humidity Instruments: Relative-humidity sensing element shall use non-saturating sensing
elements capable of withstanding a saturated condition without permanently affecting calibration or
sustaining damage. Sensing elements shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent of full scale
within the range of 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. A 2-wire, loop-powered transmitter located at the
sensing elements shall be provided to convert the sensing elements output to a linear 4-to-20 mAdc
output corresponding to the required humidity measurement. The transmitter shall be a 2-wire, looppowered device. The output error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of calibrated measurement. The
transmitter shall include offset and span adjustments.
D. Pressure Instruments: The instrument shall be a pressure transmitter with an integral sensing element.
The instrument over pressure rating shall be 25 psig. The sensing elements accuracy shall be plus or
minus 2 percent of full scale. Transmitter accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.25 percent of the calibrated
measurement. The transmitter shall be a 2-wire, loop-powered device. The transmitter shall produce a
linear 4-to-20 mAdc output corresponding to the required pressure measurement. Each transmitter shall
have offset and span adjustments.
E. Thermowells: Thermowells shall be Series 300 stainless steel with threaded brass plug and chain, 2-inch
lagging neck and extension-type well, and inside diameter and insertion length as required for the
application.
F. Sunshields: Sunshields for outside-air temperature sensing elements shall prevent the sun from directly
striking the temperature sensing elements. The sunshields shall be provided with adequate ventilation so
that the sensing element responds to the ambient temperature of the surroundings. The top of each
sunshield shall have a galvanized-metal rainshield projecting over the face of the sunshield. The
sunshields shall be painted white or shall be unpainted aluminum.
G. Water Flow Meters: Flow meter type shall be magnetic type unless drawings allow turbine or ultrasonic
types. All flow meters shall output a 4-20 ma signal. All meters shall have a flow range of 3 to 30 FPS.
Magnetic flow meters shall have an accuracy of 0.2% at 1.64 FPS velocity and have SCADA ready
outputs. Ultrasonic and turbine type meters shall have a +/- 2% accuracy.
H. Meters: Utility meters shall be provided with BACnet interface and a NIPR drop.
2.08
THERMOSTATS
A. Ranges: Thermostat ranges shall be selected so that the setpoint is adjustable without tools between plus
or minus 10 degrees F of the setpoint shown.
B. Space Low Limit Thermostats: Contacts shall be single-pole double-throw (SPDT), hermetically sealed,
and wired to identified terminals. Maximum differential shall be 2 degrees F unless otherwise specified.
Thermostat covers shall be made of locking metal or heavy-duty plastic, and shall be capable of being
locked by an allen-head wrench or a special tool. Thermostats shall have manual switches as required by
the application.
C. Low-Temperature-Protection Thermostats: Low-temperature-protection thermostats shall be manual
reset, low-temperature safety thermostats, with NO and NC contacts and a 20-foot element which shall
respond to the coldest 18-inch segment.
D. Standard Unit Heater and Exhaust Fan Thermostats: Thermostat contacts shall be SPDT and wired to
identified terminals. Thermostat housing shall be a NEMA 4X waterproof enclosure which will tolerate
continuous spraying with water, high humidity, and airborne contaminants. Temperature scale and
adjusting knob shall be mounted on the face of the thermostat such that setpoint adjustment can be made
without tools. Adjusting knob penetration shall be sealed with a lubricated 0-ring or other positive sealing
method to maintain the integrity of the enclosure. Temperature range of thermostats shall be 40 to 100
degrees F. Temperature differential shall be not greater than 3 degrees F. Contact rating shall be
sufficient to switch the connected load.
2.09
PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SOLENOID VALVES
A. Pressure Switches: Each switch shall have an adjustable setpoint with visible setpoint scale. Range shall
be as shown. Differential adjustment shall span 20 to 40 percent of the range of the device.
23 09 23 – 8
MS0612
B. Differential-Pressure Switches: Each switch shall be an adjustable diaphragm-operated device with 2
SPDT contacts, with taps for sensing lines to be connected to duct pressure fittings designed to sense air
pressure. These fittings shall be of the angled-tip type with tips pointing into the air stream. Range shall
be 0.5 to 6.0 inches water gauge. Differential shall be a maximum of 0.15 inch water gauge at the low end
of the range and 0.35 inch water gauge at the high end of the range.
2.10
INDICATING DEVICES
A. Thermometers
1. Ductwork Insertion and Piping Systems: Thermometers for insertion in ductwork and piping systems
shall have brass, malleable iron, or aluminum alloy case and frame, clear protective face, permanently
stabilized glass tube with indicating-fluid column, white face, black numbers, and a 9-inch scale.
2. Thermometers for piping systems shall have rigid stems with straight, angular, or inclined pattern, and
shall conform to FS GG-T-321.
3. Thermometer Stems: All thermometer stems shall have expansion heads as required to prevent
breakage at extreme temperatures. On rigid-stem thermometers, the space between bulb and stem
shall be filled with a heat-transfer medium.
4. Air-Duct Thermometers: Air-duct thermometers shall have perforated stem guards and 45-degree
adjustable duct flanges with locking mechanism.
5. Averaging Thermometers: Averaging thermometers shall have 3-1/2 inch (nominal) dial, with black
legend on white background, and pointer traveling through a 270-degree arc.
6. Accuracy: Thermometers shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.
Thermometers shall have the following ranges:
a. Mixed-air temperature: 0 to 100 degrees F in 1-degree F graduations.
b. Return-air temperature: 0 to 100 degrees F in 1-degree F graduations.
c. Cooling-coil-discharge temperature: 0 to 100 degrees F in 1-degree F graduations.
d. Heating-coil-discharge temperature: 30 to 180 degrees F in 2-degree F graduations.
e. Hydronic-heating systems below 220 degrees F: 40 to 240 degrees F in 2-degree graduations.
B. Pressure Gauges: Gauges shall have black legend on white, background, and shall have a pointer
traveling through a 270-degree arc. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 3 percent of scale range. Gauges
shall meet ANSI B40.1.
1. Hydronic-System Applications: Gauges for hydronic-system applications shall be 4-1/2 inch (nominal)
size and have ranges and graduations as shown below.
a. Pump Suction - 30 psi range, 1 psi graduations, 5 psi figure interval.
b. Pump Discharge - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
c. Coil Supply - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
d. Coil Return - 30 psi range, 1 psi graduations, 5 psi figure interval.
e. Chiller Inlet and Outlet - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
f. Boiler Inlet and Outlet - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
2. Low Differential Pressure Gauges: Gauges for low differential-pressure measurements shall be 4-1/2
inch (nominal) size with two sets of pressure taps, and shall have a diaphragm-actuated pointer, white
dial with black figures, and pointer zero adjustment. Gauges shall have ranges and graduations as
shown. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of scale range.
2.11
CONTROL DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Relays: Relays shall be 2-pole, double-throw (2PDT) with a 10-ampere resistive rating at 120 Vac, and
shall have an enclosed 120-Vac coil with 11-pin blade connectors, and a matching rail-mounted socket.
Power consumption shall not be greater than 3 watts.
B. Time-Delay Relays: Time delay relays shall be 2PDT with 8-pin connectors, dust cover, and a matching
rail-mounted socket. Adjustable timing range shall be 0 to 5 minutes. Power consumption shall not be
greater than 3 watts.
C. Regulated Power Supplies: Each power supply shall provide a 24-Vdc linear supply at not less than 2
amperes, with regulation to 0.05 percent of output voltage. Each power supply shall have a fused input,
and shall be protected from voltage surges and power-line transients. The power supply output shall be
protected against overvoltage and short circuits. Power supply loading shall not be greater than 1.2
amperes.
2.12
PILOT LIGHTS AND MANUAL SWITCHES
A. Pilot Lights, Illuminated Switches, and Non-illuminated Switches: Pilot lights, illuminated switches, and
non-illuminated switches shall be rectangular devices arranged in a horizontal matrix as shown. Switch
action shall be as shown. Device illumination shall be by light-emitting diode lamp or by neon lamp.
23 09 23 – 9
MS0612
B. Manual Timed Override Switches: Manual timed override switches shall be spring-wound mechanical
type, with timer range as specified on the drawings. Switches shall be furnished with a faceplate with time
intervals permanently etched or engraved in the faceplate at the time of manufacture. Timer knob shall
have a pointer to indicate setting position. Switches shall be suitable for mounting in a standard 2" x 4"
outlet box. Contacts shall be rated for 20 amp resistive load at 125 volts. Switches shall be UL listed.
2.13
HVAC SYSTEM CONTROL PANELS
A. Panel Assembly: The panel shall be fabricated as shown, and the devices shall be mounted as shown.
Each panel shall be fabricated as a bottom-entry connection point for control-system electric power,
control-system main air source, control-system wiring, pneumatic tubing, interconnection of control
systems, interconnection of starters and external shutdown devices, and energy monitoring and control
systems (EMCS) interface. Each panel shall have an operating temperature rise of not greater than 20
degrees F above an ambient temperature of 100 degrees F.
B. Panel Electrical Requirements: Each control panel shall be powered by nominal 120 volts ac terminating
at the panel on terminal blocks. Instrument cases shall be grounded. Interior panel, interior door, and
exterior panel enclosure shall be grounded.
C. Enclosure: The enclosure for each panel shall be a NEMA 12 single-door wall-mounted box conforming
to NEMA 250, with continuous hinged and gasketed exterior door with print pocket and key lock,
continuous hinged interior door, interior back panel, and ventilation louvers in back surface as shown.
Inside finish shall be white enamel, and outside finish shall be gray primer over phosphatized surfaces.
D. Mounting and Labeling: Controllers, pilot lights and switches, shall be mounted on the interior door as
shown. Power conditioner, fuses and duplex outlet shall be mounted on the interior of the cabinet as
shown. All other components housed in the panel shall be mounted on the interior back panel surface of
the enclosure, behind the door on rails as shown. Controllers and gauges shall be identified by a plastic
or metal nameplate that is mechanically attached to the panel. The nameplate shall have the inscription
as shown. Lettering shall be cut or stamped into the nameplate to a depth of not less than 1/64 inch, and
shall show a contrasting color, produced by filling with enamel or lacquer or by the use of a laminated
material. Painting of lettering directly on the surface of the interior door or panel is not permitted.
E. Wiring and Tubing
1. Wiring Interconnections: Wiring shall be installed in wiring ducts in such a way that devices can be
added or replaced without disturbing wiring that is not affected by the change. Wiring to single-loop
controllers shall have a 4-inch wiring loop in the horizontal wiring duct at each wiring connection.
There shall be no wiring splices within the control panel. All interconnections required for power or
signals shall be made on device terminals or panel terminal blocks, with not more than 2 wires
connected to a terminal.
2. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be arranged in groups as shown. Instrument signal grounds
at the same ground reference level shall end at a grounding terminal for connection to a common
ground point. Wiring-shield grounds at the same reference level shall end at a grounding terminal for
connection to a common ground point. Grounding terminal blocks shall be identified by reference
level.
3. Wiring Identification: All wiring connected to controller shall be identified by function and polarity, i.e.,
process variable, input, remote setpoint input and output.
F. EMCS Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be provided for connections to EMCS as shown. Analog
signals shall require only the removal of jumpers to interface to EMCS.
2.14
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLS
A. VAV Terminal Units:
B. Terminal-Unit Controls
1. Vav Box Controller: Controls for pressure-independent boxes shall consist of a velocity- sensing
device in the primary air entering the box, a room temperature sensing element, a damper actuator, a
duct temperature sensor, and an adjustable microprocessor-based VAV box controller. Each
controller shall operate a damper for cooling and, if required, a duct coil valve for heating. Actuators
shall open and close the device to which it is applied within 6 minutes. The controller shall be
compatible with the existing Schneider Electric I/A Network 8000 EMCS system. The controller shall
be capable of reading cfm, duct temperature, room temperature, cooling setpoint, and damper
position. Terminal unit controls shall have the requirements of UL 916 and FCC Part 15.
23 09 23 – 10
MS0612
2. Communication-and-Programming Device: One hand-held communication-and-programming device
with instruction manuals shall be provided. The communication-and-programming device shall
connect to the VAV box controller directly or to a jack at the room temperature sensing element
location. The communication-and-programming device shall be used to read and set minimum
velocity, maximum velocity, cooling setpoint, and space temperature.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION CRITERIA: The HVAC control system shall be completely installed and
ready for operation, as specified and shown. Dielectric isolation shall be provided where dissimilar metals
are used for connection and support. Penetrations through and mounting holes in the building exterior
shall be made watertight. The HVAC control-system installation shall provide clearance for control-system
maintenance by maintaining access space between coils, access space to mixed-air plenums, and other
access space required to calibrate, remove, repair, or replace control-system devices. The control-system
installation shall not interfere with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical system
maintenance.
A. Device-Mounting Criteria: Devices mounted in or on piping or ductwork, on building surfaces, in
mechanical/electrical spaces, or in occupied space ceilings shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations and as shown. Control devices to be installed in piping and ductwork
shall be provided with all required gaskets, flanges, thermal compounds, insulation, piping, fittings, and
manual valves for shutoff, equalization, purging, and calibration. Strap-on temperature sensing elements
shall not be used except as specified.
B. Wiring Criteria: Wiring external to control panels, including low-voltage wiring, shall be installed in metallic
raceways. Wiring shall be installed without splices between control devices and HVAC control panels.
Instrumentation grounding shall be installed as necessary to prevent ground loops, noise, and surges from
adversely affecting operation of the system. Cables and conductors wires shall be tagged at both ends,
with the identifier shown on the shop drawings, in accordance with the requirements shown in the
electrical division of this specification. Other electrical work shall be as specified in applicable sections of
the electrical division of this specification
C. Controller Output Loop Impedance Limitation: Controller output loops shall be constructed so that total
circuit impedance connected to the analog output of a single-loop controller shall not exceed 600 ohms.
3.02
CONTROL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Damper Actuators
1. Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream.
2. Multiple actuators operating a common damper shall be connected to a common drive shaft.
3. Actuators shall be installed so that their action shall seal the damper to the extent required to maintain
leakage at or below the specified rate and shall move the blades smoothly.
B. Room-Instrument Mounting: Room instruments shall be mounted so that their sensing elements are 5
feet above the finished floor unless otherwise shown.
C. Low-Temperature-Protection Thermostats: For each 20 square feet of coil-face area, or fraction thereof,
a thermostat shall be provided to sense the temperature at the location shown. The thermostat sensing
element shall be installed in a serpentine pattern.
D. Averaging-Temperature Sensing Elements: Sensing elements shall have a total-element minimum length
equal to one linear foot per square foot of duct cross-sectional area.
E. Duct Static-Pressure Sensing Elements and Transmitters: The duct static-pressure sensing element and
transmitter sensing point shall be located approximately two-thirds of the distance from the supply fan to
the end of the duct with the greatest pressure drop.
F. Indication Devices Installed in Piping and Liquid Systems: Gauges in piping systems subject to pulsation
shall have snubbers. Thermometers and temperature sensing elements installed in liquid systems shall
be installed in thermowells.
G. Tubing
1. Control System Installation: The control system shall be installed so that pneumatic lines are not
23 09 23 – 11
MS0612
2.
3.
4.
5.
exposed to outside-air temperatures. All tubes and tube bundles exposed to view shall be installed
neatly in lines parallel to the lines of the building. Tubing in mechanical/electrical spaces shall be
routed so that the lines are easily traceable.
Pneumatic Lines: In mechanical/electrical spaces, pneumatic lines shall be plastic tubing or copper
tubing. Horizontal and vertical runs of plastic tubes or soft copper tubes shall be installed in raceways
dedicated to tubing. The dedicated raceways shall be supported every 6 feet for horizontal runs and
every 8 feet for vertical runs. Tubing not installed in raceways shall be hard-drawn copper tubing with
sweat fittings and valves, supported every 6 feet for horizontal runs and every 8 feet for vertical runs.
Connection to Liquid Lines: Tubing for connection of sensing elements and transmitters to liquid lines
shall be copper with brass compression fittings.
Connection to Ductwork: Tubing for connection of sensing elements and transmitters to ductwork
shall be plastic tubing.
External Tubing: Tubing external to mechanical/electrical spaces, when run in plenum ceilings, shall
be soft copper with sweat fittings, supported every 8 feet. Tubing not in plenum spaces shall be soft
copper with sweat fittings supported every 8 feet or shall be plastic tubing in raceways dedicated to
tubing.
3.03
CONTROL SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A. General Requirements: These requirements shall apply to all primary HVAC systems unless modified
herein. The sequences describe the actions of the control system for one direction of change in the
HVAC process analog variable, such as temperature, humidity or pressure. The reverse sequence shall
occur when the direction of change is reversed.
1. HVAC System Sequences of Operation: HVAC system sequences of operation shall be as shown on
the drawings and as specified herein.
3.04
COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES
A. General Procedure
1. Evaluations: The Contractor shall make the observations, adjustments, calibrations, measurements,
and tests of the control systems, tune the controllers, set the clock schedule, and make any necessary
control-system corrections to ensure that the systems function as described in the Sequence of
Operation. The Contractor shall permanently record, on system equipment schedule, the final setting
of controller proportional, integral and derivative constant settings, setpoint, manual reset setting,
maximum and minimum controller output, and ratio and bias settings, in units and terminology specific
to the controller.
2. Item Check: An item-by-item check of the Sequence of Operation requirement shall be performed
using Steps 1 through 4 in the specified Control System Commissioning Procedures. Steps 1, 2, and
3 shall be performed with the HVAC system shut down; Step 4 shall be performed after the HVAC
systems have been started. Signals used to change the mode of operation shall originate from the
actual HVAC control device intended for the purpose, such as the time clock. External input signals to
the HVAC control panel (such as EMCS, starter auxiliary contacts, and external systems) may be
simulated in Steps 1, 2, and 3. With each operational-mode change signal, observe that the proper
pilot lights and HVAC-panel output-relay contacts function. Check all terminals assigned to EMCS
and observe that the proper signals are available.
3. Weather-Dependent Test Procedures: Weather-dependent test procedures that cannot be performed
by simulation shall be performed in the appropriate climatic season. When simulation is used, the
Contractor shall verify the actual results in the appropriate season.
4. Configuration: The Contractor shall configure each controller for its specified service.
5. Two-Point Accuracy Check: A two-point accuracy check of the calibration of each HVAC controlsystem sensing element and transmitter shall be performed by comparing the HVAC control-panel
readout to the actual value of the variable measured at the sensing element and transmitter or air-flow
measurement station location. Digital indicating test instruments shall be used, such as digital
thermometers, motor-driven psychrometers, and tachometers. The test instruments shall be at least
twice as accurate as the specified sensing element-to-controller readout accuracy. The calibration of
the test instruments shall be traceable to NBS standards. The first check point shall be with the
HVAC system in the shutdown condition, and the second check point shall be with the HVAC system
in an operational condition. Calibration checks shall verify that the sensing element-to-controller
readout accuracies at two points are within the specified product accuracy tolerances. If not,
recalibrate or replace the inaccurate device and repeat the calibration check.
6. Insertion, Immersion Temperature Sensing Element: Insertion-temperature and immersiontemperature sensing element and transmitter-to-controller readout calibration accuracy shall be
checked at one physical location along the axis of the sensing element.
7. Averaging-Temperature: Averaging-temperature-sensing element and transmitter-to-controller
readout calibration accuracy shall be checked every 2 feet along the axis of the sensing element in
23 09 23 – 12
MS0612
the proximity of the sensing element, for a maximum of 10 readings. These readings shall then be
averaged.
3.05
TESTING, COMMISSIONING, AND COORDINATION WITH HVAC BALANCING
A. Site Testing: The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies
necessary to perform all site testing, calibration, adjusting and commissioning. Wiring shall be tested for
continuity and for ground, open, and short circuits. Tubing systems shall be tested for leaks. HVAC
control panels shall be pretested off-site as a functioning assembly ready for field connections, calibration,
adjustment, and commissioning of the operational HVAC control system. The Contractor shall obtain
written Government approval of the specific site-testing procedures prior to any test. Written notification of
any planned site-testing, commissioning or tuning shall be given to the Government at least 14 calendar
days prior to any test.
B. Control System Calibration, Adjustments, and Commissioning:
1. Calibrate all instrumentation and controls and verify the specified accuracy using test equipment with
calibration traceable to NIST standards.
2. Mechanical control devices shall be adjusted to operate as specified.
3. Control system commissioning shall be performed for each HVAC system.
C. Performance Verification Test: The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance of the HVAC control system
with the contract documents. Using test plans and procedures previously approved by the Government,
the Contractor shall demonstrate all physical and functional requirements of the project. The performance
verification test procedures shall explain, step-by-step, the actions and expected results that will
demonstrate that the control systems perform in accordance with the sequences of operation. The
performance verification test shall not be started until after receipt by the Contractor of written permission
by the Government, based on the Contractor's written certification of successful completion of Contractor
site testing as specified.
D. Coordination with HVAC System Balancing: The Contractor shall tune the controllers after all air-system
and hydronic-system balancing has been completed, minimum damper positions set and a report has
been issued. Commissioning, except for tuning of controllers, shall be performed simultaneous with
HVAC system balancing. The control subcontractor shall be responsible for placing all systems and
subsystems in the correct mode during the performance of HVAC testing and balancing.
E. Posted Instructions: Instructions on 8-1/2 by 11 inch sheets and half-size plastic laminated drawings for
each system showing the final installed conditions shall be placed in each HVAC control panel. The
posted instructions shall include the control sequence, control schematic, ladder diagram, wiring diagram,
valve schedules, damper schedules, panel arrangement drawings, commissioning procedures, controller
configuration check sheet with final configuration record, preventive maintenance instructions and singleloop controller operators manual. Additionally, half-size drawings showing the mechanical floor plan duct
distribution and VAV box location shall be posted in each mechanical room.
3.06
TRAINING
A. Training-Course Requirements: A training course shall be conducted for 6 operating staff members
designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period, for a total of 32 hours of normal working time,
shall be conducted within 30 days after successful completion of the performance verification test. The
Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all audiovisual equipment and 6 sets of all other training
materials and supplies. A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom instruction, including two 15minute breaks and excluding lunchtime, Monday through Friday, during the daytime shift in effect at the
training facility. The Contractor shall submit an outline for the course, with a proposed time schedule.
Approval of the planned training schedule shall be obtained from the Government at least 30 days prior to
the start of the training.
B. Training-Course Content: For guidance in planning the required instruction, the Contractor should
assume that attendees will have a high school education or equivalent, and are familiar with HVAC
systems. The training course shall cover all of the material contained in the Operating and Maintenance
Instructions, the layout and location of each HVAC control panel, the layout of one of each type of unitary
equipment and the locations of each, the location of each system-control device external to the panels,
preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, calibration, adjustment, commissioning, tuning, and
repair procedures. Typical systems and similar systems may be treated as a group, with instruction on the
physical layout of one such system. The results of the performance verification test and the calibration,
adjustment and commissioning report shall be presented as benchmarks of HVAC control-system
performance by which to measure operation and maintenance effectiveness.
23 09 23 – 13
MS0612
3.07
QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for operations under this section to assure
compliance with contract requirements and maintain records of his quality control for materials,
equipment, and construction operations.
END OF SECTION
23 09 23 – 14
MS0612
SECTION 23 21 13:
PART 1
HYDRONIC PIPING
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Heating water piping system.
D. Chilled water piping system.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
C. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300.
D. ASME B16.18 – Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
E. ASME B16.22 – Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
F. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
G. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
H. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
I.
ASTM A 47/A 47M – Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
J.
ASTM A 53/A 53M - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless
K. ASTM A183 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
L. ASTM A 234/A 234M - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated
Temperatures.
M. ASTM A536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
N. ASTM B 32 - Solder Metal.
O. ASTM B 88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
P. ASTM C 591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation
Q. ASTM D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials For Wire and Cable
R. ASTM D 1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
S. ASTM D 2235 - Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene- Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
T. ASTM D 2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
U. ASTM D 2310 - Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe.
V. ASTM D 2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
W. ASTM D 2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
23 21 13 – 1
MS0612
X. ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems.
Y. ASTM D 2680 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Composite-Sewer Piping.
Z. ASTM D 2683 - Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and
Tubing.
AA. ASTM D 2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
AB. ASTM D 2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings.
AC. ASTM F 477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.
AD. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
AE. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
AF. AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids.
AG. AWWA C110 - Ductile - Iron and Gray - Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids.
AH. AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
AI. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or
Other Liquids.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ASME B31.9.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9.
C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC 9.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.
C. Include welders certification of compliance with ASME SEC 9.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
HEATING WATER PIPING, BURIED
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black with AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket, or double layer,
half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape.
1. Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel welding type with double layer, half-lapped 10 mil
polyethylene tape.
2. Joints: AWS D1.1, welded.
3. Polyurethane insulation with high density polyethylene jacket and heat shrink sleeves.
2.02
HEATlNG WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black.
1. Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings: Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi
23 21 13 – 2
MS0612
service. Welded fittings are not acceptable. Malleable iron conforming to ATM A 47/A 47M, Grade
32510. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket – flush type, fill entire cavity.
Nuts and bolts – heat treated, ASTM A 183, cadmium plated or zinc electroplate. Factory pre-formed
insulation shall be provided for these fittings.
2. Non-Grooved Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel welding
type fittings.
3. Joints: Screwed, or AWS D1.1, welded.
B. Copper tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast, brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper.
2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range of 430 to
535 degrees F.
2.03
A.
CHILLED WATER PIPING, BURIED
Plastic PVC carrier pipe, fittings, and cement: ASTM D 1785 pipe, ASTM D 2466 socket type fittings,
and ASTM D 2564 solvent cement shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Pipe, fittings, flanges,
and couplings shall have solvent cement socket end connections, except piping beyond 5 feet out of
buildings shall have O-ring connections. Plastic PVC piping shall be suitable for working pressure of 125
psig at 75 degrees F.
B.
Flanged connections: Provide flat face flanged connections between plastic piping and metal piping.
Plastic flanges shall be suitable for connecting to ASME Class 150 flanges.
C.
O-rings connections: Provide between straight sections of pipe beyond 5 feet from exterior of building.
D.
Insulation: Factory installed, rigid, 90-95% closed cell polyurethane, foamed in place, with minimum 1.5
inch annular space between pipe jacket completely filled. Foam to comply with ASTM C 591. Insulation
conductivity (K) equals 0.14 (Btu-in/hr/sq. ft/degree F) per inch thickness at 50 degrees F. Jacketing
material shall be high density polyethylene per ASTM D 1248 with a minimum thickness of 0.060 inches.
Field joints shall be insulated with polyurethane as specified above and sealed water tight using fusion
welded or heat shrink joint covers. Insulation and jacketing to be factory installed on the carrier pipe.
2.04
CHILLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black.
1. Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings: Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi
service. Welded fittings are not acceptable. Malleable iron conforming to ATM A 47/A 47M, Grade
32510. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket – flush type, fill entire cavity.
Nuts and bolts – heat treated, ASTM A 183, cadmium plated or zinc electroplate. Factory pre-formed
insulation shall be provided for these fittings.
2. Non Grooved Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel welding
type.
3. Joints: Screwed for pipe 2 inch and under; AWS D1.1 welded for pipe over 2 inch.
B. Copper tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast, brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper.
2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range of 430 to
535 degrees F.
2.05
EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40 galvanized.
1. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron, or ASME B16.3 malleable iron.
2. Joints: Screwed, or grooved mechanical couplings.
B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D 2241, SDR 21 or 26.
1. Fittings: ASTM D 2466 or D 2467, PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld.
C. ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2680 or ASTM D 2751.
1. Fittings: ASTM D 2751.
2. Joints: ASTM D 2235, solvent weld.
23 21 13 – 3
MS0612
2.06
FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions
for copper pipe, soldered joints.
B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping.
C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,
designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; C-shape elastomer composition
sealing gasket for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F; steel bolts, nuts,
and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe.
D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water
impervious isolation barrier.
2.07
GATE VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc,
solder or threaded ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, single wedge, flanged or grooved
ends.
2.08
GLOBE VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable
composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with backseating capacity.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends,
renewable seat and disc.
2.09
BALL VALVES
A. Up to 2 inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle,
solder or threaded ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle,
flanged.
2.10
PLUG COCKS
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends, with one
wrench operator for every ten plug cocks.
B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends, with wrench
operator with set screw.
2.11
BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 180 degrees F, wafer or lug ends, extended
neck, 10 position lever handle.
2.12
SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, solder or screwed ends.
B. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.
2.13
SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
A. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or flanged
ends.
2.14
RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities
ASME certified and labeled.
23 21 13 – 4
MS0612
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. After completion, fill, clean, and chemically treat systems. See Section 23 25 00.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. Wherever possible install valves in readily
accessible locations not more than 2 feet above ceilings or 6 feet above floor in mechanical spaces.
D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings.
F. Provide access panels where valves and fittings are not exposed.
G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of
pipe level.
H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply
one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
I.
Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting.
J.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Install valves so they can be accessed from
the floor wherever possible or in an easily accessible location.
K. Install metallic tape buried continuously along the full length of any buried nonmetallic piping, 12 inches
below surface. The tape shall have a metallic center of aluminum foil, coated on both sides with
polyethylene.
L. Paint exterior hot water piping to match the color of the building. Paint exposed interior hot water piping to
match color of adjacent surfaces. To be applied after insulation installation. Label per Section 23 05 53.
M. Paint exterior chilled water piping to match the color of the building. Paint exposed interior chilled water
piping to match color of adjacent surfaces. To be applied after insulation installation. Label per Section 23
05 53.
3.03
APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Provide non-conducting
dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Install gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
D. Install plug cocks for throttling service.
E. Provide 3/4 inch gate drain valves with threaded hose connections at main shut-off valves, low points of
piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment and at isolation valves so that equipment or sections of
piping can be drained without draining complete system.
23 21 13 – 5
MS0612
3.04
TESTING
A. When additions or modifications are made to an existing hydronic system the Contractor shall test the
existing system before modifications are made. Test the existing system as detailed in paragraph B. The
results of the test shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer’s Inspector and any deficiencies shall be
reported in writing to the Contracting Officer.
B. Hydrostatically test all hydronic piping systems by applying a water pressure of not less than 100 psi or 11/2 times the operating pressure whichever is greater. The pressure shall be maintained for 4 hours,
during which all joints shall be inspected for leaks. . All tests are to be witnessed by the contract
inspector. If piping systems do not pass, contractor shall make corrections and repeat tests at no
additional cost to the government. Repeat until piping systems pass the tests.
END OF SECTION
23 21 13 – 6
MS0612
SECTION 23 21 16:
PART 1
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Expansion tanks.
B. Chilled water storage tanks
C. Air vents.
D. Air separators.
E. Strainers.
F. Pump suction fittings.
G. Combination fittings.
H. Flow indicators, controls, meters.
I.
Relief valves.
J.
Pressure reducing valves
K. Flexible connectors
L. Backflow preventer.
M. Water Meters.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASME Section VIII - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Pressure Vessels.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D for manufacture of tanks.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this
project.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions of tanks, materials of construction, tank lining methods, anchors,
attachments, lifting points, taps, and drains.
C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description,
and model.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to ASME Section VIII for construction of potable water storage tanks. Provide tanks registered
with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
EXPANSION TANKS
A. Construction: Closed, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ASME Code;
23 21 16 – 1
MS0612
100 psi rating; cleaned, prime coated, and supplied with steel support saddles; with tappings for
installation of accessories.
B. Gage Glass Set: Brass compression stops, guard, and 3/4 inch glass, maximum 24 inches length, long
enough to cover tank for 2 inches above bottom to 2 inches below top.
C. Quick Connect Air Inlet: Automotive tire valve type, manual air vent, tank drain, and pressure relief valve.
D. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure double check back flow
preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valved by-pass.
2.02
DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS
A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ASME Code;
supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible Diaphragm
sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.
B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psig.
2.03
CHILLED WATER STORAGE TANK
A. Tank: Welded steel, ASME labeled for working pressure of 125 psig, steel support saddles, taps for
accessories, threaded connections, access manhole.
B. Accessories: Tank drain, water inlet and outlet.
C. Vertical or Horizontal storage tank per drawings, sized as indicated on drawings.
D. Insulation: Factory furnished 3 inch glass fiber insulation with steel or aluminum jacket.
2.04
AIR VENTS
A. Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for
system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.
2.05
AIR SEPARATORS
A. In-line Air Separators: Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inch and larger; tested
and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ASME Code; for 125 psig operating pressure.
2.06
STRAINERS
A. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch
stainless steel perforated screen.
B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch
stainless steel perforated screen.
2.07
PUMP SUCTION FITTINGS
A. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 2 inch and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 inch and larger,
rated for 175 psig working pressure, with inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings,
disposable fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and permanent magnet located in flow stream
and removable for cleaning.
B. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in side.
2.08
COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES
A. Valves: Straight or angle pattern, flanged cast-iron valve body with bolt-on bonnet for 175 psig operating
pressure, non-slam check valve with spring-loaded bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem, and
calibrated adjustment permitting flow regulation.
2.09
CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVES
A. Cast iron or bronze, globe style, balance valve with handwheel with vernier type ring setting and memory
stop, readout valves equipped with integral check valves and gasketed caps.
B. Calibrated, plug type balance valve with precision machined orifice, readout valves equipped with integral
check valves and gasketed caps, calibrated nameplate and indicating pointer.
23 21 16 – 2
MS0612
C. Provide calibrated balancing charts or calculators to determine fluid flow rate for each valve. Submit
copies of each in the O & M manual.
2.10
AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES
A. Ductile-iron body with pressure ports, stainless steel flow control cartridge. Cartridge shall have
segmented ports through which water passes. Cartridge movement shall result in shearing action that will
dislodge or shear any particle that tends to get stuck in port.
B. Valves shall control flow to within plus/minus 5 percent of design. Flow curve shall be smooth over its
entire nominal control range.
2.11
RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities
ASME certified and labeled.
2.12
PRESSURE REDUCING VAVLES
A. Bronze or cast iron body, stainless or chrome steel valve spring, stem, and trim, phosphor bronze
diaphragm, direct acting, threaded 2 inches and smaller, flanged 2 inches and larger.
2.13
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Steel Piping: Stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve.
B. Copper Piping: Bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleave.
C. Construct spool pieces to exact size for insertion of flexible connection.
2.14
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal
parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm
type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under
back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves,
strainer, and four test cocks.
2.15
WATER METERS
A. AWWA C700, positive displacement disc type suitable for fluid with bronze case and cast iron bottom cap,
straight reading, hermetically sealed register, magnetic drive with low flow indicator, graduated in gallons.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance.
B. Support tanks inside building from building structure.
C. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.
D. Provide automatic air vents at system high points and as indicated. Install isolation valves at all automatic
air vent.
E. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest
drain.
F. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank.
G. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.
H. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps. Remove temporary
strainers after cleaning systems.
I.
Provide combination pump discharge valve on discharge side of base mounted centrifugal pumps.
23 21 16 – 3
MS0612
J.
Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.
K. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and
expansion tanks.
L. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity.
Select equipment relief valve capacity not to exceed rating of connected equipment.
M. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.
N. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain by means of an approved air gap. Install backflow
preventers in an accessible location (i.e. not greater than 5’ above floor and 12” clear space around
backflow preventer, unless otherwise noted).
O. Install water meters on all make-up water connections. Meters shall have totalizer register.
P. Backflow preventer assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the International Plumbing Code at the
time of installation. Use attached inspection form and submit for approval.
Q. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation.
R. All make-up water connections shall be equipped with a reduced pressure type backflow preventor.
END OF SECTION
23 21 16 – 4
Hurlburt Field
PWS ID No. 1460782
MS0612
Device
Backflow Prevention Device Inspection and Maintenance Form
Make:
Model:
Serial #:
Date Installed:
Test Date:
Device Location:
New
Orientation
Use
Existing
Previous Device Serial #:
Testing & Maintenance
Domestic
Containment
Vertical Down
Fire
Isolation
Horizontal
Irrigation
Passed
Annual Test
Failed
Line Pressure:
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY
Check Valve No. 2
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
Shut Off Valve No. 2
Protection
Vertical Up
Initial Test
Check Valve No. 1
Size:
Relief Valve
Failed to Open
Opened At
Closed Tight
Leaked
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
Check Valve No. 1
Check Valve No. 2
With Flow
Against Flow
With Flow
Against Flow
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
PRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER
Air Inlet Valve
Opened At
Failed to Open
Check Valve
Leaked
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across Check Valve
Test Kit
Test Kit Make:
Model:
Serial No.
Tester
Comments:
Name of Certified Tester:
Tester Certification Number:
Expiration Date:
PASS
Last Calibration
Date:
FAIL
I Hereby certify I have tested the device in accordance with FAC Rule 62-555.330(6) and FAC Rule 62-555.360(2).
Tester's Signature:
Form must be submitted to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of testing.
Date:
MS0612
SECTION 23 21 23:
PART 1
HYDRONIC PUMPS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Base mounted pumps.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly and field performance of pumps with
minimum three years experience.
B. Alignment: Base mounted pumps shall be aligned by qualified millwright and alignment certified.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Submit certified pump curves' showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point
plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Balance: Rotating parts, statically and dynamically.
B. Construction: To permit servicing without breaking piping or motor connections.
C. Pump Motors: Operate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise. Motors shall be high efficiency type.
D. Pump Connections: Flanged.
2.02
BASE MOUNTED PUMPS
A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, radially or horizontally split casing, for maximum
working pressure.
B. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal
flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.
C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft.
D. Bearings: Grease lubricated ball bearings.
E. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze, or stainless steel shaft sleeve.
F. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating
temperature.
H. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard.
I.
Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim.
2.03
CLOSE COUPLED IN-LINE PUMPS
A. Pumps shall be in-line type, closed coupled, single stage design, for installation in vertical or horizontal
23 21 23 – 1
MS0612
position, capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections.
B. Pump volute shall be of Class 30 cast iron. The impeller shall be non-ferrous, enclose type, dynamically
balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking capscrew.
C. The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the motor shaft by an internally-flushed mechanical seal with
ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous operation at 225 degrees F. A non-ferrous
shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal.
D. Pump shall be rated for minimum of 175 psi working pressure. Volute shall have gauge tappings at the top
and bottom.
E. Motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be of the size, voltage and enclosure called for on the
plans. It shall have heavy duty grease lubricated ball bearings, completely adequate for the maximum load
for which the motor is designed.
F. Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute Standards. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned
and painted with at least one coast of high grade machinery enamel prior to shipment.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are
non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published
maximum efficiency curve.
D. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump
such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, provide
supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over.
E. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve and
balancing valve on pump discharge.
F. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
G. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains.
H. Lubricate pumps before start-up.
I.
Install base mounted pumps on concrete base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place.
J.
Qualified millwright shall check, align, and certify base mounted pumps prior to start-up.
K. Install name plates on pump indicating the GPM, head and impeller diameter.
L. On constant flow systems the pump impellor shall not be trimmed. The balancing valve shall be used for
setting the flow rate.
END OF SECTION
23 21 23 – 2
MS0612
SECTION 23 25 00:
PART 1
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. System cleaner.
2. Closed system treatment (water).
3. Condenser water system treatment.
4. Open system treatment.
5. Chemical feeder equipment including associated feeders, pumps, tanks, controls, meters, and valves.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposed cleaning and flushing procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system schematic, equipment locations, and controls schematics, electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Product Data: Submit chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment including electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit placement of equipment in systems, piping configuration,
and connection requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Manufacturers Field Reports: Indicate start-up of treatment systems when completed and operating
properly. Indicate analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment.
G. Submit initial and final water analysis reports.
1.03
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and piping, including sampling points
and location of chemical injectors.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and other equipment
including spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. Include step by step instructions on test
procedures including target concentrations.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Florida standard for addition of non-potable chemicals to
building systems and for discharge to public sewers.
1.05
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum
three years experience with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience
approved by manufacturer.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for pumps, valves and water meters.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SYSTEM CLEANER
A. Product Description: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease
and petroleum products.
23 25 00 – 1
MS0612
B. Biocide; chlorine release agents including sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or microbiocides
including quaternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate), or
isothiazolones.
2.02
CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT (WATER)
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State Florida standards.
B. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH; polyphosphate.
C. Corrosion inhibitors; boron-nitrite, sodium nitrite and borax, sodium totyltriazole, low molecular weight
polymers, phosphonates, sodium molybdate, or sulfites.
2.03
CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM TREATMENT (COOLING TOWERS)
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling; phosphonates, sodium polyphosphates, lignin derivatives, synthetic
polymer polyelectrolytes, or organite phosphates.
C. Acid to reduce alkalinity and pH.
D. Corrosion inhibitor; zinc-phosphate, phosphonate-phosphate, phosphonate-molybdate and phosphonatesilicate, sodium totyltriazole, or low molecular weight polymers.
E. Biocide; chlorine release agents including sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or microbiocides
including quaternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate), or
isothiazolones.
2.04
OPEN SYSTEM TREATMENT - (EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS, SMALL COOLING TOWERS)
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling and corrosion inhibitor; polyphosphate.
C. Biocide; chlorine release agents including sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or microbiocides
including quaternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate), or
isothiazolones.
2.05
BY-PASS (POT) FEEDER
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. Two or five gallon size capacity with quick opening cap for working pressure of 175 psig.
2.06
DRIP FEEDER
A. Plastic reservoir with coil of capillary tubing with probe, weights, charging syringe, and clip.
2.07
SOLUTION METERING PUMP
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. Positive displacement, diaphragm pump with adjustable flow rate, thermoplastic construction, continuousduty fully enclosed electric motor and drive, and relief valve.
2.08
SOLUTION TANKS
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. 50 gallon capacity, polyethylene, self-supporting, 5 gallon graduated markings; molded fiberglass cover
with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid level switch.
2.09
AGITATOR
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. Totally enclosed electric motor, stainless steel clamp and motor mount, ½ inch diameter Type 316
stainless steel propeller.
23 25 00 – 2
MS0612
2.10
LIQUID LEVEL SWITCH
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. Polypropylene housing with integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles for connection to metering
pump, and low level alarm.
2.11
CONDUCTIVITY CONTROLLER
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. Packaged monitor controller with solid state circuiting, five percent accuracy, linear dial adjustment, builtin calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control function light, output to control circuit.
2.12
WATER METER
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. Displacement type cold-water meter with sealed, tamper-proof magnetic drive, impulse contact register.
2.13
SOLENOID VALVES
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. Forged brass body globe pattern, normally open or closed as required, general-purpose solenoid
enclosure, and continuous duty coil.
2.14
TIMERS
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards.
B. Electronic timers, infinitely adjustable over full range, 150 second and five minute range, mounted
together in cabinet with hands-off-automatic switches and status lights.
2.15
TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish white enamel test cabinet with local and fluorescent light, capable of accommodating 4 - 10 ml
zeroing titration burettes and associated reagents.
B. Furnish following test kits:
1. Alkalinity titration test kit.
2. Chloride titration test kit.
3. Sulphite titration test kit.
4. Total hardness titration test kit.
5. Low phosphate test kit.
6. Conductivity bridge, range 0 - 10,000 micro-ohms.
7. Creosol red pH slide, complete with reagent.
8. Portable electronic conductivity meter.
9. High nitrite test kit.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Operate, fill, start and vent systems prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system.
Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.
3.02
CLEANING
A. Concentration: As recommended by manufacturer.
B. Hot Water Heating Systems:
1. Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160 degrees F and maintain for 12 hours
minimum.
2. Remove heat and circulate to 100 degrees F or less; drain systems as quickly as possible and refill
with clean water.
3. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain.
4. Refill with clean water and repeat until system is clean and cleaner is removed.
23 25 00 – 3
MS0612
C. Chilled Water Systems:
1. Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible.
2. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain.
3. Refill with clean water and repeat until system is clean and cleaner is removed.
D. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and acceptance of Engineer.
E. Flush open systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain and completely refill.
F. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.
G. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed.
Include disassembly of components as required.
H. Complete system shall be cleaned/flushed to include new and existing hydronic piping.
3.03
CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT
A. Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and interconnecting piping.
Install around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps as indicated on Drawings.
B. Sample and analyze water and chemically treat as recommended by manufacture. Submit analysis and
treatment recommendation for approval.
C. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder as required by water analysis.
D. Sample and submit analysis of water following treatment.
3.04
OPEN SYSTEM TREATMENT EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS) (SMALL COOLING TOWERS)
A. Provide two glass mesh feeder bags for each unit, suspended in sump, filled with sequestering agent.
B. Provide drip feeder to feed sequestering agent into sump. Interlock solenoid valve on drip system with
spray or circulating pump.
C. Provide 1/2 inch bleed-off complete with globe valve piped to drain. Locate bleed-off above flood line.
Provide solenoid valve wired to pump.
D. Provide conductivity controller to sample sump water and operate bleed-off solenoid valve. Activate with
pump. Pipe to drain.
E. Sample and analyze water and chemically treat as recommended by manufacture. Submit analysis and
treatment recommendation for approval.
F. Sample and submit analysis of water following treatment.
3.05
CONDENSER WATER SYSTEMS (COOLING TOWERS)
A. Provide automatic condenser water control systems for inhibitor feed, blow-down, and biocide feeds.
1. Provide meter activated inhibitor application.
2. Provide conductivity activated blow-down.
3. Provide meter fed biocide with blow-down locked out to ensure biocide retention time.
B. Incorporate solid state integrated circuits and digital LED displays, in NEMA 250 Type 12 steel enclosure.
Provide lockable door with gaskets.
C. Base dissolved solids control on conductivity and include:
1. LED digital readout display (micro-ohm/cm).
2. Temperature compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold.
3. High, low, normal conductance indicator lights (LED).
4. High or low conductance alarm light (flash or steady switch), trip points field adjustable. Furnish flash
or steady switch with silence position.
5. Illuminated legend indicating "ALARM" whenever alarm condition exists.
6. Hand-off-automatic switch for solenoid bleed valve.
7. Illuminated legend indicating "BLEED" when valve is operated.
23 25 00 – 4
MS0612
8. Adjustable hysteresis or dead-band (internal).
D. Base inhibitor feed control on make-up volume and include:
1. Solid state counter (1-15 field selectable).
2. Solid state timer (adjustable 1/4 to 5 minutes).
3. Test switch.
4. Hand-off-automatic switch for chemical pump.
5. Illuminated legend indicating "FEED" when pump is activated.
6. Solid state lockout timer (adjustable 1/4 to 3 hours) and indicator light. Lockout timer to deactivate
pump and activate alarm circuits.
7. Panel total (quantity of makeup), Electro-mechanical type.
E. Biocide programmer to include:
1. 24-hour timer with 14 day skip feature.
2. Precision solid state bleed lockout timer (0-9 hours) and biocide pump timer (0 - 2-1/4 hours), clock
controlled.
3. Solid state alternator to enable use of two different formulations.
4. Digital display of time of day (24 hours).
5. LED display of day of week (14 days).
6. Fast and slow clock set controls (internal).
7. Battery back-up so clock is not disturbed by power outages, quartz timekeeping accuracy.
8. Hand-off-automatic switches for biocide pumps.
9. Illuminated legend indicating "BIOCIDE A" or "BIOCIDE B" when pump is activated.
F. Provide water meter on system make-up, wired to control system.
G. Provide solution pumps to feed sequestering agent and corrosion inhibitor from solution tank into
condenser water supply to tower. Provide agitator in accordance with treatment suppliers
recommendations.
H. Provide conductivity controller to sample condenser water and operate solenoid bleed valve and piping to
blow-down controller. Wire sampler to open when condenser water pump is operating.
I.
Introduce biocide to tower by continuous feed with solution pump or solenoid valve on tank (chlorine).
J.
Provide liquid level switch in each solution tank to de-activate solution pump and agitator, and signal
mechanical alarm system.
K. Install 3/4 inch water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test specimens.
3.06
DEMONSTRATION
A. Furnish two hour training course for operating personnel, instruction to include installation, care,
maintenance, testing, and operation of water treatment systems. Arrange course at start up of systems.
END OF SECTION
23 25 00 – 5
MS0612
SECTION 23 31 00:
PART 1
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Ductwork.
B. Casings.
C. Kitchen hood ductwork.
D. Duct cleaning.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE - Handbook Fundamentals; Chapter 34 - Duct Design.
B. ASHRAE - Handbook HVAC Systems and Equipment; Chapter 16 - Duct Construction.
C. ASTM A90/A90M – Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc
or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
D. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip.
E. ASTM A653/A653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Allow-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
G. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
H. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
I.
NFPA 96 - Standard for the Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooling Operations.
J.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
K. SMACNA – HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
L. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit results of duct leakage testing.
1.04
DEFINITIONS
A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and NFPA 96 standards.
1.06
QUALTIY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181.
B. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, G90 zinc coating
in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M.
23 31 00 – 1
MS0612
C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock:
Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.
D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Polyester film supported by helical-wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation;
aluminized vapor barrier film.
1.
Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1 inches wg negative.
2.
Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3.
Temperature Range: 0 degrees F to 250 degrees F.
4.
Thermal Resistance: 6.0 square feet-hour-degree F per BTU.
E. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 304.
F. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
G. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone
or with tape, or heavy mastic.
H. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
2.02
DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and
Flexible and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and
sealing for operating pressures indicated. If not indicated otherwise, supply and return duct and ductwork
downstream of VAV boxes shall be constructed to 1” pressure classification with a seal class C and a
leakage classification of 24 for rectangular ducts and 12 for round ducts. Ductwork upstream of VAV
boxes shall be constructed to 2” pressure classification, unless otherwise noted, with a seal class C and a
leakage classification of 24 for rectangular ducts and 12 for round ducts. Ductwork indicated to be
constructed to a pressure class of 3” shall be constructed with a seal class B and a leakage classification
of 12 for rectangular ducts and 6 for round ducts. Ductwork indicated to be constructed to a pressure
class of 4”, 6” or 10” shall be constructed with a seal class A and a leakage classification of 6 for
rectangular ducts and 3 for round ducts.
B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent
rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written
permission.
C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline.
Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical
lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence
upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45
degrees.
E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements
exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.
F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus draw bands.
G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
H. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in
SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inches cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded
joints.
I.
Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree lateral wye
takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections.
2.03
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS
A. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lock seam duct constructed of galvanized steel.
23 31 00 – 2
MS0612
B. Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
26
24
22
20
18
C. Construct fittings with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 60 inches
62 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
24
22
20
20
18
16
2.04
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL FLAT OVAL DUCTS
A. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lock seam duct constructed of galvanized steel;
rated for 10 inches wg pressure.
B. Joints: Either fully welded or bolted flange with gasket material in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. Construct duct with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
7 inches to 24 inches
25 inches to 48 inches
50 inches to 70 inches
72 inches to 82 inches
84 inches and larger
Gauge
24
22
20
18
16
D. Construct fittings with the following minimum gauges:
Gauge
Major Axis Dimension
7 inches to 36 inches
20
37 inches to 60 inches
18
62 inches and larger
16
2.05
DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL INSULATED ROUND DUCTS
A. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lock seam duct with light reinforcing corrugations,
galvanized steel outer wall, 1 inch thick glass fiber insulation (0.27 Btu/hr/ft2/°F), perforated galvanized
steel inner wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.
B. Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
26
24
22
20
18
C. Construct fittings with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 60 inches
62 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
24
22
20
20
18
16
23 31 00 – 3
MS0612
2.06
DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL INSULATED FLAT OVAL DUCTS
A. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lock seam duct with light reinforcing corrugations,
galvanized steel outer wall, 1 inch thick glass fiber insulation (0.27 Btu/hr/ft2/°F), perforated galvanized
steel inner wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.
B. Construct duct with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
7 inches to 24 inches
25 inches to 48 inches
50 inches to 70 inches
72 inches to 82 inches
84 inches and larger
Gauge
24
22
20
18
16
C. Construct fittings with the following minimum gauges:
Gauge
Major Axis Dimension
7 inches to 36 inches
20
37 inches to 60 inches
18
62 inches and larger
16
2.07
DOUBLE WALL DUCT, EXTERIOR APPLICATIONS
A. All ductwork located outside the building shall be factory doublewall ductwork and it shall be sealed
watertight.
B. The double wall duct shall be 2” thick and internally insulated with a minimum of 2” thick, 1.75 pounds per
cubic foot glass fiber insulation.
C. The ductwork shall be round, flat oval or rectangular as indicated on the drawings.
D. Ductwork interior and exterior wall shall be factory fabricated from aluminum in accordance with SMACNA
HVAC duct construction standards. Ductwork shall be supported in accordance with SMACNA standards.
2.08
CASINGS
A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and construct for
operating pressures indicated.
B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to
angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal
mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields.
C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install
hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection.
D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage back facing and 22 gage
perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick
packed with 4.5 lb/cu ft minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage.
2.09
KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and NFPA 96.
B. Exposed Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts: Construct of stainless steel ASTM A167, type 304 using
continuous external welded joints.
C. Concealed Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts: Construct of 16 gage carbon steel or 18 gage stainless steel
ASTM A167, type 304 using continuous external welded joints.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide
pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or
23 31 00 – 4
MS0612
screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation
material inside a metal ring.
B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.
C. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door
in closed position.
D. Connect terminal units directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct
to change direction.
E. Connect diffusers or troffer boots with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or
clamp.
F. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions for cleanout.
Use stainless steel or painted galvanized steel for ductwork exposed to view and stainless steel or
galvanized steel for ducts where concealed.
G. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to
prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
H. All exposed spiral round or flat oval duct shall be double wall insulated duct.
I.
Exposed ductwork shall be painted to match ceiling, roof structure, or as otherwise specified.
J.
The ductwork shall have balance dampers where the branch ducts connect to main trunk.
3.02
DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM
MATERIAL
Supply Air
Steel, Aluminum
Return and Relief
Steel, Aluminum
General Exhaust
Steel, Aluminum
Kitchen Hood Exhaust
Steal, Stainless Steel
Dishwasher Exhaust
Stainless Steel
Fume Hood Exhaust
Stainless Steel
Outside Air Intake
Steel
Combustion Air
Steel
Exterior Ductwork
Aluminum
3.03
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain
sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt
with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
3.04
TESTING
A. A leakage test shall be made of ductwork in each pressure classification, to demonstrate adequacy of
construction tightness. Each section shall incorporate at least: 5 transverse joints, typical seams, one
elbow, one fire damper, one access door, and 2 typical branch connections. Leakage testing shall be
performed in accordance with sections 3 and 5 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
Leakage in each type ductwork shall not exceed leakage classes identified in paragraphs 2.02A and
2.03A above. Test shall be witnessed by the contract inspector and test results submitted for approval.
23 31 00 – 5
MS0612
END OF SECTION
23 31 00 – 6
MS0612
SECTION 23 33 00:
PART 1
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Volume control dampers.
B. Fire dampers.
C. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
D. Backdraft dampers.
E. Air turning devices.
F. Flexible duct connections.
G. Duct access doors.
H. Duct test holes.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AMCA 500 – Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
C. NFPA 92A – Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems.
D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
E. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
F. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.
G. UL 555C – Safety for Ceiling Dampers.
H. UL 555S – Safety for Smoke Dampers.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements.
B. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.
B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two
gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches.
C. Fabricate splitter dampers of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with
continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint
action flanged bushing with set screw.
D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inches.
E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inches.
Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable
hardware.
23 33 00 – 1
MS0612
F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers,
provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.
I.
Outside air damper leakage shall be a maximum of 3 CFM per square foot. Damper leakage shall be
tested in accordance with AMCA 500.
2.02
FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, NFPA 92A, UL 555, UL555S, UL555C and as indicated.
B. Fabricate ceiling firestop flaps of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch
ceramic fiber on top side, and one layer on bottom side for round flaps, with locking clip.
C. Fabricate ceiling dampers of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and light
weight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket closure.
D. Fabricate curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel
closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for
low pressure ducts up to 12 inches in height.
E. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated
bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed
linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock.
F. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for combination
fire/balancing dampers.
2.03
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18/x/18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be
air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction.
B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of 16 gage galvanized steel, or
extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked
together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin;
adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.04
AIR TURNING DEVICES
A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually
adjustable blades, and mounting straps.
B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum
construction, with push-pull operator strap.
2.05
FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.
B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz per
sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip.
2.06
DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.
B. Duct access doors shall be provided at all fire dampers and duct mounted mechanical equipment.
C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking
devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.
D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.
23 33 00 – 2
MS0612
E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two
compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional
hinge for larger sizes.
F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.07
DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded
plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide
extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide balancing dampers where indicated and at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust
systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Contractor shall
provide and install as many balancing dampers as required for proper balancing of the air system
regardless of whether they are shown on the drawings. All dampers shown on the drawings shall be
provided. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
C. Provide balancing dampers on medium and high pressure systems where indicated.
D. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components.
Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant
springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
E. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative.
F. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.
G. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment.
H. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic
dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access,
18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, or as indicated.
I.
Provide duct test holes where indicated or required for testing and balancing purposes.
END OF SECTION
23 33 00 – 3
MS0612
SECTION 23 36 00:
PART 1
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Variable volume terminal units.
B. Variable volume regulators.
C. Integral sound attenuator.
D. Integral heating coils.
E. Integral damper motor operators.
F. Integral controls.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ARI 880 – Air Terminals.
B. ARI 885 – Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets.
C. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
D. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication.
C. Submit product data.
D. Submit product data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication. Include
catalog performance ratings which indicate air flow, static pressure, and NC designation.
E. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of second through sixth
octave bands at inlet static pressures of one to 4 inch wg.
F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate air terminal units performance for air pressure drop, flow performance, and
acoustical performance in accordance with ARI 880 and ARI 885. Attach ARI seal to each terminal
unit.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and
parts lists.
C. Include directions for resetting constant volume regulators.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum
eight years experience.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
23 36 00 – 1
MS0612
2.01
MANUFACTURED UNITS; VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV)
A. VAV and dual duct terminal units shall be the type, size, and capacity shown and shall be mounted in the
ceiling or wall cavity and shall be suitable for single duct system applications. Actuators and controls shall
be as specified in Section 23 09 23, Direct Digital Control Systems. Unit enclosures shall be constructed
of galvanized steel not lighter than 22 gauge or aluminum sheet not lighter than 18 gauge. Single or
multiple discharge outlets shall be provided as required. Units with flow limiters are not acceptable. Unit
air volume shall be factory preset and readily field adjustable without special tools. Reheat coils shall be
provided as indicated. A flow chart shall be attached to each unit. Acoustic performance of the terminal
units shall be based upon units tested according to ARI 880. Sound power level shall be as indicated.
Discharge sound power shall be shown for minimum and 1-1/2 inches water gauge inlet static pressure.
Lining shall be minimum 1 inch thick neoprene or vinyl coated glass fiber insulation, 1.5 lb./cu ft density,
meeting NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. Variable volume, single duct, terminal
units shall be provided with a calibrated air volume sensing device, air valve or damper, actuator, and
accessory relays. Units shall control air volume to within plus or minus 5 percent of each air set point
volume as determined by the thermostat with variations in inlet pressures from 3/4 inch to 6 inch water
gauge. Internal resistance of units shall not exceed 0.4 inch water gauge at maximum flow range.
External differential pressure taps separate from the control pressure taps shall be provided for air flow
measurement with a 0 to 1 inch water gauge range. Unit volume controller shall be normally open upon
loss of power. Unit shall be pressure independent.
2.02
HEATING COILS
A. Hot Water Heating Coil: 1/2 inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins, leak tested
under water to 200 psig pressure, factory installed.
B. Capacity: Refer to schedule on the contract drawings.
2.03
WIRING
A. Factory mount and wire controls. Mount electrical components in control box with removable cover.
Incorporate single point electrical connection to power source.
B. Factory mount transformer for control voltage on electric and electronic control units. Provide terminal
strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source.
2.04
CONTROLS
A. Refer to Section 23 09 23, Direct Digital Control Systems.
2.05
TESTS
A. Provide testing of units.
B. Test run volume dampers and controls. Check sequence of operation and air flow limits at factory prior to
shipment.
C. Automatic flow controller shall be capable of maintaining air flow to within 5 percent of set point with inlet
static pressure variations up to 4 inches.
D. Maximum Casing Leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at rated inlet static pressure.
E. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at one inch.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide ceiling access doors where units are not easily accessible.
C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.
D. Where boxes are installed above suspended ceilings, the air terminal units shall be installed not more
than 2’ (to the bottom of the units) above the ceiling.
23 36 00 – 2
MS0612
3.02
ADJUSTING
A. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation from 100
percent of design flow to 30 percent full flow. Set units with heating coils for minimum 30 percent full flow.
END OF SECTION
23 36 00 – 3
MS0114
SECTION 23 37 00:
PART 1
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Diffusers.
B. Diffuser boots.
C. Registers/grilles.
D. Door grilles.
E. Louvers.
F. Roof hoods.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
C. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.
D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 90A.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Provide product data for items required for this project.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Rectangular, stamped, multi-core type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern.
B. Provide surface mount or inverted T-bar type frame. Face is to be 24"x24" when mounted in suspended
ceilings.
C. Fabricate of steel with baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Provide radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from
diffuser face.
2.02
CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille, 4-way
deflection. To be install only where indicated.
23 37 00 – 1
MS0114
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C. Fabricate of aluminum extrusions with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.
2.03
CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch louvers.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.
C. Fabricate of aluminum with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade
dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.
2.04
WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch maximum spacing with
spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face, double deflection.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C. Fabricate of steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with
20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.
E. In gymnasiums, blades shall be front pivoted, welded in place or securely fastened to be immobile.
2.05
WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch spacing, with spring or other device to set blades,
horizontal face.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting.
C. Fabricate of steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with
20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade
dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.
E. In gymnasiums, blades shall be front pivoted, welded in place, or securely fastened to be immobile.
2.06
DOOR GRILLES
A. V-shaped louvers of 20 gage steel, one inch deep on 1/2 inch centers.
B. Provide 20 gage steel frame with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance on both sides of door, with
factory finish. Color to be selected by government from standard manufacturer’s colors (minimum 9
colors).
2.07
LOUVERS
A. Provide 6 inch deep, storm type louvers with blades on 45 degree slope, heavy channel frame, bird screen
with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake. Provide insect screens on intake louvers.
B. Fabricate of 12 gage extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish to facilitate field
painting. Louvers are to be factory painted standard color to match adjacent surfaces as closely as
possible, unless otherwise directed.
2.08
ROOF HOODS
A. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Fabricate of galvanized steel, minimum 16 gage base and 20 gage hood, or aluminum, minimum 16 gage
23 37 00 – 2
MS0114
base and 18 gage hood; suitably reinforced; with removable hood; bird screen with 1/2 inch square mesh
for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake, and factory coated to match color of roof panels, unless otherwise
directed. Provide insect screens on intake louvers.
C. Mount unit on minimum 12 inch high curb base with insulation between duct and curb.
D. Make hood outlet area minimum of twice throat area.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and as indicated on drawings.
B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, regardless of whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
F. Where louvers and grilles are to be installed in existing openings, contractor shall verify dimensions prior
to ordering.
G. Install louvers and grilles plumb and level.
H. Grilles installed in exterior soffits shall be painted to match the color of soffit.
I.
When diffusers or grilles are cut into a ceiling tile, the diffuser or grille shall be supported independently of
the ceiling tile.
END OF SECTION
23 37 00 – 3
MS0114
SECTION 23 51 00:
PART 1
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fabricated breechings.
B. Manufactured chimneys for gas fired equipment.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, General Requirements.
B. ASHRAE - Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter "Chimney, Gas, Vent, and Fireplace Systems."
C. ASTM A653/A653m - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed by
the Hot-Dip Process.
D. ASTM A1011/A1011M – Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, with
Improved Formability .
E. NFPA 54 – National Fuel Gas Code.
F. NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances.
G. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
H. UL 441 - Standard for Gas Vents.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Breeching: Vent Connector.
B. Chimney: Primarily vertical shaft enclosing at least one vent for conducting flue gases outdoors.
C. Smoke Pipe: Round, single wall vent connector.
D. Vent: That portion of a venting system designed to convey flue gases directly outdoors from a vent
connector or from an appliance when a vent connector is not used.
E. Vent Connector: That part of a venting system that conducts the flue gases from the flue collar of an
appliance to a chimney or vent, and may include a draft control device.
1.04
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Factory built vents and chimneys used for venting natural draft appliances shall comply with NFPA 211
and be UL listed and labeled.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for installation of natural gas burning appliances and equipment.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
BREECHING
A. Fabricate of ASTM A1011/A11011 carbon steel. Fabricate breechings less than 24 inch diameter of
ASTM A653/A653M galvanized sheet steel, lock forming quality with ASTM A525 G90 zinc coating.
B. Fabricate breechings from following minimum gages. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible.
1. Sizes up to 12 inches: 18 gage.
2. Sizes 13 inches to 24 inches: 16 gage.
3. Sizes 25 inches to 36 inches: 14 gage.
4. Sizes 37 inches to 60 inches: 12 gage.
5. Sizes over 60 inches: 10 gage.
23 51 00 – 1
MS0114
C. For breechings less than 24 inches diameter provide groove seam (pipe lock or flat lock) with end joints
beaded and crimped.
D. Reinforce rectangular breeching with angle frames and round breeching with flanged girth joints or angle
frames. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
1. Sizes up to 30 inches: No reinforcing required.
2. Sizes 31 inches to 36 inches: 1-1/2 inches x 1-1/2 inches x 3/16 inch, at 60 inch centers.
3. Sizes 37 inches to 60 inches: 2 inches x 2 inches x 1/4 inch, at 60inch centers.
4. Sizes over 60 inches: 3 inches x 3 inches x 1/2 inch, at 60 inch centers.
E. Fabricate breeching fittings to match adjoining breechings. Fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal
to breeching diameter. Limit angular tapers to 20 degrees maximum.
2.02
TYPE B DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTS
A. Fabricate inner pipe of sheet aluminum, and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel, tested in compliance
with UL 441.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with recommendations of ASHRAE - Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter
"Chimney, Gas, Vent, and Fireplace Systems", and NFPA 54.
C. Install breechings with minimum of joints. Align accurately at connections, with internal surfaces smooth.
D. Support breechings from building structure, rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors to hold
to shape and prevent buckling. Support vertical breechings, chimneys, and stacks at 12 foot spacing, to
adjacent structural surfaces, or at floor penetrations. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible for equivalent duct support configuration and size.
E. For Type B double wall gas vents, maintain UL listed minimum clearances from combustibles. Assemble
pipe and accessories as required for complete installation.
F. Level and plumb chimney and stacks.
G. Clean breechings, chimneys, and stacks during installation, removing dust and debris.
H. At appliances, provide slip joints permitting removal of appliances without removal or dismantling of
breechings, chimneys, or stacks.
I.
Provide minimum length breeching to connect appliance to chimney. Provide Type B chimney
continuously from appliances.
J.
Paint all venting and vent caps located above roof to match the color of the roof. Paint should be selected
for type of surface it is being applied and expected operating temperatures of that surface.
END OF SECTION
23 51 00 – 2
MS0612
SECTION 23 52 34:
PART 1
FINNED WATER TUBE BOILERS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Boilers.
B. Controls and boiler trim.
C. Hot water connections.
D. Fuel connection.
E. Collector, draft hood, and chimney connection.
F. Collector, induced draft fan, and chimney connection.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AGA - Directory of Certified Appliances and Accessories.
B. AGA Z21.13 - Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers.
C. AGA Z223.1 - National Fuel Gas Code.
D. ASME Section IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code – Heating Boilers.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Submit product data indicating general assembly, components, controls, safety controls, and wiring
diagrams.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation.
1.04
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance.
B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, cleaning procedures, replacement
parts list, and maintenance and repair data.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum
three years experience.
1.06
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ASME Section IV and AGA Z21.13 Code for construction of boiler.
B. Conform to NFPA 70 code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment.
C. Units: AGA certified.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect units before, during, and after installation from damage to casing by leaving factory shipping
packaging in place until immediately prior to final acceptance.
1.08
WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for heat exchanger.
23 52 34 –1
MS0612
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Hot water, forced draft boiler with horizontal grid, finned tube heat exchanger, gas burning system,
refractory combustion chamber, controls, and boiler trim.
B. The minimum efficiency of the boilers shall be 82% unless specified on drawings.
2.02
FABRICATION
A. Assembly of finned copper or steel tube heat exchanger within combustion chamber conforming to ASME
SEC4 requirements, and tested for maximum working pressure of 160 psi.
B. Line combustion chamber with interlocking refractory insulating panels.
C. Fabricate exchanger of finned copper tubing with baffles and sealed into bronze or cast iron headers with
silicone O-ring gaskets or finned steel tubing with baffles and welded into steel headers.
D. Finish with galvanized steel jacket with factory applied baked enamel.
E. Heat exchanger shall be cleanable from either side, and from one side without removal of external piping.
2.03
FUEL BURNING SYSTEM
A. Induced Draft Gas Burner: Stainless steel burners for modulating firing and natural gas with adjustable
combustion air supply, gas pressure regulator, diaphragm gas valves, manual shut-off, intermittent spark
or glow coil ignition, thermister flame sensing device, and automatic 100 percent safety gas shut-off.
B. Provide gas burner safety controls to energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame, prevent
opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, energize blower motor,
and after air flow proven and slight delay, allow gas valve to open.
C. Provide flue gas collector, built-in induced draft fan, with draft gage and draft providing switches.
D. Provide wire brush for cleaning fire side surfaces.
2.04
TRIM
A. ASME rated pressure relief valve set at 45 psi.
B. Low water cut-off with manual reset and inlet flow switch to automatically prevent burner operation when
water falls below safe level or on low flow through boiler.
C. Operating temperature controller with outdoor reset to control burner operation to maintain supply water
temperature.
D. High limit temperature controller with automatic reset for burner to prevent boiler water temperature from
exceeding safe system temperature.
2.05
CONTROLS
A. Provide pre-wired, factory assembled electric controls. Controls shall include pilot safety and
thermocouple transformer, 24-volt gas valve, manual main and pilot valves.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide for connection to electrical service.
C. Provide connection of gas service in accordance with AGA Z233.1.
23 52 34 –2
MS0612
D. Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drain.
E. Install boiler on concrete housekeeping base, 6 inches thick and sized minimum 4 inches larger than
boiler base.
3.02
CLEANING, START-UP, & TESTING
A. After hydrostatic testing boiler shall be thoroughly cleaned by filling the system with a solution consisting of
either 1 pound caustic soda or 1 pound trisodium phosphate (as recommended by manufacturer) per 50
gallons of water. The water shall be heated to approximately 150 degrees F and the solution circulated in
system for a period of 48 hours. The system shall then be drained and thoroughly flushed out with fresh
water. Strainers and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned. Fill and remove all air in system.
B. Prepare and start systems as recommended by equipment manufacturer. Setup boiler to operate at its
highest combustion efficiency at all firing rates by measuring flue gas temperature and percentage of
CO 2 .
C. Perform operational test to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operational efficiency. Submit report
with a minimum of the following information. Test shall be witnessed by the contract inspector and base
maintenance personnel. A copy of the report shall be submitted with O & M data.
1) Certification of balancing
2) Time, date, and duration of test
3) Outside and inside dry bulb temperatures
4) Temperature of hot water supply leaving boiler
5) Temperature of heating return water from system at boiler inlet
6) Boiler make, type, serial number, design pressure, and rated capacity
7) Fuel burner make, model, and rated capacity
8) Circulating pump make, model, and rated capacity, and ammeter and voltmeter readings for pump
motor operation
9) Flue gas temperature at boiler outlet
10) Percent carbon dioxide in flue gas
11) Grade or type and calorific value of fuel
12) Draft at boiler flue gas exit
13) Quantity of water circulated
14) Quantity of fuel consumed
15) Stack emission pollutant concentration
All indicating instruments shall be read at half hour intervals unless otherwise directed. Tests shall
demonstrate that fuel burner, combustion, and safety controls operate and meet the requirements of this
contract.
D. Instruct base personal in start-up, operation, and maintenance of system.
END OF SECTION
23 52 34 –3
MS0114
SECTION 23 64 10:
PART 1
PACKAGE AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes chiller package, charge of refrigerant and oil, controls and control connections, chilled
water connections, condenser water connections, refrigerant connections, auxiliary water connections,
starters.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 550/590 - Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Coefficient of Performance (COP) - cooling: The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy
input, in consistent units, for a complete refrigerating system or some specific portion of that system under
designated operating conditions.
B. Integrated Part-Load Value (IPLV): A single-number figure of merit based on part-load EER, COP, or
kW/ton expressing part-load efficiency for air-conditioning and heat pump equipment on the basis of
weighted operation at various load capacities for the equipment.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loads, required clearances,
and location and size of field connections. Indicate valves, strainers, and thermostatic valves required for
complete system.
B. Product Data: Submit rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements,
wiring diagrams, and control diagrams.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and
include startup instructions.
D. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit. Indicate results of leak test and
refrigerant pressure test.
E. P-413 Baked Phenolic Coating (Heresite Coating) reports.
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 – Contract Closeout
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls,
and accessories. Include trouble-shooting guide.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to ARI 550/590 code for testing and rating of scroll or screw water chillers.
B. Performance Ratings: Coefficient of Performance (COP) and Integrated Part-Load Value (IPLV) not less
than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
23 64 10 – 1
MS0114
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum
three years experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience
approved by manufacturer.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 – Material and Equipment.
B. Accept chillers on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect indoor chillers from weather by storing under roof.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for complete assembly including materials
labor and refrigerant.
B. Equipment shall be tagged with a durable, oil and water resistant tag. Tag shall include the following
information: equipment covered, Manufacturer, Model #, Serial #, warranty period, contract #, and
warranty contact and phone #.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of complete assembly for one year from Date of Beneficial Occupancy.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 PACKAGED WATER CHILLERS
A. Product Description: Factory assembled and tested, packaged, air cooled, liquid chillers consisting of
scroll or screw compressors (type as indicated on drawings), compressor motor, condenser, evaporator,
refrigeration accessories, instrument and control panel including gages and indicating lights, auxiliary
components and accessories, and motor starters. Units shall operate using R-134a, R-410a refrigerant or
as indicated on drawings.
B. Capacity Criteria: The unit shall have a minimum Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) of 10 and a minimum
Integrated Part Load Value (IPLV) 13.8,or as indicated on the drawings, whichever is the most stringent,
in accordance with ARI 550 for scroll and screw packages.
2.02 HERMETIC COMPRESSORS
A. Scroll Compressors:
1. Unit: Direct drive, hermetic, 3600 RPM, fixed compression, scroll motor-compressor with control
panel.
2. Features: Centrifugal oil pump, sump oil heater, oil level sight glass, oil charging valve, two point
lubrication for each motor bearing, flooded lubrication for journal and thrust bearings, check valve on
scroll discharge port, crank case heater.
3. Motor: Suction-gas cooled, hermetically sealed, squirrel cage induction.
2.03 SEMI-HERMETIC COMPRESSORS
A. Screw Compressors:
1. Unit: Direct drive, semi-hermetic 3600 RPM, fixed compression, rotary screw compressor with control
panel.
2. Features: Differential refrigerant pressure oil pump, oil heater, oil separator and filter and oil charging
valve.
3. Motor: Suction gas-cooled, hermetically sealed, squirrel cage induction.
4. Automatic Capacity Reduction: Continuously variable slide valve with infinitely variable control to 15
percent of full load.
2.04 EVAPORATOR
A. Shell and tube type, seamless or welded steel construction with cast iron or fabricated steel, heads,
seamless copper tubes or red brass tubes with integral fins, rolled or silver brazed into tube sheets.
Furnish multiple refrigerant circuits on multiple compressor units.
23 64 10 – 2
MS0114
B. Design, test, and stamp refrigerant side for 225 psig working pressure and water side for 150 psig
working pressure, in accordance with ASME Section VIII.
C. Insulate with 0.75 inch minimum thick flexible closed-cell insulation with maximum K factor of 0.26.
D. Furnish water drain connection and thermometer wells for temperature controller and low temperature
cutout.
2.05 CONDENSER COILS, FANS AND MOTORS
A. Coils: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Furnish sub-cooling circuits as
applicable. Air test under water to 425 psig, and vacuum dehydrate. Seal with holding charge of
refrigerant. Condenser coil shall have baked on phenolic thermosetting resin coating.
B. Coil Guard: Expanded metal or Louvered.
C. Vertical direct or belt driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on discharge, equipped with
roller or ball bearings with grease fittings extended to outside of casing.
D. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase permanent split capacitor or 3 phase, with
permanent lubricated ball bearings and built-in current and thermal overload protection.
2.06 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
A. Factory furnished and piped.
B. Furnish for each refrigerant circuit:
1. Liquid line solenoid valve.
2. Filter dryer (replaceable core type).
3. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.
4. Thermal expansion for maximum operating pressure.
5. Charging valve.
6. Insulated suction line.
7. Discharge line check valve.
8. Compressor discharge service valve.
9. Pressure relief device.
2.07 CONTROLS
A. Chiller shall be provided with a complete factory-mounted, prewired microprocessor based control
system. Controls shall contain as a minimum a digital display, acceptable gauges, an on-auto-off switch,
power wiring, and control wiring. Controls package shall provide operating controls, monitoring
capabilities, programmable setpoints, safety controls and DDC interface. The Contractor shall properly
coordinate the chiller control system with the temperature-control system specified. Temperature sensing
elements shall be located as recommended by the manufacturer. Capacity reduction may be provided by
cylinder unloading, by sequence operation of two or more, or by a combination of both methods. Provide
chiller plant manager to communicate wit DDC control system where required by drawings. Coordinate
with controls sequence of operation.
B. Chiller shall be provided with the following adjustable operating controls:
1. Leaving chilled water temperature control.
2. Adjustable timer or automated controls to prevent a compressor from short cycling.
3. Automatic lead/lag controls for multi-compressor units.
4. System capacity control to adjust the unit capacity in accordance with the system load and the
programmable set points. Controls shall automatically re-cycle the chiller on power interruption.
5. Startup and head pressure controls to allow system operation at all ambient temperatures down to 0
degrees F unless otherwise noted.
C. During normal operations, the control system shall be capable of monitoring and displaying the following
operating parameters. Access and operation of the display shall not require opening or removing any
panels or doors.
1. Entering and leaving chilled water temperatures.
2. Self diagnostic.
3. Operation status.
4. Operating hours.
23 64 10 – 3
MS0114
5.
6.
7.
8.
Number of starts.
Compressor status.
Refrigerant discharge and suction pressures.
Oil pressures.
D. The control system shall be capable of being reprogrammed directly at the unit. The programmable
setpoints shall include the following.
1. Leaving chilled water temperature.
2. Time clock/calendar date.
E. Chiller shall be provided with the following safety controls which automatically shutdown the chiller and
which require manual reset.
1. Low chilled water temperature protection.
2. High condenser refrigerant discharge pressure protection.
3. Low evaporator pressure protection.
4. Chilled water flow detection.
5. High motor winding temperature protection.
6. Low oil flow protection if applicable.
7. Motor current overload and phase loss protection.
F. Chiller shall be provided with the following safety controls which automatically shutdown the chiller and
which provide automatic reset.
1. Over/under voltage protection.
2. Chilled water flow interlock.
3. Phase reversal protection.
G. The control system shall be capable of communicating all data to a remote integrated DDC processor
through a single shielded cable. The data shall include as a minimum all system operating conditions,
capacity controls, and safety shutdown conditions. The control system shall also be capable of receiving
a remote unit start/stop.
H. The chiller controls shall be provided with a BACnet or LON Gateway to allow communication with the
Hurlburt Field Central HVAC monitoring system.
2.08 HEAT TAPE
A. Heat tape shall be wrapped around the exterior, above ground pipe, pipe fittings and heat exchanger
before insulation is installed. The heat tape sensor shall be installed against the coldest part of the pipe
and heat exchanger and the tape patterns on the pipe and pipe fittings shall be as recommended by the
cable manufacturer and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Heat tape shall consist of a metal
sheathed mineral nickel-chromium resistance wire having an abrasion-resistant thermoplastic sheath
external to the metal sheath. Resistance wire shall be capable of dissipating not less than 4 watts per
linear foot. Tape shall be furnished in standard manufactured lengths and shall not be cut or shortened
when installed. Tape shall closely follow surface to be heated and shall be free from overlaps, sharp
kinks, or bends. Spacing shall be uniform to prevent formation of hot spots. Automatic heat control shall
be accomplished by a thermostat which shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Thermostat shall be set to maintain 34 degrees F. Heat tape shall be suitable for
120-volt single-phase service. Heat tape thermostats shall have a suitable range set to maintain 38
degrees F or shall be of the non-adjustable type designed to maintain 38 degrees F at the sensor. Each
thermostat may control the load directly or may control the load through a separate magnetic contractor.
A separate sensor and thermostat shall be provided for each type supply and return line.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install packaged outdoor chiller on concrete foundation minimum 6 inches thick and 6 inches wider than
equipment base on each side.
B. Install units on vibration isolation.
C. Install the following piping accessories on evaporator chilled water piping connections.
1. On inlet:
23 64 10 – 4
MS0114
a. Thermometer well for temperature controller.
b. Thermometer.
c. Strainer.
d. Flow switch.
e. Flexible pipe connection.
f. Pressure gage.
g. Shut-off valve.
2. On outlet:
a. Thermometer.
b. Flexible pipe connection.
c. Pressure gage.
d. Shut-off valve.
D. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning.
E. Install chiller accessories furnished loose for field mounting.
F. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.
G. Install control wiring between chiller control panel and field mounted control devices.
H. Provide connection to electrical service.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Furnish cooling season start-up, winter season shutdown service, for first year of operation. When initial
start-up and testing takes place in winter and machines are to remain inoperative, repeat start-up and
testing operation at beginning of first cooling season.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of one day to leak test, refrigerant pressure
test, evacuate, dehydrate, charge, start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation and
maintenance.
B. Furnish initial charge of refrigerant and oil.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Demonstrate system operations and verify specified performance. Demonstrate low ambient operation
during winter testing for air-cooled condensers.
END OF SECTION
23 64 10 – 5
MS0114
SECTION 23 73 00: INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED:
A. Packaged air handling units.
1.02
REFERENCES:
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
C. AMCA 211 – Certified Ratings Program - Product Rating Manual for Fan Air Performance
D. AMCA 300 – Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
E. AMCA 301 – Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
F. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
G. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
H. ANSI/AMCA 204 – Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans
I.
ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
J.
ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
K. ARI 430 - Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units.
L. ARI Guideline D – Application and Installation of Central Station Air-Handling Units.
M. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound
Absorbing Material).
N. NEMA MG1 – Motors and Generators.
O. NEMA ICS1 – Standard for Industrial Control and Systems; General Requirements
P. NEMA ICS2 – Standard for Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600V.
Q. NEMA ICS6 – Enclosures.
R. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
S. ASHRAE 52 – Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by
Particle Size
T. IEEE 112 – Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Fan Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301; tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430.
D. Filter Media: ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II.
E. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410.
23 73 00 – 1
MS0114
F. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issues
complete catalog data on total product.
1.04
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit shop drawings and product.
B. Shop drawings shall indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction
details, and field connection details.
C. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor electrical
characteristics, and gages and finishes of materials.
D. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
E. Submit sound power levels for both fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity.
F. Submit product data of filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames.
G. Submit UVC Emitter Ultraviolet disinfection data.
H. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control
wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field installed wiring.
I.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and
wiring diagrams.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00 in factory fabricated protective containers,
with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid
damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place,
bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.08
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two of each filter.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. Air Systems Equipment
1. Multi-Fan Array: The fan array system shall consist of multiple, direct driven plenum fans
(arrangement as specified in design documents) with fan wheels that are rated and certified with tests
and procedures in accordance with AMCA 211 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA
Certified Ratings Program and constructed per the AMCA requirements for the duty specified. Each
fan/motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced to meet AMCA 204. The AHU with multiple fan
array(s) shall provide the scheduled acoustical performance. CFMs and External Static Pressures, as
specified. The fan array shall consist of multiple fan/motor cells spaced in the air way tunnel cross
section to provide a uniform air flow and velocity profile across the entire air way tunnel cross section
and components contained therein. The fan cell dimensions shall be variable such that each fan rests
in an identically sized cube or cell. There shall be no blank off plates or “spacers” between adjacent
23 73 00 – 2
MS0114
fan columns or rows to position fans across the air way tunnel. The fan array shall provide, as a
minimum, the quantity of fans scheduled or shown on the plans, in order to produce a uniform air flow
profile and fan velocity profile within the airway tunnel of the air handling unit. Each fan/motor
assembly in the fan array shall be removable through an access door located on the discharge (outlet)
side of the fan array without requiring the disassembly of the unit and / or the removal of any wall or
roof panels. Each fan/motor cell shall be provided with an individual backdraft damper. Each fan
assembly shall be supplied with a complete flow measuring system which indicates airflow in Cubic
Feet per Minute. The flow measuring system shall consist of flow measuring stations,
transducers/transmitters and controller(s). A BACnet IP BAS Communication Interface shall be
provided by the AHU manufacturer and shall require a single interface point at each multiple fan array
system control panel by the project controls contractor. Motors shall be NEMA Design B; T-FRAME
mounted on an adjustable steel base. All motors shall be tested to IEEE 112, test method B and rated
per NEMA MG1, Part 31 “Inverter Fed Motors”. All motors in the multi-fan arrangement shall be
provided with individual Motor Protection for thermal overload protection.
2. Coils: Coils shall be fin-and-tube type constructed of seamless copper tubes and aluminum or copper
fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Copper tube wall thickness shall be a minimum of
0.020 inches. Aluminum fins shall be 0.0075 inch minimum thickness. Copper fins shall be 0.0045
inch minimum thickness. Casing and tube support sheets shall be not lighter than 16 gauge
galvanized steel, formed to provide structural strength. When required, multiple tube supports shall
be provided to prevent tube sag. Each coil shall be tested at the factory under water at not less than
400 psi air pressure and shall be suitable for 200 psi working pressure. Coils shall be mounted for
counterflow service. Coils shall be rated and certified according to ARI 410. Coils shall have a
maximum of 8 fins per inch. Provide UVC germicidal lamps downstream of the cooling coil.
a. Water Coils: Water coils shall be installed with a pitch of not less than 1/8 inch per foot of the
tube length toward the drain end. Headers shall be constructed of cast iron, welded steel or
copper. Each coil shall be provided with a plugged vent and drain connection extending through
the unit casing.
3. Air Filters: Air filters shall be listed according to requirements of UL 900.
a. Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters: Filter thickness and efficiency shall be as shown on the
drawings.. At minimum filters shall be 2 inch depth, sectional, disposable type of the size indicated
and shall have an average efficiency of 25 to 30 percent when tested according to ASHRAE 52.
Initial resistance at 500 feet per minute shall not exceed 0.36 inches water gauge. Filters shall be
UL Class 2. Media shall be nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat. A wire support grid bonded
to the media shall be attached to a moisture resistant fiberboard frame. All four edges of the filter
media shall be bonded to the inside of the frame to prevent air bypass and increase rigidity.
b. Holding Frames: Frames shall be fabricated from not lighter than16-gauge sheet steel with
rust-inhibitor coating. Each holding frame shall be equipped with suitable filter holding devices.
Holding frame seats shall be gasketed. All joints shall be airtight.
c. Filter Gauges: Filter gauges shall be dial type, diaphragm actuated draft and shall be provided for
all filter stations, including those filters which are furnished as integral parts of factory fabricated
air handling units. Gauges shall be at least 3-7/8 inches in diameter, shall have white dials with
black figures, and graduations and shall have a minimum range of 1 inch beyond the specified
final resistance for the filter bank on which each gauge is applied. Each gauge shall incorporate a
screw operated zero adjustment and shall be furnished complete with two static pressure tips with
integral compression fittings, two molded plastic vent valves, two 5 foot minimum lengths of 1/4
inch diameter vinyl tubing, and all hardware and accessories for gauge mounting.
4. UVC Germicidal Lamps: Provide high output UVC germicidal lamps specifically designed for use in
HVAC Air Handling unit applications. Components shall include a housing, reflector, high efficiency
electronic power source, emitter sockets and emitter tube. The output of the UVC Emitters shall be no
less than 10 µW/cm2 at one meter in a 400 fpm airstream at 45 degrees F as tested in accordance
with the general provisions of IES Lighting Handbook, 1981 Applications Volume. Fixture shall be field
mounted and shall have a warranty for a period of no less than one year.
a. UVC Emitter tube: Emitter tube shall be of high output, hot cathode, T5 (15mm) diameter, and
medium bi-pin type. They shall produce 95% of their energy at 254 nm and be capable of
producing the specified output at airflow velocities to 1000fpm at temperatures of 35 -170 degrees
F. UVC emitters shall produce no ozone or secondary contamination.
B. Air Handling Units
1. Factory-Fabricated Air Handling Units: Units shall be single-zone draw-through type as indicated.
Units shall include fans, coils, airtight insulated casing, prefilters, adjustable V-belt drives, belt guards
for externally mounted motors, access sections where indicated, vibration-isolators, and
appurtenances required for specified operation. Vibration isolators shall be as indicated. Each air
handling unit shall have physical dimensions suitable to fit space allotted to the unit and shall have the
23 73 00 – 3
MS0114
capacity indicated. Air handling unit shall have published ratings based on tests performed according
to ARI 430.
a. Casings: Casing sections shall be 2 inch double wall type constructed of a minimum 18 gauge
galvanized steel, or 18-gauge steel outer casing protected with a corrosion resistant paint finish
according to paragraph FACTORY PAINTING. Inner casing of double-wall units shall be
minimum 20 gauge solid galvanized steel. Casing shall be designed and constructed with an
integral structural steel frame such that exterior panels are non-load bearing. Exterior panels
shall be individually removable. Removal shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit.
Casings shall be provided with inspection doors, access sections, and access doors as indicated.
Inspection and access doors shall be insulated, fully gasketed, double-wall type, of a minimum
18-gauge outer and 20-gauge inner panels. Doors shall be rigid and provided with heavy duty
hinges and latches. Inspection doors shall be a minimum 12 inches wide by 12 inches high.
Access doors shall be minimum 24 inches wide and shall be the full height of the unit casing or a
minimum of 6 ft., whichever is less. Access Sections shall be according to paragraph AIR
HANDLING UNITS. Drain pan shall be double-bottom type constructed of 16 gauge stainless
steel, pitched to the drain connection. Drain pans shall be constructed water tight, treated to
prevent corrosion, and designed for positive condensate drainage. When 2 or more cooling coils
are used, with one stacked above the other, condensate from the upper coils shall not flow across
the face of lower coils. Intermediate drain pans or condensate collection channels and
downspouts shall be provided, as required to carry condensate to the unit drain pan out of the air
stream and without moisture carryover. Each casing section handling conditioned air shall be
insulated with 1-1/2 pound density fibrous glass material having a thermal conductivity not greater
than 0.23 Btu/hr-sf-F. Factory applied fibrous glass insulation shall conform to ASTM C 1071 and
shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A. A latched and hinged inspection door, shall be
provided in the fan and coil sections. Additional inspection doors, access doors and access
sections shall be provided where indicated.
b. Heating and Cooling Coils: Coils shall be provided as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT, for types indicated.
c. Air Filters: Air filters shall be as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT for types
and thickness indicated.
d. Fans: Fans shall be double-inlet, centrifugal type with each fan in a separate scroll. Fans and
shafts shall be dynamically balanced prior to installation into air handling unit, then the entire fan
assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory after it has been installed in
the air handling unit. Fans shall be mounted on steel shafts accurately ground and finished. Fan
bearings shall be sealed against dust and dirt and shall be precision self-aligning ball or roller
type. Bearing life shall be L50 rated at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by AFBMA 9 and
AFBMA 11. Bearings shall be permanently lubricated or lubricated type with lubrication fittings
readily accessible at the drive side of the unit. Bearings shall be supported by structural shapes,
or die formed sheet structural members, or support plates securely attached to the unit casing.
Bearings may not be fastened directly to the unit sheet metal casing. Fans and scrolls shall be
furnished with coating indicated. Fans shall be driven by a unit-mounted or a floor-mounted motor
connected to fans by V-belt drive complete with belt guard for externally mounted motors. Belt
guards shall be the three sided enclosed type with solid or expanded metal face. Belt drives shall
be designed for not less than a 1.3 service factor based on motor nameplate rating. Motor
sheaves shall be variable pitch for 25 hp and below and fixed pitch above 25 hp as defined by ARI
Guideline D. Where fixed sheaves are required, variable pitch sheaves may be used during air
balance, but shall be replaced with an appropriate fixed sheave after air balance is completed.
Variable pitch sheaves shall be selected to drive the fan at a speed that will produce the specified
capacity when set at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. Motors for V-belt drives
shall be provided with adjustable bases. Fan motors shall have splashproof enclosures. Motor
starters shall be magnetic across-the-line type with general-purpose enclosure. Unit fan or fans
shall be selected to produce the required capacity at the fan static pressure.
e. Access Sections and Filter/Mixing Boxes: Access sections shall be provided where indicated and
shall be furnished with access doors as shown. Access sections and filter/mixing boxes shall be
constructed in a manner identical to the remainder of the unit casing and shall be equipped with
access doors. Mixing boxes shall be designed to minimize air stratification and to promote
thorough mixing of the air streams.
f. Dampers: Dampers shall be as specified in Section 23 09 23.
g. AHU’s shall be provided with ultra violet lights in the air handling unit on the discharge side of the
coiling coil and in the mixing box before the coils. The lights shall be wired and switched
separately from the air handling unit. Label switch as the ultra violet light switch.
23 73 00 – 4
MS0114
C. Motors and Starters: NEMA MG 1, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2. Determine specific motor
characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters. Provide motors to
operate at full capacity with a voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of the motor voltage rating.
Motor size shall be sufficient for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed its full load nameplate
current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under the most severe conditions
likely to be encountered. When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, the Contractor
shall make the necessary adjustments to the wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to
accommodate equipment actually provided. Provide phase loss protection on all 3 phase motors. Provide
general-purpose type starter enclosures in accordance with NEMA ICS 6.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with ARI Guideline D.
B. Assemble high pressure units by bolting sections together. Isolate fan section with flexible duct
connections.
C. Install unit on vibration isolators if not internally isolated.
D. Install emitters and fixtures downstream of the cooling coil at right angles to the coil fins in sufficient
quantity and in such an arrangement so as to provide an equal distribution of UVC energy on the coil and in
the drain pan. To maintain energy efficiency, the UVC produced shall be of the lowest possible reflected
and shadowed losses. Provide interlock switch on the access to the UVC emitters to turn the light off when
access is opened. Install provided Caution Labels on all accesses to the UVC emitters.
END OF SECTION
23 73 00 – 5
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 00:
PART 1
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES:
A. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (Current edition and updates)
B. UFC 3-501-01, Electrical Engineering (Current edition and updates)
C. UFC 3-520-01, Interior Electrical Systems (Current edition and updates)
D. UFC 3-530-01 Design: Interior, Exterior Lighting and Controls (Current edition and updates)
E. UFC 3-550-01, Exterior Electrical Power Distribution (Current edition and updates)
F. UFC 3-560-01 Electrical Safety, O & M (Current edition and updates)
G. UFC 3-535-01 Visual Air Navigation Facilities (Current edition and updates)
1.02
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products,
and accessories in a single submittal.
C. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A. Electrical: Conform to NFPA 70.
B. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
1.04
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS:
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to
Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Project Engineer before proceeding.
C. Within 30 days of receipt of notice to proceed and prior to starting installation, the Contractor shall submit to
the Contracting Officer for approval a complete set of shop drawings to include all material and equipment
proposed for installation Sealed by a registered electrical engineer or by a registered professional engineer
having at least four years of current experience in the design of electrical systems. The individual’s name,
signature, and professional engineer number shall be included on all final design documents. All electrical
system designs must be reviewed and stamped by an electrical engineer.
PART 2
(NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. New Underground Systems in Project shall conform to the following:
1. Riser Pole (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Shall have as a minimum; 15 kv Fused cutouts rated for the system, 9 kv arresters, and applicable
rated mounting and support hardware.
2. Conduit (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
26 05 00 - 1
MS0612
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a. Shall be 5 inch, PVC, schedule 40 or 5 inch red-colored High Density Polyethylene (HDPE. duct for
underground installations.
b. Primary Feeders shall be encased in 3 in concrete minimum or 5 to 6 feet below finished grade if not
encased in concrete.
Old / Replaced overhead system shall be removed in total and disposed of by the contractor. (unless
otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
New transformers, primary sectionalizing enclosures, bypass switches, and associated hardware shall be
mounted on a concrete base pad. (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Concrete pad shall be 6-inch minimum free concrete surface area at all sides of transformer.
b. 6 inches minimum pad thickness, 4 inches may below grade
c. Concrete to be 3500 psi rated minimum strength
d. Provide opening in concrete slab for primary and secondary in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
All areas disturbed by trenching / digging for system installation shall be returned to the original (or better)
condition prior to beginning of project.
a. Under NO circumstances are RUNWAY, AIRCRAFT PARKING APRONS, and TAXIWAYS to be
removed for installation of an underground system.
1. These areas are to be DIRECTIONAL BORED UNDER and nonmetallic flexible raceway (HDPE)
shall be installed for system installation.
b. The Contract Officer may approve otherwise and written authorization must be obtained prior to
beginning project.
Handholds or Pull boxes shall be placed at "ALL" underground circuit connections where a device is used
for the connection.
a. Minimum of 18-inch square accessible, covered, opening.
b. Strength of handholes and their frames shall be vehicle load rated at all locations and conform to the
requirements of IEEE C2.
c. Precast concrete handholes shall have the required strength established by ASTM C 478.
d. Frames covers shall be made of grey cast iron and a machine-finished seat shall be provided to
ensure a matching joint between frame and cover. Cast iron shall comply with ASTM A 48, Class
30B, minimum.
e. Handhole shall be provided with sump hole.
f. Provide slack wrap of cable in handhole.
Cable fault indicators shall be installed on all cables in primary junction cabinets and 3 and 4 way
switches.
a. Cable fault indicators shall be automatically reset type which will return the indicator to “no fault” or
non-tripped position with inrush current restraint – delayed trip..
b. Unit shall be either single phase or three phase with remote indicator mounting option to provide
convenient mounting on the panel enclosure. Single phase unit shall be provided with a single current
sensing core assembly and a single indicator. Three phase unit shall have three independent
sensing cores and one indicator assembly that contains three flags.
c. Unit shall be voltage powered unit and completely sealed and submersible.
d. Trip Level: set (ampere) to as specified by contracting officer.
Finish: All pad-mounted equipment shall be painted to meet ANSI standards for corrosion resistant
coatings. Color of all equipment shall match Federal Standard 595B, color 20095. This coating shall be a
factory finish. All pad-mounted equipment located South of U.S Highway 98 (Soundside) shall be
Stainless Steel.
B. Above Ground Systems in Project
1. New installed utility, light, and/or communication poles shall conform to the following: (unless otherwise
specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Pole and Foundation must be certified to withstand a 120 mph wind load with a 1.3 gust factor as a
complete assembly. Calculations shall be provided and certified by a registered Professional
Engineer.
b. Poles will be placed no closer then 125 feet to an aircraft parking apron, runway, or taxiway.
c. The Contract Officer may approve otherwise and written authorization must be obtained prior to
beginning project.
2. All electrical devices shall be rated for outdoor/weather use NEMA-3.
3. All primary connections to the system shall have fused cutouts, arresters, and applicable hardware rated
for the system connection.
26 05 00 - 2
MS0612
4. All external mounted electrical cutout/switch boxes shall be rated NEMA-3, fused, total phase
disconnects.
C. Conductor and conductor sizes shall conform to the following:(unless otherwise specified in drawings or
specs.)
1. Conductors shall be of copper or copper strand
2. Rated for an ambient temperature of no less then 75 degrees C.
3. Maintain the circuit loads with no more then a 2 percent voltage drop.
4. Rated to maintain a 1.5 designed circuit load as a minimum.
5. Conductor and insulation rated for the circuit voltage, with 600 VAC as the minimum standard.
6. Conductor used on load circuits of voltage 110 VAC or higher shall be of a minimum size no smaller then
#12 AWG, copper.
7. Conductor used on Service Drops, transformer to building, of voltage 110 VAC or higher shall be of a
minimum size no smaller then #000 AWG, copper.
8. Conductor used on all primary circuits, 12.4 KV and higher, shall be of a minimum size no smaller then #2
AWG, copper.
D. General Standards, minimums (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
1. Control Voltage: 120 VAC
2. Conduit: PVC (schedule 40), EMT, or HDPE.
3. Secondary system voltage: 208/120 VAC, 3 phase, 4 wire
4. Primary system voltage: 12470 VAC, 3 phase
5. Transformers: liquid cooled, DELTA - WYE connected
6. Building interior junction ("J") boxes: 4" metal utility with blank cover.
3.02
A
TRAINING
All training will be accomplished by the manufacturer of the equipment installed not by the Installing
Company. The Contracting Officer will approve all training dates and times. All training will be done within 90
days of final acceptance of the project. Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 day on site training for
maintenance personnel and 5 days of technical training to the government at the manufacturing facility.
Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting
and diagnostics exercises. The contractor shall furnish all literature, materials and training aids. Room and
board costs shall be included for two government personnel. Factory training shall occur within 3 months of
system acceptance. The training days will be Monday through Friday between 0700 and 1500.
END OF SECTION
26 05 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 26 05 19
PART 1
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building wire and cable.
B. Underground feeder and branch circuit cable.
C. Wiring connectors and connections.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
B.
National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in
Air-Handling Spaces.
C.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1. UL 1277 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional OpticalFiber Members.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
C. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems (Current Addition)
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as
required to meet Project Conditions.
C. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and
lengths required.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN rated at 75 degrees C.
26 05 19 - 1
MS0114
E. Minimum size: no less then Size #12 AWG on any load bearing circuit
2.02
UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUIT CABLE:
A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type UF.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.03
WIRING METHODS
A. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN in conduit.
B. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings.
3.04
INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.
B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
C. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
D. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
F. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
G. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature
rise.
H. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape un-insulated
conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.
I.
Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG
and smaller.
J.
Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG
and smaller.
3.05
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.
3.06
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
B. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's
recommended values.
C. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.
26 05 19 - 2
MS0114
END OF SECTION
26 05 19 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 26:
PART 1
GROUNDING AND BONDING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding electrodes and conductors.
B. Equipment grounding conductors.
C. Bonding.
1.02
REFERENCES
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.
International Electrical Testing Association:
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
National Fire Protection Association:
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.
1.03
GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. Rod electrode.
1.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms except as noted on the drawings.
B. All grounding and bonding shall comply with NFPA 70, section 250.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections.
C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation
and installation of exothermic connectors.
1.06
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
C. AIR FORCE INSTRUCTION 32-1065 (Current Addition)
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
ROD ELECTRODE
A. Material: Copper.
B. Diameter: 3/4 inch.
C. Length: 20 feet.
26 05 26 - 1
MS0612
2.02
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Material: Bronze.
2.03
WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Foundation Electrodes: 2 AWG.
C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified
resistance to ground.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, ground rod shall be driven into ground until top of rod is approximately 1foot
below finished grade.
D. Install 2 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing where indicated.
E. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
F. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch
circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
G. Bond all separately derived systems (SDS) including foundation reinforcement steel and building steel to main
electrical ground. Communication, fire, video, etc., systems are considered SDS.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.
B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with
test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. Provide full fall of
potential graph and submit as test result. Resistance shall not exceed 25 Ohms.
END OF SECTION
26 05 26 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 27:
PART 1
SECONDARY GROUNDING
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Power system grounding.
B. Communication system grounding.
C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding.
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to grounding electrodes.
B. Provide communications system ground rod at point of service entrance and connect to the building ground at
the service entrance with 1/0 bare copper conductor.
C. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of
electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle
ground connectors, and plumbing systems.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Indicate the layout of ground ring, location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of
grounding electrode conductor.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Ground Rods: Copper-encased steel, 3/4-inch (19 mm) diameter, minimum length 20 feet.
B. Ground Conductor: 1/0 bare copper.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Provide a separate insulated equipment-grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each
end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing.
B. Provide grounding and bonding at the pad-mounted transformer.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.
B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with
test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. Provide full-fall ofpotential graph and submit as test result. Resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms.
END OF SECTION
26 05 27 - 1
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 29:
PART 1
SUPPORTING DEVICES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
1.02
REFERENCES
ASTM International:
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
FM Global:
FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For
Property Conservation.
National Fire Protection Association:
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
WH - Certification Listings.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.
B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and
conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
C. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors
2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners.
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors.
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
PART 3
EXECUTION
26 05 29 - 1
MS0612
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to
present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch (25 mm)
off wall.
END OF SECTION
26 05 29 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 33:
PART 1
CONDUIT
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal conduit.
B. Flexible metal conduit.
C. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
D. Electrical metallic tubing.
E. Nonmetal conduit.
F. High Density Polyethylene Nonmetallic Flexible Raceway (HDPE)
G. Fittings and conduit bodies.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
F. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
G. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
H. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate
Metal Conduit.
I.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.
J.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
K. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
1.03
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid tight flexible metal conduit, metallic
tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, fittings, and conduit bodies, HDPE (Red Colored).
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
26 05 33 - 1
MS0612
C. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems (Current Addition)
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to
complete wiring system. Conceal all conduits within the construction unless noted otherwise.
D. Underground conduit installations under existing aircraft aprons, ramps, taxiways, and runways will be
installed by boring, unless written authorization is received from the contracting officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.
B. Underground Installations:
1. More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid galvanized steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic
conduit.
2. Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall and in or Under Slab on Grade: Use thick wall nonmetallic
conduit.
C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid galvanized steel.
D. In Slab Above Grade:
1. Use thick wall nonmetallic conduit.
E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid galvanized steel, electrical metallic tubing, thick wall nonmetallic conduit.
F. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing.
2. Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing.
2.02
METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): ANSI C80.3.
C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1, aluminum fittings may be used with steel conduit.
2.03
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
26 05 33 - 2
MS0612
2.04
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1, steel setscrew type.
2.05
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
2.06
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) RACEWAY
A. Description: Red Colored, NEMA TC 7; SDR 13.5.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 6 and TC 8.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and
split hangers.
E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel provide space on each
for 25 percent additional conduits.
F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 05 29.
G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports
H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
I.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
J.
Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
M. Do not cross conduits in slab.
N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
O. Maintain 12-inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F (40 degrees C).
P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and
clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20
minutes, minimum.
26 05 33 - 3
MS0612
S. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations.
T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp
changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch (50
mm) size.
U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses control and
expansion joints.
W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26.
Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 53.
AA. HDPE: Install HDPE by Directional boring, plowing, or open trench.
3.02
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
END OF SECTION
26 05 33 - 4
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 34:
PART 1
BOXES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pull and junction boxes.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
B. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.03
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
1.05
SUMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on all boxes to be used.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location
required for box to serve intended purpose.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer.
2.02
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment
connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.
C. Support boxes independently of conduit that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12
inches (300 mm) of box.
D. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
26 05 34 - 1
MS0612
END OF SECTION
26 05 34 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 53:
PART 1
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
C. Conduit markers.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
C. All Labeling shall comply with UFC 3-560-01 Electrical Safety, O&M(Current Addition)
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.
B. Locations: Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
Example: PANEL A.
C. Letter Size:
1. Use 1/4-inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. Use 1/2-inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
2.02
WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Tape type wire markers.
B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load
connection.
C. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams and
equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring.
2.03
CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Description: Tape.
B. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet.
C. Spacing: 20 feet on center.
D. Color:
1. 208 Volt System: Gray.
2. Telephone System: Blue.
3. Low Voltage System: Black.
26 05 53 - 1
MS0612
2.04
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Description: 6-inch wide plastic tape, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical
lines; Style No. 210 ELE as manufactured by Seton.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02
APPLICATION
A. Install nameplate and labels parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive.
C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches below
finished grade.
END OF SECTION
26 05 53 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 26 24 16:
PART 1
PANELBOARDS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated
Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
3. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.
4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
5. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
6. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
C. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
D. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes
2. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards.
3. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
4. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
5. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
6. UL 1699 - Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters.
F. United Facilities Criteria:
1. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems (Current Addition)
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere
rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
1.04
SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish 2 each to Owner.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS:
A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB1; circuit breaker type.
B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 3R.
C. Provide surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge and flush lock all keyed alike.
Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
D. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide copper ground bus in
all panelboards.
26 24 16 - 1
MS0114
E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240-volt panelboards.
F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with
common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits.
Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.
G. All panels to be provided with Main Breakers.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb, in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Height: 4 ft.
C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
D. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting
changes required to balance phase loads.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard
between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads
within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches,
and fuses.
END OF SECTION
26 24 16 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 26 28 19:
PART 1
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Disconnect switches.
B. Fuses.
C. Enclosures.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
International Electrical Testing Association:
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and short
circuit.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, and load interrupter enclosed knife switch
with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle
lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
B. Non-fusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, and load interrupter enclosed knife
switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position.
Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Enclosures: Type as indicated on Drawings.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
END OF SECTION
26 28 19 - 1
MS0612
SECTION 26 35 33
PART 1
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surge Protection Device
1.02
STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.
IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
IEEE C62.45 - Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
NEMA LS 1 - Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices.
National Fire Protection Association:
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Surge Protection Device shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules of metal
oxide varistors (MOV) with each MOV individually fused. The modules shall be designed and constructed in a
manner that ensures MOV surge current sharing. Use of gas tubes, silicon avalanche diodes or selenium
cells are unacceptable unless documentation from a nationally recognized laboratory demonstrates current
sharing of all dissimilar components at all surge current levels.
2.02
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Nominal system operating voltage shall be:
120/240 VAC, 1 Phase, 3Wire Plus Ground
120/208 VAC, 3 Phase, 4 Wire Plus Ground, Wye.
277/480 VAC, 3 Phase, 4 Wire Plus Ground, Wye or as shown on drawings
B. Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV):
The surge suppressor and all components in the suppression path (including all current diversion
components) maximum continuous operating voltage shall be greater than 115% of the nominal system
operating voltage to ensure the ability of the system to withstand temporary RMS overvoltage (swell
conditions).
C. Operating Frequency: The operating frequency range of the system shall be at least 47 - 63 Hertz.
2.03
FUSE AND THERMAL DISCONNECT
1. Surge Protection Device shall be internally fused to safely disconnect itself from the electrical system
without damaging itself and rated to allow maximum specified surge current capacity. Surge
Protection Device that utilize a single fuse to protect two or more suppression paths are not
acceptable.
2. Fuse shall be capable of interrupting the AC power line short circuit fault current (KAIC). Short circuit
26 35 33 - 1
MS0612
rms current shall be at least 200KAIC or as shown on drawings.
3. Thermal disconnect device shall be installed on or near each MOV element that responds to
excessive MOV heating by mechanically disconnecting the MOV from the power line.
2.04
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Protection Modes: The SPD shall provide protection as follows: All modes, L-N or L-L, L-G and N-G (Where
applicable)
Note: L = Line, G = Ground, N = Neutral.
B. UL 1449 Ratings: The maximum UL 1449 listed surge ratings for each and/or all of the specified protection
modes shall not exceed the following in any mode of protection:
Nominal System Voltage
120/240 or 120/208 volt
277/480 volt
Surge Voltage Rating
400 volts
800 volts
C. Noise Attenuation: The units shall be UL 1283 Listed as an electromagnetic interference filter. The filter shall
provide insertion loss with a maximum of 60 dB from 100 KHz to 100 MHz per 50-Ohm Insertion Loss
Methodology from MIL 220A.
2.05
PERFORMANCE RATINSG
A. Surge Current Capacity:
Location
Main Distribution Panel
Branch Panels
Surge Rating per Mode
150 kA
80 kA
Surge Rating Per Phase (L-N plus L-G)
300 kA
160 kA
2.06
BASIS OF DESIGN
A. Main panel unit Liebert Interceptor Series.
B. Branch Panel units Liebert Accuvar ACV Series.
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A. Surge suppressor at main distribution panel shall have red and green status indicators, audible alarm, and
transient counter.
B. Surge suppressor at branch panels shall have red and green status indicators.
2.08
TESTING
A. Component Testing and Monitoring: Unit shall include an on-line circuit which tests and redundantly monitors
individual components in all protection modes including neutral to ground (where applicable). Units that
require external test sets or equipment are unacceptable.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. The installing contractor shall install the parallel surge suppressor with short and straight conductors as
practically possible. The contractor shall twist the surge suppressor input conductors together to reduce input
conductor inductance. The contractor shall follow the surge suppressor manufacturer's recommended
installation practices as found in the installation, operation and maintenance manual and comply with all
applicable codes.
3.02
TRAINING
A. All training will be accomplished by the manufacturer of the equipment installed not by the Installing
Company. The Contracting Officer will approve all training dates and times. All training will be done within 90
days of final acceptance of the project. Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 day on site training for
maintenance personnel and 5 days of technical training to the government at the manufacturing facility.
Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting
26 35 33 - 2
MS0612
and diagnostics exercises. The contractor shall furnish all literature, materials and training aids. Room and
board costs shall be included for two government personnel. Factory training shall occur within 3 months of
system acceptance. The training days will be Monday through Friday between 0700 and 1500.
END OF SECTION
26 35 33 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 28 31 00:
PART 1
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.01
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1. Factory Mutual System (FM) Publication
a) Approval Guide (Equipment, Materials, Services for Conservation of Property) 1989 with Quarterly
Supplements.
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards:
a) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
b) NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.
c) NFPA90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating System.
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
a) Fire Protection Equipment Directory (Jan 1989 with Quarterly Supplements).
b) UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire-Protective Signaling Systems
c) UL 228 Door Closers-Holders, with or without Integral Smoke Detector.
d) UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
(1) e) UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Application
e) UL 464 Audible Signal Appliances.
f) UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective, Signaling Systems.
g) UL 864 Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.
4. Unified Facility Criteria (UFC) 3-600-01, Design: Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities
5. Unified Facility Criteria (UFC) 4-021-01 Design and O&M: Mass Notification Systems (dated 9 April 08,
change 1, January 2010)
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in
Air-Handling Spaces.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
A. Submit shop drawings showing all system components under provisions of Section 01 33 00. Plans and
calculations must be prepared by a registered professional fire protection engineer or individual that has
obtained National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, Fire Alarm Systems Level IV. All
fire alarm system designs must be reviewed and stamped by a registered professional fire protection
engineer. If the MNS portion is used to notify occupants of fire condition than it to must adhere to this
provision.
B. Submit manufacturer’s data on all components used in the system under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
C. The authority having jurisdiction and the alarm shop 1 SOCES/CEOFA shall be notified prior to
installation or alteration of equipment or wiring. Complete information regarding the system or system
alterations, including specifications, type of system or service, shop drawings, input/output matrix, battery
calculations, and notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations shall be submitted for approval.
D. Under no circumstances will installation begin prior to approval of SUBMITTALS.
E. Submit Qualification of Installer per PART 2, Paragraph 2.05.
1.03
SCOPE
A. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed
in accordance to the project specifications and drawings. Only an addressable fire alarm
system shall be accepted.
B. Basic Performance:
1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on
NFPA Style 6 (Class A) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
28 31 00 - 1
MS0612
2.
Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A as part of an addressable device
connected by the SLC Circuit.
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A as part of an addressable
device connected by the SLC Circuit.
4. On Style 6 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on the system
Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the
ability to report an alarm.
5. Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or
outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
C. Basic System Functional Operation
1. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the
following functions shall immediately occur:
a. The system alarm LED on the system display shall flash.
b. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound.
c. A backlit LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition,
including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises.
d. The fire alarm strobe horns shall sound or if MNS, the clear strobe shall flash and the fire
message shall be announced through the fire/MNS speakers.
e. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated each new fire alarm
control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence.
f.
All system output programs assigned via control by event interlock programming to be activated
by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (notification
appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.
g. An associated signal is sent VIA Monaco transceiver to the fire department.
1.04
Operation
A. Activation of any automatic fire detection device or manual station shall result in the continuous operation
of all fire audio/visual devices in the building, shutdown of air-handling units below 2000CFM, and
activation of the radio transceiver for transmission of a radio signal to central monitor location. The fire
alarm system shall be wired and all associated conduits shall be Class A in accordance with NFPA 72
ch.6.4.2.2.2. All suppression system shall activate a separate zone for each water flow device on the
transceiver for off normal conditions and water flow. Flow, tamper switches and Duct detectors shall not
be on the same zone in the BTXM transceiver. Any alarm or trouble condition silenced at the panel shall
not remove that condition from the radio transceiver inputs.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
General Requirements
A. Materials and equipment shall be new standard products of the manufacturer's latest design, and suitable
to perform the function intended. Components of two or more models will not be combined to form a
single control unit. This equipment shall be in service and supported by the manufacture for five years
after the install date. Where two or more pieces of equipment must perform the same functions, the same
manufacturer shall produce this equipment. The name of the manufacturer shall appear on all major
components. Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed the same as the Monaco Radio Transceiver. (CORE
NUMBER C415A). Fire alarm points shall be labeled by device type and location. There shall only be
one central fire alarm panel located in any facility. Heat detectors and all associated conduit and wiring
shall be removed from the facility when a fire sprinkler system is installed.
2.02
Quality Requirements
A. All materials and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the UL, or the FMS for fire-alarm
systems of the type indicated. The Contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished under this
specification conform to these requirements. The UL label or seal, or listing in the UL Fire Protection
Equipment Directory will be accepted as evidence that the items conform to UL requirements. The FMS
label or seal, or listing in the Factory Mutual Approval Guide will be accepted as sufficient evidence that
the items conform to the FMS requirements.
2.03
Shop Drawing and System Designer Qualifications
A. Within 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed and prior to starting installation, the Contractor shall
submit to the Contracting Officer for approval a complete set of shop drawings to include all material and
28 31 00 - 2
MS0612
equipment proposed for installation Sealed by a registered fire protection engineer, by a registered
professional engineer having at least four years of current experience in the design of fire protection and
detection systems, or by an engineering technologist qualified at NICET Level IV in fire systems. The
individual’s name, signature, and professional engineer number or NICET certification number shall be
included on all final design documents. All fire alarm system designs must be reviewed and
stamped by a registered professional fire protection engineer. Include manufacturer's
name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement,
device addresses, candela ratings, speaker wattage taps settings, complete wiring point to point
diagrams, and conduit layouts. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations.
2.04
Spare-Parts Data
A. After submittal of the list of equipment, and no later than 2 months prior to contract scheduled completion,
the Contractor shall furnish two copies of spare parts data for each different item of equipment listed. The
data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies; a list of parts and supplies that are either normally
furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment or specified below to be furnished as part of
the contract and a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient operation
for a period of 120 days at the particular installation.
2.05
Qualifications of Installer
A. System Installer: Installation personnel shall be qualified or shall be supervised by persons who are
qualified in the installation, inspection, and testing of fire alarm systems and shall be on-site at all times
during system installation, modification or upgrade. Evidence of qualifications or certification shall be
provided when requested by the authority having jurisdiction. Qualified personnel shall include, but not be
limited to, one or more of the following:
1. Personnel who are factory trained and certified for fire alarm system installation of the specific type
and brand of system being installed
2. Personnel who are certified by a nationally recognized fire alarm certification organization acceptable
to the authority having jurisdiction
3. Personnel who are registered, licensed, or certified by a state or local authority.
The Contracting Officer shall reject any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such
qualifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
Pre-Construction Test
A. Prior to starting any work on existing systems the contractor shall schedule through the contracting office
a fire alarm system pre-test to establish the baseline for the alarm system. Any discrepancies identified
shall be signed off by the contractor, 1 SOCES/CEOFA Alarm Shop, and contracting officer or his/her
representative. Failure to conduct this test will hold the contractor solely responsible for all discrepancies
during final inspection.
3.02
Installation and Wiring
A.
1. The FACP and control units shall be installed in a room directly accessible from the building exterior
and shall be condition as office space.
2. Runs of conduit, tubing, wire and cable shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, red
in color and parallel or perpendicular to walls and partitions. Installation of wiring shall conform to
NFPA 70.
NOTE: 300.11
3. Wiring located within the cavity of a non–fire-rated floor–ceiling or roof–ceiling assembly shall not be
secured to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly, including the ceiling support wires. An independent
means of secure support shall be provided and shall be permitted to be attached to the assembly.
4. All wiring shall be installed in conduit (minimum ¾” EMT). The sum of the cross-sectional areas of
Individual conductors shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the conduit.
5. All wiring for the system shall be solid wires. The fire alarm system wiring shall not share the same
conduit as other low voltage wiring, such as cameras, access control, etc.
6. Wiring for audible visual circuits shall be color-coded red for positive and black for negative.
7. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be
placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29.
28 31 00 - 3
MS0612
8. Conduits shall not enter the Fire Alarm Control Panel, or any other remotely mounted Control Panel
equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer.
9. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as
recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system.
10. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but
not less than 18 AWG for Initiating Device Circuits and signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG for
Notification Appliance circuits.
11. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20
amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Main Power Distribution Panel as Fire Alarm; circuit
breaker shall be protected from operation by unauthorized personnel by a circuit breaker guard. Fire
Alarm Control Panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be
grounded. Label all wire termination with shrink wrap labels, clearly marked with the circuit information.
12. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by recognized testing agency for use with a protective
signaling system. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and
unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 12,500 feet.
13. System components shall be securely fastened to their supports independently of the wiring.
14. Existing wiring in facilities being renovated shall not be reused and must be removed.
B.
Twist-on connectors (wire nuts) shall not be used. Connections shall be permitted to be made using a
set-screw, pressure-type conductor connector, provided a means is used to prevent the set screw from
bearing directly on the conductor.
C.
Mount the BTXM radio transceiver panels at a height of 60 inches, measured from the
Floor to the top of the panel.
D.
All circuits shall be installed CLASS A, wiring and conduit shall comply with NFPA 72 CH. 6.4.2.2.2.
E.
All modules shall have their address clearly and permanently labeled on the outside of the devices.
F.
All address modules shall be integrated with the device.
G.
Fire circuits shall not be run in the same raceway, cable or conduit as high voltage circuits (120vac).
H.
Fire alarm circuits derived from the fire alarm panel shall not be terminated on the same device with
120VAC power unless it is a relay designed for the use.
3.03
Audible and Visual Alarm Devices
A. Audible and Visual devices shall be furnished to indicate an alarm throughout the building. Devices shall
be ceiling mounted unless waived in writing by the AHJ. All devices shall be supervised and operate on
low voltage D.C. furnished by the control panel. All audible devices shall meet U 464.
B. Where audible appliances are installed to provide signals for sleeping areas, they shall have a sound
level of at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level
having a duration of at least 60 seconds or a sound level of at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater,
measured at the pillow level in the area required to be served by the system using the A-weighted scale
(dBA).
C. If any barrier, such as a door, curtain, or retractable partition, is located between the notification appliance
and the pillow, the sound pressure level shall be measured with the barrier placed between the appliance
and the pillow.
D. Where permitted and if ceiling heights allows, and unless otherwise permitted all wall mounted appliances
shall comply with7.5.4 thru 7.5.4.4.8
E. Install clear/white strobes for the building fire alarm system with a factory applied and none removable
word “FIRE” RED in color to alert the occupants for complete evacuation.
F. Signal for occupants to seek information or instructions shall be amber. Provide amber colored strobes
with a factory applied and none removable word “ALERT” RED in color to alert the hearing impaired.
28 31 00 - 4
MS0612
G. Recessed appliances shall not be permitted.
H. Monitoring Integrity of Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Systems.
1. Speaker Amplifier and Tone-Generating Equipment. If speakers are used to produce audible fire
alarm signals, the required trouble signal for NFPA 72, Ch 4.4.7.2.1.1 through 4.4.7.2.1.3 shall be in
accordance with 4.4.3.5. When primary power is available, failure of any audio amplifier shall result
in a trouble signal. When an alarm is present and primary power is not available (i.e., system is
operating from the secondary power source), failure of any audio amplifier shall result in a trouble
signal.
I.
All ceiling mounted devices shall be securely mounted in an approved box attached to the ceiling grid
using a T bar and the ceiling tile shall have clips installed to prevent movement of tiles.
J.
Any system installed where the audible devices are used for fire evacuation shall comply with all the
requirements of 3.03 A-I and shall be tested for system integrity as a fire alarm system.
K. Devices shall not be mixed.
L. Strobe and speakers shall be mounted in the manufacturers back box. If the manufacturer does not
make a box then use the manufacturers recommended box.
3.04 Mass Notification Systems
A. Mass Notification System Functions
1. Notification Appliance Network: The notification appliance network consists of audio speakers
located to provide intelligible instructions at areas as indicated on the drawings.
2. Strobes: Strobes are also provided to alert hearing-impaired occupants. Provide amber colored
strobes with a factory applied and none removable word “ALERT” RED in color to alert the hearing
impaired. Install clear/white strobes for the building fire alarm system with a factory applied and none
removable word FIRE” RED in color to alert the user.
3. Voice Notification: An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and control the
notification appliance network and provide consoles for local operation. Using a console, personnel in
the building can initiate delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and
instructions, and initiate visual strobe notification appliances.
4. Mass notification systems that are integrated with the building fire alarm system shall be consider a
component of the fire alarm system and therefore shall meet all requirements of “Installed Fire Alarm
Systems” subject to the AHJ and inspected as life safety equipment.
5. All power extenders, amplifiers, and control cabinets shall be protected in accordance with NFPA 72
Ch 4.4.5 (2007 Edition)
6. All audio circuits shall be installed in accordance with UFC 4-021-01 chapter 4 (9 April 2008)
Clear/white strobes activated by the fire alarm system shall not operate during those periods when
the amber strobes are in operation, but otherwise shall operate continuously until the fire alarm
system is reset. Switching off the fire alarm strobes shall not cause a trouble at the fire alarm panel.
7. Interface with the FACP to override fire alarm audible and visual notification appliances. The FACP
shall provide supervised circuit integrity of interconnecting wiring between the MNS and FACP.
8. MNS shall temporarily override fire alarm audible messages and visual signals, and provide
intelligible voice commands during simultaneous fire and terrorist events. All other features of the fire
system, including the transmission of signals to the fire department, shall function properly. MNS
messages shall take priority and continue to override fire alarm audible messages until the MNS
message is either manually or automatically ended. If not manually ended, the MNS message will
automatically end after 10 minutes.
9. Provide a supervisory signal if the MNS is used to override fire alarm audible messages and visible
signals during simultaneous fire and terrorist events. The supervisory signal shall be at the FACP and
any remote fire alarm annunciators, and be transmitted to the fire department. The visual
annunciation of the separate supervisory signal shall be distinctly labeled or otherwise clearly
identified.
10. Make general paging or other non-emergency messages available without the activation of strobes.
A separate microphone must be provided for this purpose.
11. Disable use of any microphones intended solely for general paging or other non-emergency
messages upon loss of normal AC power.
12. a. A Local Operating Console (LOC) shall be provided so that the travel distance to the nearest LOC
28 31 00 - 5
MS0612
will not be in excess of 61 m (200 ft) measured horizontally on the same floor. Have a single
switch capable of shutting down all HVAC equipment in the facility in accordance with the
requirements of UFC 4-010-01. The HVAC shutdown switch shall be supervised by the FACP
and have a unique address for each LOC shutdown switch. The LOC shall be clearly marked on
the cabinet with the address information. Label shall be engraved
b. Where MNS is not installed the “AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN” is still required and shall be placed
next to any Fire Alarm Anunciator.
13. AC fail on the MNS system (any component) shall generate a separate trouble to the BTX-M and
transmit to the fire department.
14. No penetration will be made at the top of any control cabinet except as designed by the manufacture
and cannot be altered.
15. The Monaco BTX-M radio shall be capable of receiving Live voice commands and activating the 8
pre-recorded messages from the Monaco D-21 located at Fire Department control room.
3.05
Mass Notification Control Panel
A. Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein.
Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed
from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete
control panel, the unit enclosures shall match exactly. Control unit shall provide power, supervision,
control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and
arranged for easy access. Control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal
building power supply. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages, strobes and
displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide capacity for at least eight pre-recorded
messages. Provide the ability to automatically repeat pre-recorded messages. Provide a secure
microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete outputs to initiate/synchronize
strobes. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local
diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file. Provide all
necessary components to interface with fire alarm and detection system.
B. Cabinet: Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and
also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. No external wires to
pass through cabinet. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin
nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say "Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be less
than one inch high. The cabinet shall be provided in sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged
steel door with cylinder lock keyed to C415A ,and surface mounting provisions. Mount the fire/MNS
panels at a height of no higher than 72 inches, measured from the floor to the TOP of the cabinet.
C. Voice Notification System: The Voice Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72
for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements IEC 60849, IEC 60268, Part 16,
except as specified herein. The system shall be a one-way multi-channel voice notification system
incorporating user selectability of a minimum 8 distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of
a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages. Textual audible appliances shall produce a slow
whoop tone for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is reset
or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers on appropriate floor, but not in
stairs or elevator cabs. A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a
microphone input at the control panel or live voice transmitted from the fire department. When using the
microphone, live messages shall be broadcast through speakers throughout the building. The system
shall be capable of operating all speakers at the same time. The live voice from the ACU shall be
priority 1; live voice from the fire department is priority 2; and the live voice from the LOC shall be
priority 3. The digitalized voice message shall consist of a non-volatile (EPROM) microprocessor based
input to the amplifiers. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry, field wiring, and digital
coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the
appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any other malfunction that
could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the slow whoop tone to
take over all functions assigned to the failed unit. Class "A" Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be
provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of the NAC Circuits shall follow the
operation of the speaker NAC circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level (600 ohms), 25, 70.7
or 100 volt output. The audio amplifier outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS output. The
strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the
ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held microphone shall be provided and, upon activation, shall
take priority over any tone signal, recorded message while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits
28 31 00 - 6
MS0612
activation. All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board diagnostics and
trouble reporting circuits. Form "C" contacts shall be provided for system alarm and trouble conditions.
Circuits shall be provided for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass
Notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble signals to be generated at the Fire
Alarm system but shall transmit a supervisory signal via the BTX-M transceiver to the fire department.
Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other function performed by the Voice
Notification System. PA systems and Background music are not authorized. Messages shall be as
follows:
Priority
Type
*Pre-tone
**Voice
1
Bomb
Threat
Continuous
Male
2
Intruder
Continuous
Male
3
Alternate
Exit
Fire
Continuous
Male
Code 3
Male
Continuous
Male
6
Shelter In
Place
Weather
none
Male
7
All Clear
none
Male
8
Test
none
Male
4
5
Message Script (tones and messages repeat a
minimum of three times)
May I have your attention please! A bomb threat has
been reported in or around the building. Please follow the
pre-plan and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! An intruder/hostile
person has been sighted within or around the building.
Please follow the pre-plan and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! Please evacuate the
building – using the designated alternate exits.
May I have your attention please! A fire emergency has
been reported in the building. While this is being verified,
please leave by the nearest exit and report to your
designated assembly area.
May I have your attention please! Please shelter in place,
and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! The National Weather
Service has issued a severe weather warning for our area.
May I have your attention please! The building emergency
has ended. An all clear has been given. Please resume
normal activities
May I have your attention please! This is a test of the
mass notification system, this is only a test.
D.
Memory: Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use
of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal
to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
E.
Field Programmability: Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable
for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The
system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password
protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment.
3.06
Notification Appliances
A. Mass Notification Speakers: Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464.
Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits. Audible appliances shall generate a
unique audible sound from other devices provided in the building and surrounding area. Surface
mounted audible appliances shall be painted white. Recessed audible appliances shall be installed with a
grill that is painted white with a factory finish to match the surface to which it is mounted.
1. Provide appliances capable of satisfying all Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) and
Americans with Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) Speakers shall conform to the
applicable requirements of UL 1480. Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and
operate with audio line input levels of 100 Vac, 70 Vac, 7 Vac, and 25 Vac, by means of selectable
tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/4, 1/2, 1, and 2 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a
high efficiency speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of 400Hz to
4000Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction. Speakers shall be capable of installation on
standard 4 inch square electrical boxes. All inputs shall be polarized for compatibility with standard
reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring via the Voice Notification System.
2. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of 16
gauges and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete installation.
Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance
for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted.
28 31 00 - 7
MS0612
3. Provide speakers and installation methods compliant with Director of Central Intelligence Directive
(DCID) 6/9 for areas classified as sensitive, compartmented information facilities (SCIF).
4. Verify intelligibility by measurement after installation. Ensure that a Common Intelligibility Scale (CIS)
score greater than .8 is provided in each area where building occupants normally could be found.
Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces (such as metal or concrete) that
are found to cause excessive sound reflections may be permitted to have a CIS score less than .8 if
approved by the DOD installation, and if building occupants in these areas can determine that a voice
signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 33 ft to find a location with a CIS score of
at least .8. Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally present are
permitted to have a CIS score less than .8 if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being
broadcast and they must walk no more than 50 ft to a location with a CIS score of at least .8.
Measurements should be taken near the head level applicable for most personnel in the space under
normal conditions ( e.g., standing, sitting, sleeping, as appropriate). Commercially available test
instruments shall be used to measure intelligibility as specified by IEC 60849 and IEC 60268-16. The
mean value of at least three readings shall be used to compute the intelligibility score at each test
location. The installer is required to demonstrate these test result at commissioning.
5. Strobe and speakers shall be mounted in the manufacturers back box. If the manufacturer does not
make a box, then the user shall use a manufacturers recommended box, speakers shall be totally
enclose so as not to allow dust or flyings to enter.
6. Ensure speakers in the vicinity of the control panel and LOC will not create acoustical feedback or
otherwise interfere with the ability to deliver live voice messages.
B. Visual Notification Appliances: Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements
of UL 1971 and conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Mass Notification Appliances shall
have clear high intensity optic lens and xenon flash tubes. The clear optic lens shall have the special
wording “FIRE”, the amber lens shall have the special wording “Alert” factory embossed on the device.
The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree
angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 75
candelas based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe shall be ceiling-flush mounted only. Where more than two
appliances are located in the same room or corridor, provide synchronized operation.
3.07
Wiring.
A. 1. The MNS control units shall be installed in a room directly accessible from the building exterior.
2. Runs of conduit, tubing, wire and cable shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, painted
red and parallel or perpendicular to walls and partitions. Installation of wiring shall conform to NFPA 70.
NOTE: 300.11
3. Wiring located within the cavity of a non–fire-rated floor–ceiling or roof–ceiling assembly shall not be
secured to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly, including the ceiling support wires. An independent
means of secure support shall be provided and shall be permitted to be attached to the assembly.
4. All wiring shall be installed in conduit (minimum ¾” EMT). The sum of the cross-sectional areas of
Individual conductors shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the conduit.
5. All wiring for the system shall be solid wires. The fire alarm system wiring shall not share the same
conduit as other low voltage wiring, such as cameras, access control, etc.
6. Wiring for audible visual circuits shall be color-coded red for positive and black for negative.
7. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be
placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29.
8. Conduits shall not enter the MNS Control Panel, or any other remotely mounted Control Panel
equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the manufacturer.
9. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as
recommended by the manufacturer of the MNS system.
10. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but
not less than 18 AWG for Initiating Device Circuits and signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG for
Notification Appliance circuits.
11. The MNS Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20
amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Main Power Distribution Panel as MNS, circuit breaker
shall be protected from operation by unauthorized personnel by a circuit breaker guard. MNS
Control Panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded.
Label all wire termination with shrink wrap labels, clearly marked with the circuit information.
12. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by recognized testing agency for use with a protective
signaling system. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and
unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 12,500 feet.
13. System components shall be securely fastened to their supports independently of the wiring.
28 31 00 - 8
MS0612
14. Existing wiring in facilities being renovated shall not be reused and must be removed.
B. Twist-on connectors (wire nuts) shall not be used. Connections shall be permitted to be made using set
screw, pressure-type conductor connector, provided a means is used to prevent the set screw
from bearing directly on the conductor.
C
Mount the MNS panels at a MAX height of 72 inches, measured from the floor to the top of the cabinet.
D. All circuits shall be installed CLASS A, wiring and conduit shall comply with NFPA 72 CH. 6.4.2.2.2.
E. All modules shall have their address, loop and power supply number clearly and permanently labeled on
the outside of the devices.
F. All address modules shall be integrated with the device.
G. MNS circuits shall not be run in the same raceway, cable or conduit as high voltage circuits (120vac).
H. MNS circuits derived from the MNS panel shall not be terminated on the same device with
120VAC power unless it is a relay designed for the use.
3.08
LCD Alphanumeric Display
A. LCD Alphanumeric Display Annunciator: A minimum of at least one annunciator shall be installed.
1. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, back-lit LCD display containing a
minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text.
2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble (Note: must be able to disable trouble
pizo of the annunciator) conditions in the system.
3. Up to 32 LCD annunciators may be connected to a EIA 485 interface. LCD annunciators shall not
reduce the annunciation or point capacity of the system. Each LCD shall include vital system wide
functions such as, System Acknowledge, Silence and Reset.
4. LCD display annunciators shall mimic the main control panel 80 character displays and shall not
require special programming.
5. The LCD annunciator shall have switches which may be programmed for System control such as,
Global Acknowledge, Global Signal Silence and Global System Reset. These switch inputs shall be
capable of being disabled permanently. Mount LCD annunciator at the main entrance to the facility.
3.09
Future Use
3.10
Drawings and Manuals
A. Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish two copies of
"as-built" drawings. Drawings shall show equipment configuration, control panel equipment and
subassembly locations, and the location of all connecting Wiring. Drawings shall include all wiring color
codes and terminal numbers and termination points for all wires. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish
two copies of a manual giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing, and
maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams. The drawings shall include a detailed wiring layout
showing all junction boxes and all system wiring, including number of wires, with speaker and strobe
circuits identified with speaker taps and candela ratings. Show module location and address. The layout
shall be done on the building floor plans and combined with fire detection and alarm system. See section
01 70 00 CONTRACT CLOSE OUT.
3.11
Manual and Fire alarm Stations
A. Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module
status. They shall use a key operated test reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency
operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.
B. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset.
C. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided
on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear in the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm)
or larger.
28 31 00 - 9
MS0612
D. The operable part of each manual fire alarm box shall be not less than 1.1 m (3
1.37 m (4 ft) above floor level.
ft) and not more than
E. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be installed so that they are conspicuous, unobstructed, and accessible.
F. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be located within 1.5 m (5 ft) of the exit doorway opening at each exit on
each floor and located on the side of the opening.
G.
Manual fire alarm boxes shall be mounted on both sides of grouped openings over 12.2m (40 ft) in width,
and within 1.5 m (5 ft) of each side of the opening.
H.
Additional manual fire alarm boxes shall be provided so that the travel distance to the nearest fire alarm
box will not be in excess of 61 m (200 ft) measured horizontally on the same floor.
3.12
Fire-Detecting Equipment
A. Fire detecting equipment shall conform to NFPA 72 and shall be of the following types, as indicated on
the drawings and as approved by the AHJ. All devices shall be addressable, no conventional devices
allowed. Detector circuit design shall be suitable for the types and numbers of detectors, as approved,
and shall limit detector circuit current not to exceed ratings of the detectors and associated relays.
Smoke detectors shall not be installed or have protective cover removed until after the construction
cleanup of all trades is complete and final. Furthermore, during renovation projects, existing detectors
shall be removed and reinstalled or covered during construction.
B. Location: Detecting equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings. Should a conflict occur
between the drawings and the NFPA codes, the NFPA codes shall take precedence. Fire alarm
components will not be installed on building exteriors unless expressly required by NFPA codes and then
must be weather proof. Pull stations shall have removable plastic covers without sounders and be sealed
around their mounting surface. Heat detectors shall be placed to provide total (complete) coverage as
required in NFPA 72.
C. Photoelectric Type Smoke Detectors: Ceiling smoke detectors, which operate on the light scattering or
the light obstruction principle, shall be furnished. In sleeping rooms, ceiling mounted smoke detectors
shall be powered by DC circuits from the FACP, sound an audible alarm within the room only, does not
activate or transmit signal to fire department and if removed from mount or disconnected, send a trouble
signal with room location to the fire alarm panel to be transmitted to the fire department. AC powered
detectors shall not be installed. Where combination heat smoke detectors are installed in sleeping areas,
the smoke detector will operate as indicated above and the heat detector side shall announce a general
alarm throughout the facility and transmit and alarm signal to the fire department. Smoke detectors shall
not be located in a direct airflow or closer than 3 feet from an air supply diffuser or return air opening.
1. The area of protection for smoke detection devices permitted by NFPA 72 must be reduced by 50%
where destratification (ceiling) fans are used. UFC 3-600-01 5-43.1
D. Duct-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and
installed in accordance with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Sampling tubes of sufficient length shall be
provided so that the sampling tube can extend out of the opposite side of the duct for inspection. The
sampling tubes must be secured to the duct on both sides of the duct regardless of size. A remote
key/reset/test switch shall be furnished for duct detectors that are at a location that is not easily
accessible for testing the installed duct detector. The detector housing shall be equipped with a
transparent viewing port which shall permit viewing of detector head Alarm/Power-On indicator -at viewing
angles up to 80 degrees off normal and inspection of cleanliness conditions inside the detector head
mounting chamber. The detector shall be the plug-in type in which the detector base contains terminals
for making all wiring connections. The detector indicator shall blink intermittently during standby
conditions and shall glow red during alarm conditions. All LED's to indicate the operating and alarm
condition and test and reset buttons or test part shall be visible, and accessible, with the unit installed and
the cover in place. Detector operating voltage will be supplied from the DC circuits of the fire alarm panel.
1. Air Handler Units (AHU) with a capacity below 2000CFM shall not have duct smoke detectors
installed but shall be shut down from the fire alarm panel during an alarm activation. AHU’s with
a capacity between 2000 - 15,000 CFM shall have one duct detector installed in the supply air
duct. AHU’s with a capacity greater than 15,000 CFM will have two duct detectors installed, one
in the supply air duct and one in the return air duct. Duct smoke detectors (2000 and larger) will
shut down their respective AHU’s upon activation will initiate a supervisory signal at the fire alarm
28 31 00 - 10
MS0612
panel. The fire alarm panel shall activate a separate zone for duct detectors on the Monaco Radio to
send a supervisory signal to the fire department.
2. A key switch shall be installed to bypass AIR Handler shutdown, for system testing, all other function
shall not be impaired, the switch shall be supervised and send a signal via the Monaco transceiver to
the fire department on a separate and distinct zone.
E. Fixed-Temperature Heat Detectors: Only Addressable Fixed temperature heat detectors shall be
installed. The UL 521 test rating shall be 135 degrees F. or as shown. Heat detectors installed in attics
and mechanical rooms shall be rated at 194 degrees F only. Heat detectors installed in exterior
applications such as open storage units shall be all weather detectors.
3.13
System Components Addressable Devices
A. Addressable Devices General
1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal address switches.
Devices shall be capable of being set to an address in a range of 001 to 159.
2. Addressable devices, which use a binary coded address setting method, such as a DIP switch,
are not an allowable substitute.
3. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire
alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits.
4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs. Both
LEDs shall flash green under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in
regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady red
illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the
LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the system program. An output connection shall
also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.
5. The fire alarm control panel shall provide detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of
the system. The panel on a time of day basis shall automatically adjust sensitivity.
6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and
other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by
UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7.
7. The detectors shall be ceiling mount and shall include a separate twist lock base with tamper proof
feature. Bases shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum,
a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 6 applications. (Applies only to sleeping
quarters)
8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report
that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a
magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel.
9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify
the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).
10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed
environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real-time measured
values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing
the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to
view the current analog value of each detector.
11. Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify
the type of device.
12. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall report an
indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold.
13. Addressable modules shall mount in a 4inch square (101.6 mm square), 21/ 8 inch (54 mm) deep
electrical box.
14. All manual pull stations shall be mounted in the manufactures back box. If the manufacture does not
make a box then use the manufactures recommended box.
B. Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box (manual station)
1. Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the
panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status.
They shall use a key operated test reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency
operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.
2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset.
28 31 00 - 11
MS0612
3. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions
provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75
inches (44 mm) or larger.
4. All manual pull stations shall be mounted in the manufactures back box. If the manufacture does not
make a box then use the manufactures recommended box.
C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector
1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light scattering) principal to send data to the panel
representing the analog level of smoke density.
D. Intelligent Laser Photo Smoke Detector
1. The intelligent laser photo smoke detector shall be a spot type detector that incorporates an
extremely bright laser diode and an integral lens that focuses the light beam to a very small
volume near a receiving photo sensor. The scattering of smoke particles shall activate the
photo sensor.
2. The laser detector shall have conductive plastic so that dust accumulation is reduced
significantly.
3. The intelligent laser photo detector shall have nine sensitivity levels and be sensitive to a
minimum obscuration of 0.03 percent per foot.
4. The laser detector shall not require expensive conduit, special fittings or PVC pipe.
5. The intelligent laser photo detector shall support standard, relay, isolator and sounder
detector bases.
6. The laser photo detector shall not require other cleaning requirements than those listed in
NFPA 72. Replacement, refurbishment or specialized cleaning of the detector head shall not
be required.
7. The laser photo detector shall include two bicolor LEDs that flash green in normal operation
and turn on steady red in alarm.
E. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector
1. The detectors shall use the dual chamber ionization principal to measure products of
combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the analog level of products of combustion.
F. Intelligent Multi Criteria Acclimating Detector
1. The intelligent multi criteria Acclimate detector shall be an addressable device that is
designed to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a single
sensing device. The design shall include the ability to adapt to its environment by utilizing a
built-in microprocessor to determine its environment and choose the appropriate sensing
settings. The detector design shall allow a wide sensitivity window, no less than 1 to 4% per
foot obscuration. This detector shall utilize advanced electronics that react to slow
smoldering fires and thermal properties all within a single sensing device.
2. The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity levels
based on the environment type it is in (office, manufacturing, kitchen etc.) and then have the
ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes (as walls are moved
or as the occupancy changes).
3. The intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signal of
the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in an effort to react hastily in
the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish between a
fire condition and false alarm condition by examining the characteristics of the thermal and
smoke sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actual fire and deceptive
phenomena.
G. Intelligent Thermal Detectors
1. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit
(58 degrees Celsius) fix temp.
H. Future Use
I. Hostile Area Smoke Detector
1. The detector shall be designed to provide early warning smoke detection in environments
where traditional smoke detectors are not practical.
28 31 00 - 12
MS0612
2. The detector shall have a filter system to remove particles down to 25 microns.
3. This filter system shall remove unwanted airborne particles and water mist. This shall allow
the detector to operate in environments where traditional smoke detectors would have
nuisance alarms.
4. The filter system shall consist of 2 filters one of which is field replaceable.
5. The filter system shall have an intake fan to draw air and smoke through the filters into the
sensing chamber.
6. The filter system shall be supervised so that if the filter is clogged or the fan fails the control
panel reports trouble.
7. The filter system shall be powered from 24 VDC separate from the SLC communications.
8. The detector shall utilize a photoelectric sensing chamber.
J. Water-flow Indicator:
1. Water-flow Switches shall be an integral, mechanical, non-coded, non-accumulative retard type.
2. Water-flow Switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time which is conveniently adjustable from
0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30 to 45 seconds.
3. All water-flow switches shall come from a single manufacturer and series.
4. Water-flow switches shall be provided and connected under this section but installed by the mechanical
contractor.
5. Where possible, locate water-flow switches a minimum of one (1) foot from a fitting which changes the
direction of the flow and a minimum of three (3) feet from a valve.
6. Water flow switches shall be wired to an addressable monitoring module, shall activate a non
silenceable alarm at the FACP and transmit a signal from the BTXM on a dedicated Zone.
K. Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser, zone control valve, and standpipe system riser
control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain
valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches.
2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valves shall be secured with a chain and lock.
3. Each valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected as separate addressable points to the
fire alarm system and shall report a separate and distinct supervisory alarm to the fire department
(SPRINKLER TAMPER). Rope type tamper switches are not permitted.
L. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module Note: If approved by AHJ
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of
conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm
control panel SLCs.
2. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Class A operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under
normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication
with the control panel.
3. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be
no larger than 2 3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1 1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). This version need not
include Style D or an LED.
M. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional
2wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device).
2. The IDC zone shall be wired for Class A operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under
normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication
with the control panel.
N. Addressable Control Module
1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one
conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered polarized audio/visual notification appliances.
2. The control module NAC may be wired for Class A signal operation.
3. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the main fire alarm
control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote power supply.
4. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty and rated for a minimum of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC.
O. Addressable Relay Module
28 31 00 - 13
MS0612
1. Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other building functions. The
relay shall be form C and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0 Amps inductive. The relay
coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to same time on the
same pair of wires.
3.14
Suppression Systems
A. Control Valve Supervisory Signal-Initiating Device.
1. Two separate and distinct signals shall be initiated: one indicating movement of the valve from
its normal position (off-normal) and the other indicating restoration of the valve to its normal position.
The off-normal signal shall be initiated during the first two revolutions of the wheel or during onefifth of the travel distance of the valve control apparatus from its normal position.
The off-normal signal shall not be restored at any valve position except normal.
Initiating device for supervising the position of a control valve shall not interfere with the
operations of the valve, obstruct the view of its indicator, or prevent access for valve maintenance.
2. Control valve supervisor signals shall be sent to the fire station as a separate supervisor signal via the
Monaco BTX-M radio transceiver.
3. Fire pumps are required to be monitored. Individual supervisory signals shall be provided for the
following conditions:
a. Fire pump running signals are ALARMS
b. Fire pump loss of power of a phase
c. Fire pump phase reversal
d. Activation of a fire pump supervisory signal shall initiate a supervisory alarm at the system control
panel and at the remote annunciators. Each set of contacts in the fire pump controller shall have
a distinct
address. All fire pump supervisory signals shall be transmitted to Fire Department VIA the BTX-M
radio as a separate supervisory signal.
B. RELEASING SYSTEMS: Testing personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the specific
arrangement and operation of a suppression system(s) and a releasing function(s) and shall be cognizant
of the hazards associated with inadvertent system discharge. Testing shall include verification that the
releasing circuits and components energized or actuated by the fire alarm system are electrically
supervised and operate as intended on alarm.
C.
A complete system discharge test including releasing of suppression agent activated from the overhead
riser shall be required on all new systems and any system that is modified.
Suppression systems and releasing components shall be returned to their functional operating condition
upon completion of system testing.
D. Outside water/Electric gongs shall not be required.
3.15 Kitchen Hood Suppression System
A. Kitchen hood suppression system shall not be installed in a manner that a loss of power would generate
an alarm however; a trouble single would be required. A system test shall be required use air to simulate
agent.
B. All system regardless of size shall be connected to the fire alarm system.
3.16
Access Control
A. Access control shall comply with Life Safety Code 101 para 7.2.1.5.2. Any device or system intended to
actuate the locking or unlocking of exits shall be connected to the fire alarm system serving the protected
premises. All exits connected in accordance with NFPA 72 ch 6.16.7.1 shall unlock upon receipt of any
fire alarm signal by means of the fire alarm system serving the protected premises. Exception: Where
otherwise required or permitted by the authority having jurisdiction or other codes. For all exits connected
in accordance with NFPA 72 ch 6.16.7.1 and where batteries are used in accordance with NFPA 72 ch
4.4.1.5.1(1) as the secondary power supply, the batteries shall not be utilized to maintain these doors in
the locked condition unless the fire alarm control unit is arranged with circuitry and sufficient secondary
power to ensure the exits will unlock within 10 minutes of loss of primary power. If exit doors are unlocked
by the fire alarm system, the unlocking function shall occur prior to or concurrent with activation of any
public-mode notification appliances in the area(s) served by the normally locked exits. All doors that are
28 31 00 - 14
MS0612
required to be unlocked by the fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72 ch 6.16.7.1 through
6.16.7.5 shall remain unlocked until the fire alarm condition is manually reset.
3.17
CONTROL UNIT
A. Control unit (Fire alarm panel) shall be addressable and be fully field programmable from the internal
keyboard unless waived by the AHJ in writing. This shall include the addition of points, modification of
points, and deletions. ALL system software required to perform uploads/downloads by base
maintenance personnel shall be supplied. This includes the program for the facility system as well as the
software and computer key that the laptop computer must use to perform these functions. Any
connecting cables required to interface the laptop with the FACP shall be supplied. Installed as part of the
system in each protected building and shall be approved for use with the fire detecting equipment,
manual fire-alarm stations, and alarm-sounding devices. The unit shall operate with 24 volts DC derived
from its internal AC rectifier/power supply. The control unit circuits shall be exclusively solid state. The
control unit shall be housed in a substantial steel cabinet with lock and key C415A. The cabinet shall be
painted inside and out. The control unit shall include light emitting diodes (LED's)(Lamps or neon tubes
not acceptable) to visually indicate the system condition, e.g., alarm and trouble by zone, system trouble
conditions, primary and backup power supply status, etc. The control unit shall include a means to test all
control unit functions. This includes a system test switch, zone disable, system reset, auxiliary disconnect
and audible trouble silence switch, etc. The silence switch shall be provided with an audible resound
feature. The unit shall supervise all alarm initiating circuits and all alarm sounding circuits. It shall also
provide regulated and unregulated DC power for smoke detectors, which do not operate on zone voltage.
With a point disabled the control unit shall repeat the alarm sequence when a second, third, etc., alarm is
initiated on other zones. All LED's shall be plainly visible when the door on the control unit is closed. The
control unit shall operate separate audible and visual signals when a ground fault is detected in any
supervised circuit or device. It shall sound a distinct audible alarm and activate the notification appliance
circuit throughout the building when any manual or automatic device on the system is activated. The fire
alarm panel shall be equipped with at least one alarm, one supervisory and one trouble relay as integral
components of the panel. Add on relays are not acceptable. Alarm relay and the trouble relay dry
contacts shall be used solely to activate a radio transceiver, Monaco BTXM. Only low voltage (24) will be
brought into the panel for auxiliary functions. The use of plug-on units and special devices not supplied by
the manufacturer in conjunction with this feature is unacceptable. The control unit shall meet the
requirements of UL 864 and shall be listed for NFPA 72.
B.
A separate supervisory module will be provided for sprinkler tampers and supervisory circuits.
C.
Main FACP or network node shall be a NOTIFIER Model NFS2640 or equal and shall contain a
microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply in an economical space saving
single board design. The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used
to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable
modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.
D.
Water-flow Operation
An alarm from a water-flow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm message on
the main panel display, turn on all programmed notification appliance circuits and shall not be
affected by the signal silence switch.
E. Operator Control
1.
Acknowledge Switch:
a. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles
shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from
flashing mode to steady ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this
switch shall advance the LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition.
b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo
sounders.
2. Alarm Silence Switch:
a. Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances
and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification
circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the
confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto
silence timers.
28 31 00 - 15
MS0612
F. Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch:
1. The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits. The drill function shall latch
until the panel is silenced or reset.
G. System Reset Switch:
1. Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically latched initiating devices,
appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their
normal condition.
H. Future Use.
I.
System Capacity and General Operation
1. The control panel or each network node shall provide, or be capable of expansion to 636
intelligent/addressable devices.
2. The control panel or each network node shall include Form C alarm, trouble, supervisory, and
security relays rated at a minimum of 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC.
3. It shall also include two Class A (NFPA Style Z) programmable Notification Appliance Circuits.
4. The Notification Appliance Circuits shall be programmable to Synchronize with System Sensor,
Gentex and Wheelock Notification Appliances.
5. The system shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall
include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color coded system status LEDs, and an
alphanumeric keypad with easy touch rubber keys for the field programming and control of the fire
alarm system.
6. The system shall be programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without the need for
special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. It shall not require replacement of
memory ICs to facilitate programming changes.
7. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs. The
system shall provide a minimum of 8 programmable form C contacts for triggering zones on the
Monaco transceiver. Systems that have limited programming (such as general alarm), have
complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or require a laptop personal computer are not
considered suitable substitutes. The FACP shall support up to 20 logic equations, including "and,"
"or," and "not," or time delay equations to be used for advanced programming. Logic equations shall
require the use of a PC with a software utility designed for programming. The system shall provide a
minimum of 8 programmable form C contacts triggering zones on the Monaco Transceiver.
8. The FACP or each network node shall provide the following features:
a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation shall also include a
smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be filtered out.
b. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 5.
c. Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent), to warn of excessive
smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation.
d. Nine sensitivity levels for alarm, selected by detector. The alarm level range shall be .5 to 2.35
percent per foot for photoelectric detectors and 0.5 to 2.5 percent per foot for ionization detectors.
The system shall also support sensitive advanced detection laser detectors with an alarm level
range of .03 percent per foot to 1.0 percent per foot. The system shall also include up to nine
levels of Pre-alarm, selected by detector, to indicate impending alarms to maintenance personnel.
e. The ability to display or print system reports.
f. Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance personnel when a
detector enters verification 20 times.
g. PAS pre-signal, meeting NFPA 72 6.8.1.3 requirements.
h. Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software.
i. Self optimizing pre-alarm for advanced fire warning, which allows each detector to learn its
particular environment and set its pre-alarm level to just above normal peaks.
j. Cross zoning with the capability of counting: two detectors in alarm, two software zones in alarm,
or one smoke detector and one thermal detector.
k. Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address.
l. Control by time for non-fire operations, with holiday schedules.
m. Day/night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity.
n. Device blink control for sleeping areas.
9. The FACP shall be capable of coding main panel node notification circuits in March Time (120 PPM),
Temporal, and California Code. The panel shall also provide a coding option that will synchronize
28 31 00 - 16
MS0612
specific strobe lights designed to accept a specific "sync pulse." Notification Appliances shall meet
the requirements specified in chapter 7 of NFPA 72.
J.
Remote LCD annunciator’s will be required. Exact numbers and location will be determined by design and
approved by the AHJ at least one annunciator will be installed. The location of an operated initiating
device shall be annunciated by visible mean and at location accessible to first responders. Visible
annunciation shall be by an alphanumeric display. The visible annunciation of the location of operated
initiating devices shall not be canceled by the means used to deactivate alarm notification appliances.
K. Protection of Fire Alarm System. Automatic smoke detection shall be provided at the location of each fire
alarm control unit(s), notification appliance circuit power extenders, and supervising station transmitting
equipment to provide notification of fire at that location.
L.
Audible Trouble Signal Silencing Means. The panel shall not utilize a key function to control unauthorized
access to the panel.
M.
No penetration will be made at the top of any control cabinet except where provided by manufacture and
shall not be altered.
3.18
TRANSCEIVERS
A. Radio transceiver shall be provided for interface of the building fire alarm system and the existing Base
central monitor receiver.
B. The transceiver required is a Building Transceiver BTX-M with a minimum of one transceiver, one relay
board and one audio board manufactured by Monaco Enterprises, Inc.
C. Wiring used to interface the transceiver alarm and trouble Inputs with the fire alarm control panel shall be
no greater in size than 18 AWG. Mount the radio at a height of 54 inches, measured from the floor.
D. The frequency of operation for the transceiver shall be 163.5375 MHz.
E. The minimum zone shall be as follows:
1, Fire Alarm/trouble
2, Sprinkler Flow
3. Sprinkler Tamper
4. MNS override of a fire alarm signal
5. Duct Detector supervisory
F. No penetration will be made at the top transceiver cabinet.
G. 1SOCES\CEOFA alarm shop will program the BTXM radio.
3.19
ANTENNA
A. Antenna: Antenna Monaco Assembly Part No. 190-400-00. Antenna shall be installed in accordance with
Hurlburt Field Specification 28 31 00 Part 3, section 3.19. Lightning arrestor kit shall be Monaco
Assembly Part No. 190-007-01.
B. Contractor shall provide a radio frequency (RF) power meter to test and verify that the standing wave
ratio (SWR) is within the manufacturer’s specifications.
C. Future Use.
D.
Frequency: Antennas shall be designed to operate on the specified radio frequency of 163.5375 MHZ.
E. Environmental Requirements: All antenna assemblies shall be of corrosion-resistant materials and
designed for reliable operation under adverse conditions including 100-mph winds, ice, snow, and rain.
Antenna mast shall be ¾ inch rigid aluminum and use a ¾ coupling at the top for the pl 259 connector.
Antenna structure to include brackets, lightning arrestor box and all conduits shall be painted in
accordance with Hurlburt Field regulation to match the structure were attached.
F. Antenna Cables: Coaxial cables shall be 50 ohm RG-8x with minimum 95% shield and shall include PL
28 31 00 - 17
MS0612
259 and BNC type fittings or connectors as appropriate. Antenna cable for transmitter shall be RG-8x
coaxial cable if length is under 200 feet, 9913 if over 200 feet. Utilize proper fittings PL259 and BNC.
Cables is excess of 2 feet of the required length are not acceptable with a minimum 10 inches in the
panel. The antenna cable shall be installed in ¾ rigid aluminum conduit from radio to base of antenna
with no cables exposed use a ¾ coupling at the top of mast for the PL259.
G. Grounding of Antenna Systems: Antenna masts and static discharge unit ground terminals shall be
grounded in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70, Article 810-21, AFI 32-1065 and the
manufacturer's instructions, bonded to the facility lighting grid. Static discharge units and their enclosures
shall be located inside the buildings as close as practical to the antenna lead-in point of entry. Ground
rods shall be of copper-clad steel conforming to UL 4561 not less than 5/8 inch in diameter by ten feet in
length. Ground rods shall not protrude above grade, ground wire from rod to equipment shall be protected
in ½ EMT conduit. Ground rod shall be bonded to the building grounding system. Non-current-carrying
metallic parts associated with mass notification equipment shall have maximum resistance to solid earth
ground not to exceed the following values: Antennas/static discharge units 10 ohms; Radio alarm
transceivers 10 ohms.
3.20
Power Supply
A. Primary Power Supply: Primary power supply for ALL control units (this includes but not limited to FACP,
MNS, BTXM transceiver and power supplies. Shall be on a dedicated 20-amp branch circuit and
individually protected by surge protection devices part number EDCO Hsp121bt1r2 the circuit breaker shall
be protected from operation by unauthorized personnel by a circuit breaker guard. At locations where the
circuit breaker is out of sight of the fire alarm control panel, a disconnect switch shall be installed adjacent
to the control panel and clearly marked “FIRE ALARM”. The conductors feeding the control panel shall
be #12 AWG. Stake-on terminal lugs are not acceptable for wire terminations. Id tag will be rigid plastic.
Primary power supply wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing in accordance with the
applicable requirements of the NEC 70.
B. Standby Power Supply: Standby power to insure operation of the fire alarm system in the event of primary
power failure shall be provided by no more than two each maintenance free storage batteries.
C. Power supply shall be provided with an automatic battery charger capable of a high/low charge rate.
D. Battery shall have the capacity to operate the fire system for 24 hours and then be capable of sounding
all general alarms for fifteen minutes for all fire alarm systems.
E. Space for Future Use.
F. The charging circuit for all systems shall be supervised to indicate a low battery condition and be rated to
recharge fully discharged batteries in 24 hours.
3.21
Fire Department Equipment
A. The Contractor shall furnish transceiver that will interface, and be fully compatible with the Government
system installed at fire department. The existing system is a Monaco D21-M Radio Fire ALARM System.
B. Contractor shall supply and install signage displaying the building number meeting base specification.
3.22
A.
Drawing and Manuals
Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish two copies of
"as-built" drawings on CD or DVD and shall be in CAD format. Drawings shall show equipment
configuration, control panel equipment and subassembly locations, and the location of the transceiver and
all connecting Wiring. Drawings shall include all wiring color codes and terminal numbers and termination
points for all wires. They shall include a detailed wiring layout showing all junction boxes, all system
wiring, including number of wires, with zones and alarm sounding circuits, initiating and alarm sounding
devices identified by module number and strobes with candela rating. In addition, the Contractor shall
furnish two copies of a manual giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing, and
maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams. The layout shall be done on the building floor
plans. The final inspection cannot take place without the drawings.
3.23
Special Tools
28 31 00 - 18
MS0612
A.
All special tools or equipment necessary for the operation and maintenance of the equipment including
testing shall be furnished this includes but not limited to a laptop, software, cables and hardware keys
(dongle) if required. The items furnished will be new/unused items with packaging and manuals.
3.24
Repair of Existing Work
A. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance. Cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls,
partitions, ceilings or other surfaces as necessary for the proper installation, support, or anchorage of the
conduit or other work shall be carefully done. Damage to buildings, piping or equipment shall be repaired
and refinished by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
3.25 Tests
A. After all equipment for this system has been installed and made operational, and at a time directed by the
Contracting Office, the contractor shall conduct tests to demonstrate that the installation and the system
operation is in accordance with the plans and specifications. Testing of the system shall include remote
annunciation of alarms and trouble conditions to the fire department. In addition to the request letter, the
Contractor shall submit a test plan/procedure to the Contracting Officer to indicate his proposed method
to demonstrate compliance with the plans and specifications. The contractor will also certify in writing that
the work accomplished meets all contractual requirements. The government will provide one retest.
Subsequent testing will result in reimbursement of expenses to the Government. Satisfactory operation
of each of the following devices shall be demonstrated during the test:
1. Each automatic detector.
2. Each manual fire alarm station.
3. Each transceiver, all functions.
4. Each audible alarm device.
5. Each visual alarm device.
6. Supervision of each device such as; heat detectors, pull stations, smoke detectors, etc; and alarm
zone circuits to include ground faults.
7. Satisfactory operation after loss of primary power supply.
8. Satisfactory operation of each device shut down circuit with correct zone correspondence. This shall
not be simulated but shall actually be demonstrated by actual device/equipment shutdown.
9. All control panel functions, alarm and trouble, audible and visual indicators, silence switches and their
resound function and alarm resound features of the control unit.
10. In each zone containing automatic smoke detectors, each detector will be put into the alarm mode
and stay in that mode for 10 minutes after the last detector goes into alarm, to verify satisfactory
operation of the detectors and the detector power supply module under alarm load. Smoke is
expressly forbidden for this test.
11. Supervision of DC power on each automatic detector circuit.
B. Documentation Required. Every system shall include the following documentation, which shall be
delivered to the contracting officer two weeks prior to any initial inspections the system:
1. An owner’s manual and manufacturer's published instructions covering all system equipment. Provide
all manuals, drawings, technical/programming manual on a DVD disk.
2. Record drawings
3. For software-based systems, provide programming software, database, dongle key and computer
cable to connect to fire panel.
3.26
TRAINING
A. Equipment installer shall provide 1 day on site training for maintenance personnel.
B. 5 days of technical training to the government at the manufacturing facility. Training shall be
accomplished by the manufacturer of the equipment within 90 days. Training shall allow for classroom
instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. The
contractor shall furnish all literature, materials and training aids. Travel, Per Diem and hotel cost will be at
the government’s expense. Factory training shall occur within 3 months of system acceptance. The
training days will be Monday through Friday between 0700 and 1600.
C. Provide 2 days of training onsite for Hurlburt Fire Department.
D. The Contracting Officer will approve all training dates and times.
28 31 00 - 19
MS0612
3.27
Quality Control
A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for operations under the section to assure
compliance with contract requirements, and maintain records of his quality control for all materials,
equipment, and construction operations, including but not limited to the following:
1. Preparatory Inspection: (To be conducted prior to commencing work.)
2. Submittal of all materials and shop drawings necessary for accomplishment.
3. Have in hand equipment and wiring layout-showing sequence of wiring.
4. Qualifications of installing firm.
B. Initial inspection: (To be conducted after a representative sample of the work is complete.)
1. Check mounting heights, supports, accessibility of all items.
2. Check temperature ratings of detection against ceiling temperatures anticipated at detector locations.
3. Check size of conduit, boxes, and wires for proper sizing in accordance with National Electrical Code
and Contracts.
C. Follow-Up Inspection: (to be conducted daily to assure compliance with results of initial inspection.)
1. Determine that noted deficiencies are corrected.
2. Make corrections for "as-built" fire alarm system drawings.
3. Determine that all installed equipment is functional and in accordance with the contract requirement.
4. Operational test performed.
5. Damages or defects corrected.
A copy of these records and Contractor tests as well as records of corrective action taken, shall be
furnished the government as directed by the contracting officer.
3.28
Final Inspection
A. At the final inspection, a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the
major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect.
END OF SECTION
28 31 00 - 20
MS0612
SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING FOR ROADS AND PARKING LOTS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. This section includes Asphaltic concrete paving, tack coat, and preservative seal for roads, parking lots,
sidewalks, etc., but excludes airfields.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Specific tests as provided herein:
1. AASHTO:
American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials
2. ASTM:
American Society for Testing and Materials
3. FDOT:
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (SSRBC)
Note: References to “the Engineer” shall be read as “ the Contracting Officer”. SSRBC subsections
referring to “Basis of Payment” do not apply.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Sustainable Sites Certificates:
a. Certify paving materials solar reflectance index.
2. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit asphalt job mix formula for review by the Contracting Officer prior to placement of asphaltic
concrete under this contract. State of Florida Department of Transportation mix S-1 is considered an
acceptable mix for roads. Airfields are not included. State of Florida Department of Transportation mix
S-3 is considered an acceptable mix for parking lots.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Bituminous-concrete mixtures shall be sampled and tested for quality control during construction of the
bituminous-concrete courses as follows:
MATERIAL
REQUIREMENT
TEST METHOD
Uncompacted bituminous
concrete mix
Sampling
ASTM D 979
Asphalt
Cement content
Mechanical analysis
extracted aggregates
Recovery of asphalt
cement by Abson
Method
Penetration of recovered asphalt cement
Ductility of recovered
asphalt cement
ASTM D 2172
AASHTO T 30
32 12 16 - 1
ASTM D 1856
ASTM D 5
ASTM D 113
NUMBER OF
TESTS
One for each
mixture or day of
operation
MS0612
Compacted bituminousconcrete
Bulk density
AASHTO T 166
Marshall samples
Marshall Stability and
Flow Tests
ASTM D 5581
In-place pavement
Density and thickness
As specified
Same as specified
for uncompacted
mix
Three specimens
for each 1000
square yards (or
fraction thereof) of
completed
bituminous
concrete course
1.06
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to local (if any) and state requirements for paving work.
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Bituminous prime and tack coats shall be applied only when the ambient temperature in the shade is
above 50 °F or when the temperature has not been below 35 °F for 12 hours immediately prior to
application. Application may commence when the aggregate base course is dry or contains moisture not
in excess of the amount that will permit uniform distribution and the required penetration.
B. Bituminous-concrete courses shall be constructed only when the ambient temperature is above 40 ° F
and the underlying base course is dry.
1.08
PART 2
SPREADING EQUIPMENT
A. Self-propelled electronically controlled type, unless other equipment is authorized by the Contracting
Officer. Equip spreading equipment of the self-propelled electronically controlled type with hoppers,
tamping or vibrating devices, distributing screws, electronically adjustable screeds, and equalizing
devices. Capable of spreading hot bituminous mixtures without tearing, shoving, or gouging and
producing a finished surface of specified grade and smoothness. Operate spreaders, when laying
mixture, at variable speeds between 5 and 45 feet per minute. Design spreader with a quick and efficient
steering device; a forward and reverse traveling speed; and automatic devices to adjust to grade and
confine the edges of the mixture to true lines. The use of a spreader that leaves indented areas or other
objectionable irregularities in the fresh laid mix during operations is prohibited.
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Sustainable Sites Characteristics:
1. Paving Surfaces: Minimum solar reflectance index (SRI) of 29, calculated in accordance with ASTM
E1980.
a. Reflectance: Measured in accordance with ASTM E903, ASTM E1918, or ASTM C1549.
b. Emittance: Measured in accordance with ASTM E408 or ASTM C1371.
C. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of Project
site.
2.02
MATERIALS FOR BITUMINOUS CONCRETE
A. Aggregate for Bituminous-Concrete: Coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM D 692. Fine aggregate shall
conform to ASTM D 1073. The sand equivalent value shall be not less than 30.
B. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral dust, free of foreign matter.
C. Asphalt Cement: The asphalt cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3381, table 2, viscosity grade
AC-20.
32 12 16 - 2
MS0612
D. Bituminous Prime Coat: The bituminous prime coat shall be EPR-1 conforming to FDOT Specification
Section 916-4.1.
E. Bituminous Tack Coat: The bituminous tack coat shall be rapid-curing cut-back asphalt conforming to ASTM
D 2028, designation RC-70.
F. Job Mix Formulas: A job-mix formula for each bituminous-concrete mixture proposed for use in the work shall
be submitted for approval prior to start of work.
2.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Bituminous-concrete mixtures shall meet the performance requirements described when sampled, and tested.
Calculations shall be made for density and voids analyses.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
TEST PROPERTY
Number of compaction
blows, each end of
specimen
S-1/S-3
45 to 55
Marshall stability,
pounds
1500 minimum
Marshall flow,
1/100-inch units
8 minimum
14 maximum
Percent air
void
3 minimum
5 maximum
Percent of voids in
mineral aggregate (min)
14
2.04
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide mix design for asphalt under provisions of Section 01 41 00.
B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to commencement of work.
2.05
AGGREGATE GRADATION
A. The submitted job mix shall be within the design range of the following table for base and surface courses:
Percentage By Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves: Type S-1
1”
3/4
1/2
3/8
no. 4 no.10 no.16 no.40
100 95-100 88-100 75-93
47-75 31-53
19-35
Percentage By Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves: Type S-3
1/2” 3/8”
no. 4
no. 10 no.16
no. 40
no. 80
100 88-100 60-90
40-70
19-35
9-18
PART 3
no.80
7-21
no.100
no.100
2-6
no.200
no. 200
2-6
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify base conditions.
B. Verify that compacted aggregate base course is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
3.02
SUBBASE
A. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses: Refer to section 32 11 23 for the basis of work under this
subsection.
32 12 16 - 3
MS0612
3.03
PREPARATION - TACK COAT
A. Surface Preparation: Immediately before application of a bituminous prime coat to the aggregate base-course
surface or other contact surface, loose material or other objectionable substances shall be removed.
B. Priming the Base Course Surface: The prime coat shall be uniformly applied to the prepared base course
surface. The rate of application shall be within the range of 0.15 and 0.40 gallon per square yard of surface.
The temperature of the bituminous material at the time of application shall be within the range of 105 and 180
degrees F. Excess prime-coat material shall be squeegeed from the surface. Areas missed by the bituminous
prime coat distributor shall be treated with prime coat material by means of hand sprayers. Following the
application of prime coat material, the surface shall be allowed to dry without being disturbed for a period of
not less than 48 hours or longer as may be necessary. Blotting the prime coat with fine aggregate will not be
permitted.
C. Priming Other Contact Surfaces: Contact surfaces of curbs, gutters, manholes, and other structures
projecting into or abutting the pavement shall be coated with a thin, uniform coating of bituminous tack-coat
material prior to the bituminous-concrete mixture being placed against such structures. Following the
application of the tack coat, the surface shall be allowed to dry until it is in a condition of tackiness to receive
the bituminous-concrete mixture. Excess tack-coat material shall be squeegeed from the surface.
3.04
PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE
A. The bituminous-concrete mixture shall be placed on the prepared surface, uniformly spread and struck off.
Bituminous-concrete courses shall be placed in layers of approximately equal thickness except that no layer
shall be more than 2-inches thick after compaction.
B. Pavement Placing: Placing shall begin along the centerline of areas to be paved on a crowned section, at the
high side of a section with a one-way slope and in the direction of the traffic flow. The mixture for each course
shall be placed in strips not less than 10-feet wide. Progressive strip placement shall commence after rolling
of the first strip. Rolling shall be extended to overlap the preceding strips. Placing the bituminous-concrete
mixture shall be continuous.
C. Hand Placing: In areas where the use of machine spreading is not practicable, the mixture shall be spread
and finished by the use of heated hand tools. The mixture shall be dumped on approved dump boards and
distributed into place from the dump boards in a uniformly loose layer of a thickness that will, when
compacted, conform to required grade and thickness. The mixture shall be dumped no faster than it can be
handled properly by the shovelers and rakers.
D. Joints: Joints shall have the same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the course. Joints
between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work, shall be made to ensure a continuous
bond between the old and new sections of the pavement. Transverse joints in succeeding courses shall be
offset at least 24 inches. The edge of the previously placed course shall be cut back to expose an even
vertical surface over the full thickness of the course. Longitudinal joints in succeeding courses shall be offset
at least 6 inches. When the edges of longitudinal joints are irregular or do not conform to the specifications,
the edge shall be cut back to expose an even vertical surface over the full thickness of the course.
E. Machine Spreading: The range of temperatures of the mixtures at the time of spreading shall be between 275
degrees F and 300 degrees F. Bituminous concrete having temperatures less than minimum spreading
temperature when dumped into the spreader will be rejected. Adjust spreader and regulate speed so that the
surface of the course is smooth and continuous without tears and pulling, and of such depth that, when
compacted, the surface conforms with the cross section, grade, and contour indicated. Unless otherwise
directed, begin the placing along the centerline of areas to be paved on a crowned section or on the high side
of areas with a one-way slope. Place mixture in consecutive adjacent strips having a minimum width of 10
feet, except where the edge lanes require strips less than 10 feet to complete the area. Construct longitudinal
joints and edges to true line markings. Establish lines parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved, and
place string lines coinciding with the established lines for the spreading machine to follow. Provide the
number and location of the lines needed to accomplish proper grade control. When specified grade and
smoothness requirements can be met for initial lane construction by use of an approved long ski-type device
and for subsequent lane construction by use of a short ski or shoe, in-place string lines for grade control may
be omitted. Place mixture as nearly continuous as possible and adjust the speed of placing as needed to
permit proper rolling. Follow the following table for minimum spreading temperatures:
32 12 16 - 4
MS0612
F. Minimum Spreading Temperatures: Minimum temperature of the asphaltic concrete mixture at the point of
placement shall be 275 degrees F. Temperature to be taken within five (5) feet of spreader. Placement of
mixtures less than specified will not be allowed and any pavement not meeting this requirement will be
rejected.
3.05
COMPACTION
A. General: Compaction shall commence as soon after placing as the bituminous-concrete mixture will bear the
weight of the roller without undue displacement. During rolling, the wheels shall be kept moist with the
minimum amount of water required to avoid picking up the bituminous-concrete mixture. In places not
accessible to the rollers, the mixture shall be compacted with hot hand tampers.
B. Rolling Procedure: Rolling shall commence longitudinally at the extreme sides of lanes and proceed toward
the center of the pavement, except on superelevated curves. Rolling on superelevated curves shall
commence on the low side and progress to the high side, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half
the width of the rear wheel of the roller. Alternate trips of the roller shall be of slightly different lengths. Rollers
shall move at a slow but uniform speed with the drive roll or wheel nearest the paver. Speed of the rollers
shall not exceed 3 miles per hour for steel-wheeled rollers or 5 miles per hour for pneumatic-tired rollers.
C. Initial Rolling: The initial rolling shall immediately follow the rolling of the longitudinal joint and edges. Rollers
shall be operated as close to the paver as possible without causing undue displacement. Preliminary tests of
crown, grade and smoothness shall be made immediately after the initial rolling.
D. Second Rolling: The second rolling shall follow the initial rolling as closely as possible, while the mixture is
hot and in condition suitable for proper compaction. Rolling shall be continuous (at least 3 complete
coverages) after the initial rolling until the mixture has been compacted. Causing undue displacement will not
be permitted.
E. Finish Rolling: Finish rolling shall be done while the mixture is warm enough for the removal of roller marks.
Rolling shall continue until all roller marks are eliminated and the course has the specified density.
F. Patching Deficient Areas: Bituminous-concrete mixtures that become mixed with foreign material or that are
defective, such as low areas or "bird-baths," shall be removed, replaced with fresh bituminous-concrete
mixture to obtain the required grade and smoothness for the finished surface, and compacted to the specified
density. Pavement in deficient areas shall be removed to the full thickness of the bituminous-concrete
course and so cut that the sides are perpendicular and parallel to the direction of traffic and the edges are
vertical. Edges shall be sprayed with bituminous tack-coat material. Skin patching an area that has been
rolled will not be permitted.
G. Protection of Pavement: After final rolling, vehicular traffic shall not be permitted on the pavement until the
pavement has cooled and hardened and in no case sooner than 6 hours.
3.06
TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 25-foot straight edge.
B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 41 00.
B. Take samples and perform tests as listed herein.
C. Perform the following tests:
1. Density: For each 1000 tons of bituminous mixture placed, determine the representative laboratory
density in accordance with ASTM D 5581. Samples for laboratory specimens shall be taken from trucks
delivering mixture to the site; record in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer the project areas
represented by the laboratory densities. From each representative area recorded, determine field density
of pavement by densities of 4-inch diameter cores obtained from leveling, binder, and wearing courses;
take three cores for each 1000 square yards or fraction thereof of course placed. Determine density of
laboratory prepared specimens and cored samples in accordance with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726,
as applicable. Separate pavement layers by sawing or other approved means. Minimum Density shall
be 96 % of the representative laboratory density. Pavement with a density less than 96% will be
rejected. No averaging of densities will be considered.
32 12 16 - 5
MS0612
2. Thickness: Determine thickness of binder and wearing courses from samples taken for the field density
tests. The maximum allowable deficiency at any point shall not be more than 1/4-inch less than
the thickness for the indicated course. Average thickness of course or of combined courses shall be
not less than the indicated thickness.
3. Smoothness: Straightedge test the compacted surface of leveling, binder, and wearing courses as work
progresses. Apply straightedge parallel with and at right angles to the centerline after final rolling.
Unevenness of leveling and binder courses shall not vary more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet; variations in the
wearing course shall not vary more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet.
4. Finished Grades: Finish grades of each course placed shall not vary from the finish elevations, profiles,
and cross sections indicated by more than 1/2 inch. Finished surface of the final wearing course shall be
tested by running lines of levels at intervals of 25 feet longitudinally and transversely to determine
elevations of completed pavement. Within 45 days after completion of final placement, perform a level
survey at the specified grid spacing and plot the results on a plan drawn to the same scale as the
drawings. Elevations not in conformance with the specified tolerance shall be noted on the plan in an
approved manner. The Contracting Officer will inform the Contractor in writing of paved areas that fail to
meet the final grades indicated within the specified tolerances. Skin patching for correcting low areas is
prohibited.
5. Finish Surface Texture of Wearing Course: Visually check final surface texture for uniformity and
reasonable compactness and tightness. Final wearing course with a surface texture having undesirable
irregularities such as segregation, cavities, pulls or tears, checking, excessive exposure of coarse
aggregates, sand streaks, indentations, ripples, or lack of uniformity shall be removed and replaced with
new materials.
D. Correction of deficiencies: All deficiencies will be corrected by removal and replacement of the deficient
pavement. Limits of replacement will be determined by additional testing as required to define the area of
deficiency. All testing will be the responsibility of the contractor. All replacement will be full lane width with a
minimum length equal to the lane width.
END OF SECTION
32 12 16 - 6
MS0612
SECTION 32 92 23
PART 1
SODDING
GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of landscape work generally includes:
1. Weed Treatment
2. Soil Preparation
3. Sodding
4. Reconditioning Existing Turf Areas
5. Cleanup and Protection
6. Maintenance
B. Sub-grade Elevations: Excavation, filling and grading required to establish elevations shown on drawings
are not specified in this section. Refer to Earthwork sections. Subcontractors shall coordinate with
contractor on responsibility for earthwork.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. General: Planting materials shall meet or exceed the Specifications of Federal, State and local laws
requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control.
B. Sod shall conform to the following document that is to be considered part of these Specifications:
"Guideline Specifications to Sodding" American Sod Producers Association. (ASPA)
1.03
QUALIFICATIONS
A. The contractor shall have not less than 3 years experience installing sod.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Inspections: All necessary state, federal, and other inspection certificates shall accompany the invoice for
each shipment or order for sod materials as approval at the site or elsewhere.
B. Analysis and Standards: Pack standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. For other
materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by
the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable.
C. Provide the following samples prior to installation:
1. Herbicide: Label from container or supplier's brochure.
2. Fill Sand: One-ounce sample of sand.
3. Soil Amendments: Labels from all bags.
4. Sod: Submit sod grower's certification of grass species. Identify source location.
5. Soil Test: Contractor will have existing soil tested by an approved soil laboratory. Results of test shall
be forwarded to the Contracting Officer in accordance with Section 01 41 00 of the specifications.
The samples tested shall consist of a representative mixture from the site. Cost of the soil test and all
additives at rates recommended by the laboratory shall be included in the base bid. Soil Test shall
include these items and amendment rates of each needed for the specified sod: pH factor,
Potassium, Phosphorus, Calcium, Magnesium, N-P-K, and a nematode count.
1.06
JOB CONDITIONS
32 92 23 - 1
MS0612
A. Basic Regulations: Sodding operations shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during the
seasons, which are normal for such work as determined by acceptable practice in the locality. Contractor
is hereby notified of active utilities and caution shall be exercised to avoid interruption of services.
Contractor is responsible for replacement of any existing buried utilities, irrigation lines, etc., if they are
broken during the planting operations. Contractor shall obtain a digging permit and contact the
appropriate utility to have their location marked. If not, any damage to utilities will be repaired at the
contractor's expense. Contractor shall protect existing paved areas, curb/gutters, walks, etc. The
contractor will repair any damage.
B. When conditions detrimental to sod growth are encountered during soil preparation or planting, such as
rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Contracting Officer and correct before
planting.
C. Sequence of Work: Sod after irrigation and final grades are established unless otherwise acceptable to
Contracting Officer. Protect existing lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from
operations.
1.07
WARRANTY & REPLACEMENT
A. Contractor shall guarantee that at the end of 60 days following final building acceptance, all sod areas
shall have established grass that is uniform in color and quality, and is reasonably free from visible
imperfections. Any sod areas not in this condition will be replaced at no expense to the government.
Inspection to determine the condition of the sod areas will be made by the Contracting Officer upon
receiving such a request from contractor.
B. Contractor shall not be held responsible for damages to sod areas due to government neglect,
hurricanes, tornadoes, or for damage caused by theft or vandalism, other contractor's work on the site,
application of fertilizers, and pesticides or other materials not applied by him. The cost to repair damage
caused by another contractor shall be paid for by the contractor responsible for the damage. This
contractor shall immediately notify the prime contractor of the damage, etc.
C. Repair: When any portion of the surface becomes gullied or otherwise damaged due to drainage
conditions, the affected portion shall be repaired to reestablish condition and grade of soil to as it was
prior to injury as directed. Repair work required shall be performed without cost to the government.
Repair shall be made within 10 days or as soon as weather conditions are satisfactory for planting.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
2.02
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original containers showing weight, analysis and
name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.
B.
Deliver sod on pallets after preparations for sodding have been completed and lay immediately. Protect
sod from drying out. Use all means necessary to protect sod materials before, during and after
installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
C. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid in 24 hours. Sod not laid within 24 hours of delivery will
be rejected.
2.03
SOD
A. Sod Schedules: Contractor shall furnish the sod required to accomplish the work and leave no bare
areas.
1. General lawn use at buildings: Argentine Bahia, Paspalum Notatum or Common Bermuda grass,
Cynodon dactylon.
2. Large areas, airfield. etc.: Common Bermuda grass, Cynodon dactylon.
3. Playing fields; baseball, soccer, football, etc.: "Tifway" Bermuda, Cynodon dactylon.
32 92 23 - 2
MS0612
4. General lawn use Soundside area: Floratam St. Augustine, Stenotaphrum secundatum.
B. Provide strongly rooted sod of the type indicated on the drawings, ASPA approved field grown grade. All
sod shall be nursery grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project for a
minimum of two (2) years and machine cut and harvested to pad thickness of 3/4" to 1 1/4", excluding top
growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and development when planted with
maximum five percent (5%) deviation in either length, width, or pad thickness. Broken pads or pads with
uneven ends will not be acceptable.
C. Sod shall have root development, which will support its own weight, without tearing, when suspended
vertically by its two upper corners.
D. Sod shall be clear of non-specified grasses and weeds with not more than 3 weeds per pallet (500 SF).
E. Contracting Officer reserves the right to inspect grass areas from time of installation to Final Acceptance.
The time of inspection shall be after the grass has gone not mowed for a minimum of two weeks. Any
evidence of non-specified grasses or weeds will be cause for rejection and replacement of the
unacceptable lawn areas.
2.04
SOIL AMENDMENT
A. Fill Sand: Clean yellow fill, No. 4 to 200 Sand, pH 5.5 - 6.5.
B. Soil Amendment for All Sod (See 3.04 A for ratios):
1. Gro-Tone Bed Mix.
2. Black Kow Cow manure.
2.05
MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS
A. Water: Furnished by government or provided by the project irrigation system. Contractor shall provide
hose and other watering equipment.
B. Edging (if indicated on the drawings): Black Aluminum, 1/8" x 4" with stakes. Curve-Rite Aluminum
Edging (800) 366-2878, Sure-Loc (800) 787-3562, PermaLoc (800) 356-9660 or approved equal.
C. Mulch: Longleaf Pine Straw. Freshly baled, dry, and free of debris, leaves, insects, and briars.
D. Wood Pegs: Softwood, sufficient size and length to ensure anchorage of sod on slopes.
E. Herbicide (For Pre-Sod Treatment of Weeds, Etc.): Round-Up by Monsanto or approved equal.
F. Herbicide (During Maintenance Period): Submit Label / Manufacturer's instructions.
G. Fertilizer (for maintenance period): Gro-Tone Lawn Special 16-4-8 or approved equal. For winter
applications use approved winterizer.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
WEED TREATMENT
A. All site locations disturbed by site construction and to receive sod where weeds exist shall receive an
initial treatment of post-emergent herbicide. Planting areas shall not be disturbed for fourteen (14) days
following each application of herbicide. This treatment shall be repeated as required so that no weeds
are present at the date of final inspection of the Project and at the conclusion of the 60-day maintenance
period.
B. Post-emergent weed treatment includes removal of weeds and other undesirable ground cover vegetation
and shall be accomplished a minimum of fourteen (14) days prior to soil preparation for sodding
operations.
C. Care shall be taken not to affect existing trees or shrubs to be saved on the site. Also care will be taken
not to affect plants on adjacent site.
3.02
WEED TREATMENT PROCEDURE
32 92 23 - 3
MS0612
A. Mow grass and/or existing weeds in designated areas to 3" height.
B. Spray herbicide on a day that is not rainy or windy or below 65 degrees F.
C. Do not disturb soil for 14 days.
D. After 14 days, mechanically rake soil when the soil is not excessively hard or dry (water the soil if
necessary).
E. Remaining dead material shall be allowed to accumulate in place and shall be incorporated into the soil
through the roto-tilling of the soil preparation work.
3.03
SOIL PREPARATION AND BED LAYOUT
A. Contractor shall report immediately upon his awareness, any site condition or situation of the contiguous
landscape that would cause flooding, washing or concentration of excess surface water to the areas
receiving planting or lawn.
B. Prior to placement of any required fill sand, cultivate sub-grade to a minimum of four inches (4"). Remove
stones over one-half inch diameter (1/2") and sticks, roots, rubbish and other extraneous debris of any
dimension.
C. Fill sand is to be placed to obtain uniform site grade and proper drainage. Compact to a minimum
standard density of 80%.
D. Prior to fine grading install Edging and Stakes per manufacturer's instructions. Layout of Edging is as
indicated on the drawings. Straight runs are to be straight to within 1/2" and arcs are to be round to within
1/2" of plan dimensions. All Edging shall be truly square to other Edging or Sidewalks, etc. where shown.
E. Irrigation work, if included, shall be completed after roto-tilling and compaction, but prior to fine grading.
F. Fine Grading: The entire area shall be raked smooth after removing all rocks, roots and debris one-half
inch (1/2") in diameter or larger. Make changes to grade gradual and blend slopes into level areas. The
site shall be free from irregular surface changes and shall vary uniformly between fixed elevations.
G. Fine grade grass areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake and drag
lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grade. Limit fine grading to
areas which can be planted immediately after grading.
H. Allow for grass thickness in areas to be sodded and mulch thickness in shrub beds. Finish grade of soil
shall be two inches (2") below top of pavement in all areas.
3.04
SOIL MIXTURE
A. Mix specified soil amendment (see Section 2.02 A) by roto-tilling to a depth of four (4) inches:
1. Fifty (50) LBS of Bed Mix per One Thousand (1000) SF of Sod.
2. One Hundred (100) LBS of Cow Manure per One Thousand (1000) SF of Sod.
B. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, lumps, existing irrigation materials, and other
extraneous materials harmful or toxic to sod growth. (maximum acceptable lump size is 1/2".)
C. Contractor may be required to mix all ingredients of the planting soil mix in the presence of the project
inspector. All ingredients shall be thoroughly blended to provide a homogeneous mixture.
3.05
PREPARATION OF SOD AREAS
A. Bed preparation shall be done by hand within the drip-line of existing trees to protect the tree's roots.
B. Planting beds with weed growth shall be treated as necessary to remove weeds and re-inspected. No
beds shall be accepted with weeds or unspecified grass.
3.06
SODDING NEW LAWNS
A. Soil shall be prepared prior to sodding. See Sections 3.01 - 3.05.
32 92 23 - 4
MS0612
B. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen. Do not
use any piece of sod less than .5 SF (one-half square foot). Do not harvest or transport sod when
moisture content may adversely affect sod survival. Protect sod from sun, wind, and dehydration prior to
installation. Do not tear, stretch, or drop sod during handling and installation.
C. Prior to placement of sod, water soil thoroughly to obtain at least 6" (six) inches penetration into the soil
below the sod. Do not lay sod on dry or frozen ground.
D. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Tightly butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not
overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Continuously rake soil in area of installation to
assure a smooth finish grade. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with sub-grade. Work sifted soil into
minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass.
E. Neatly and cleanly edge sod with a sharpened instrument so as not to fray edges of sod. Continuously
re-sharpen during edging process.
F. Sod indicated areas within contract limits and areas adjoining contract limits disturbed as a result of
construction operations.
G. On slopes of 3:1 and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with wooden pegs at a
maximum of two (2) feet on center. Drive pegs flush with top of sod pad.
H.
Firmly press sod into contact with soil with roller weighing 100-150 pounds per lineal foot.
I.
Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting to obtain at least six inches (6")
penetration into the soil below the sod.
3.07
RECONDITIONING EXISTING TURF AREAS
A. Provide soil amendments, sod, fill sand and all other materials necessary to return turf to its original
condition before the start of the contract.
B. Recondition existing turf areas damaged by contractor's operations including storage for materials and
equipment and movement of vehicles. Re-grade as required. Fill low spots and meet new finish grades.
Cultivate bare and compacted areas thoroughly to provide a suitable soil for sod.
C.
Water newly reconditioned turf areas as required to establish turf. (60 Days Minimum).
3.08
MULCHING
A. Dress Mulching: Within two days after planting not less than three inches (3") of mulch shall be placed on
entire area of planting beds, and not less than four inches (4") over shrub and tree pits.
B. Edge mulch with a round-point shovel where beds are next to turf or walkways so that mulch is pushed
into soil and is kept in beds.
3.09
MAINTENANCE
A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting and continue until sixty (60) days after final acceptance of
the project, or longer as required to establish the turf.
B. Maintain newly sodded lawn areas by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other
operations such as rolling, re-grading and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn,
free of eroded or bare areas. Immediately replace sod in areas showing deterioration.
C. Apply herbicides and insecticides that will not inhibit growth but will prevent weed and insect damage to
turf. Comply with State of Florida and manufacturer's requirements for application of herbicides and
insecticides.
D. After sod is rooted, apply Fertilizer at the rate of Ten (10) Lbs. per 1000 SF. If winter apply the approved
winterizer at the medium rate listed on the bag.
E. Watering Schedule: Watering schedule is to include the duration and frequency each irrigation zone will
run per week; or, if there is no irrigation system the schedule of the watering truck or hand watering. This
will be worked out jointly with the irrigation contractor and shall be programmed on to the controller after
32 92 23 - 5
MS0612
review by BCE. Program shall be submitted to Contracting Officer as part of the final acceptance
process.
3.10
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During landscape work, all pallets, sod pieces, debris, and sand on pavement, shall be removed daily.
B. Any excess excavated subsoil or topsoil shall be removed from the site.
C. After sodding operations are finished, all paved areas which may have become strewn with soil or other
material shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping, and if necessary, power washing.
D. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other
contractors and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
3.11
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. The completed sod will be inspected at the time of the final inspection. Sod will also be inspected at the
end of the 60-day maintenance period.
B. Where inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue
specified maintenance until re-inspected and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected sod and materials
promptly from the project site.
END OF SECTION
32 92 23 - 6
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement